Hyundai Coupe 2003 Owner's Manual – PDF Download
Hyundai Coupe 2003 Owner’s Manual [PDF] | ManualsExpert
A000A01A-GAT
This Owner's Manual should be considered a part of the car and remain with it when it is sold for the use of the next owner.
ORIGINAL: ADDRESS:
DATE OF SALE: SUBSEQUENT: ADDRESS:
TRANSFER DATE:
OWNER'S I.D.
NAME: STREET: TOWN: COUNTY: P.CODE:
NAME: STREET: TOWN: COUNTY: P.CODE:
A020A01A-AAT
RESPONSIBILITY FOR MAINTENANCE
The maintenance requirements for your new Hyundai are found in Section 5. As the owner, it is your responsibility to see that all maintenance operations specified by the manufacturer are carried out at the appropriate intervals. When the vehicle is used in severe driving conditions, more frequent maintenance is required for some operations. Maintenance requirements for severe operating conditions are also included in Section 5.
OWNER'S MANUAL
A030A01F-GAT
Operation Maintenance Specifications
HGK037
All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.
This manual applies to all Hyundai models and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.
Please note that in Coupe/Tiburon models are equipped with Right-Hand Drive (RHD). The explanations and illustrations for some operations in RHD models are opposite of those written in this manual.
A040A01A-AAT
FOREWORD
Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people who drive Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of which we're very proud.
Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you read it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.
The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized Hyundai dealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.
A050A04A-AAT
HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY
Note: Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leave the manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.
CAUTION: Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 9-3 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.
Copyright 2003 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor Company.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
PAGE
1. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI ............................................................................... 1-1
1
2. DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI ......................................................................................... 2-1
2
3. WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY ........................................................................... 3-1
3
4. CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE ............................................. 4-1
4
5. VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS ............................................................ 5-1
5
6. DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE .......................................................................... 6-1
6
7. EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS .............................................................................. 7-1
7
8. CONSUMER INFORMATION ..................................................................................... 8-1
8
9. VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................... 9-1
9
10. INDEX ....................................................................................................................... 10-1
10
A070A01A-GAT
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI
Modification of components may void the manufacturer's warranty Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Modifications may adversely affect the safety, durability and performance of your Hyundai. Components which are subjected to modification or are added to the vehicle resulting in consequential damage are not covered by the vehicle manufacturer's warranty.
A080A01S-AAT
TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic systems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your Hyundai dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.
A090A01A-AAT
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE. These titles indicate the following:
WARNING: This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.
CAUTION: This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.
NOTE: This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.
A100A01L-GAT
GUIDE TO HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS 1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?
Hyundai Genuine Parts are the same parts used by Hyundai Motor Company to manufacture vehicles. They are designed and tested for the optimum safety, performance, and reliability to our customers.
2. Why should you use genuine parts? Hyundai Genuine Parts are engineered and built to meet rigid manufacturing requirements. Using imitation, counterfeit or used salvage parts are not covered under the Hyundai New Vehicle
Limited Warranty or any other Hyundai warranty. In addition, any damage to or failure of Genuine Hyundai Parts caused by the installation or failure of an imitation, counterfeit or used salvage part is not covered by Hyundai Motor Company.
3. How can you tell if you are purchasing Hyundai Genuine Parts? Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts Logo on the package (see below).
The export specifications are written in English only.
Hyundai Genuine Parts are only sold through authorized Hyundai Dealership and Service Center.
A100A03L
A100A01L
A100A02L
A100A04L
1. FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B010A02A-GAT
FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS Use Unleaded Gasoline
B010A01GK
Unleaded gasoline with a Pump Octane Rating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher must be used in Hyundai vehicle. If leaded gasoline is used, it will cause the catalytic converter to become ineffective and the emission control system to malfunction. This can also result in increased maintenance expense. To avoid accidental use of leaded fuel, the large nozzle used with leaded gasoline at service stations can not be inserted into fuel tank opening of Hyundai vehicle.
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
NOTE: o For some countries, Hyundai vehicles are
designed to use leaded gasoline. When you are going to use leaded gasoline, ask to Hyundai dealer whether leaded gasoline in your vehicle is available or not. o Octane Rating of leaded gasoline is same with unleaded one.
B010E01A-AAT
Gasolines for Cleaner Air
To help contribute to cleaner air, Hyundai recom-
mends that you use gasolines treated with deter-
gent additives, which help prevent deposit for-
mation in the engine. These gasolines will help the engine run cleaner and enhance performance
1
of the Emission Control System.
B010B01A-AAT
What About Gasohol? Gasohol (a mixture of 90% unleaded gasoline and 10% ethanol or grain alcohol) may be used in your Hyundai. However, if your engine develops driveability problems, the use of 100% unleaded gasoline is recommended. Fuels with unspecified quantities of alcohol, or alcohols other than ethanol, should not be used.
B010D01S-AAT
Do not Use Methanol Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) should not be used in your Hyundai. This type of fuel can reduce vehicle performance and damage components of the fuel system.
CAUTION: Your Hyundai's New Vehicle Limited Warranty may not cover damage to the fuel system and performance problems that are caused by the use of methanol or fuels containing methanol.
B010F01A-AAT
Operation in Foreign Countries If you are going to drive your Hyundai in another country, be sure to:
o Observe all regulations regarding registration and insurance.
o Determine that acceptable fuel is available.
B020A01S-GAT
BREAKING IN YOUR NEW HYUNDAI During the First 2,000 Km (1,200 Miles) No formal "break-in" procedure is required with your new Hyundai. However, you can contribute to the economical operation and durability of your Hyundai by observing the following recommendations during the first 2,000 km (1,200 miles).
o Don't drive faster than 88 km/h (55 mph). o While driving, keep your engine speed (rpm,
or revolutions per minute) between 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm. o Use moderate acceleration. Don't start, depress the accelerator pedal fully.
1- 1
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
o For the first 300 km (200 miles), try to avoid hard stops.
o Don't lug the engine (in other words, don't drive so slowly. In too high a gear that the engine "bucks" shift to a lower gear).
o Whether going fast or slow, vary your speed from time to time.
o Don't let the engine idle longer than 3 minutes at one time.
o Don't tow a trailer during the first 2,000 km (1,200 miles) of operation.
B030B01S-AAT
Record Your Key Number
B030A01A-AAT
KEYS
SSA1030A
For greater convenience, the same key operates all the locks in your Hyundai. However, because the doors can be locked without a key, carrying a spare key is recommended in case you accidentally lock one key inside the car.
SSA1030B
A code number is stamped on the key number plate that came with the keys to your Hyundai. This key number plate should be kept in a safe place, not in the vehicle. The key number should also be recorded in a place where it can be found in an emergency.
If you need additional keys, or if you should lose your keys, your authorized Hyundai dealer can make new keys if you can supply the key number.
B880A01A-GAT
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (If Installed) The immobilizer system is an anti-theft device, designed to deter automobile theft.
B880B03A-GAT
Keys
AX10020A-1
All of the locks fitted to the vehicle are operated by the same key. However, since it is possible to lock the doors without the use of the key, care should be exercised to ensure that the key does not become locked inside the vehicle by mistake. NOTE: If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to cancel the system or start the engine.
1- 2
B880C02A-GAT
Key Numbers
AX10030A-1
The vehicle key number is recorded upon a metal tag attached to the keys when the vehicle is first delivered to you. The key number should be recorded and kept in a safe place in case the need to order further keys arises. New keys are available from any Hyundai dealer by quoting the relevant key number. In the interest of security, the metal tag attached to the keys which bears the key number should be removed from the key ring after you receive your new vehicle. In addition, key numbers cannot be provided by Hyundai for security reasons. If you need additional keys or if you should lose your keys, your authorized Hyundai dealer can make new keys.
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B880D01GK-GAT
Limp Home Procedures In case the immobilizer system is out of order, you cannot start the engine without the limp home procedures with ignition key. The following procedure is how to start the engine with the function of the limp home. (0, 1, 2, 3 as a sample password).
NOTE: You can get the limp home password when the vehicle is first delivered to you. If you do not have the password, consult your authorized Hyundai dealer.
1. To set the password, you may turn the ignition key "ON" and then turn it "OFF" according to the digit numbers. For example, turn the ignition key once for digit number "1", and twice for "2", and so on. However, for the digit number "0", you must turn the ignition key for 10 times.
2. Wait for 3~10 seconds. 3. You may set the remaining number of digits
by following the same procedures 1 and 2. 4. If all of four digits have been tried success-
fully, from this time, you have to start your engine within 30 seconds. If you start your engine after 30 seconds, your engine will not start.
After doing the limp home procedure, you have to consult with your authorized Hyundai dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION: If you cannot start your engine in spite of limp home procedure, have your vehicle towed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.
B040A02Y-AAT
DOOR LOCKS
WARNING: o Unlocked doors can be dangerous. Be-
fore you drive away (especially if there are children in the car), be sure that all the doors are securely closed and locked so that the doors cannot be inadvertently opened from the inside. This helps ensure that the doors will not be opened accidentally. Also, when combined with the proper use of seat belts, locking the doors helps keep occupants from being ejected from the car in case of an accident. o Before opening the door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic. o In case of accident, the door is unlocked automatically (If installed).
1- 3
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B040B01A-AAT
Locking and Unlocking Front Doors With a Key
LOCK
UNLOCK
B040C01S-AAT
Locking From the Outside
B040D01S-AAT
Locking From the Inside
UNLOCK
LOCK
HGK101
o The door can be locked or unlocked with a key.
o Lock the door by turning the key toward the front of the vehicle and unlock it by turning the key toward the rear.
HGK099
The doors can be locked without a key. To lock the doors, first push the inside lock switch to the "LOCK" position so that the red mark on the switch is not visible, then close the door.
NOTE: o When locking the door this way, be careful
not to lock the door with the ignition key left in the vehicle. o To protect against theft, always remove the ignition key, close all windows, and lock all doors when leaving your vehicle unattended.
HGK208
To lock the doors from the inside, simply close the door and push the lock switch to the "LOCK" position. When this is done, neither the outside nor the passenger's inside door handle can be used.
NOTE: When the door is locked, the red mark on the switch is not visible.
1- 4
B040G01GK-GAT
Central Door Lock
HGK099
The central door locking is operated by pushing the driver's door lock switch toward the front or rear of the vehicle. If the passenger door is open when the switch is pushed, the door will remain locked when closed. NOTE: o When pushing the switch toward the rear,
all doors will unlock. When pushing the switch toward the front, all doors will lock. o When the door is unlocked, the red mark on the switch is visible. o The central door locking is operated by turning the key (driver's door only) toward the front or rear of the vehicle.
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B070A01A-AAT
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (If Installed) This system is designed to provide protection from unauthorized entry into the car. This system is operated in three stages: the first is the "Armed" stage, the second is the "Alarm" stage, and the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered, the system provides an audible alarm with blinking of the turn signal light.
B070B02GK-AAT
Armed Stage Park the car and stop the engine. Arm the system as described below.
1) Remove the ignition key from the ignition switch.
2) Make sure that the engine hood and tail gate are closed.
3) Lock the doors using the transmitter of the keyless entry system.
After completion of the steps above, the turn signal light will blink once to indicate that the system is armed.
NOTE: 1) If any door, tail gate or engine hood re-
mains open, the system will not be armed. 2) If this happens, rearm the system as de-
scribed above. 3) Once the system is armed, only the tail
gate may be unlocked using the key without disarming the system.
CAUTION: Do not arm the system until all passengers have left the car. If the system is armed while a passenger(s) remains in the car, the alarm may be activated when the remaining passenger(s) leaves the car.
B070C01GK-GAT
Alarm Stage The alarm will be activated if any of the following occur while the car is parked and the system is armed.
1) A front door is unlocked and opened without using the transmitter.
2) The tail gate is opened without using the key. 3) The engine hood is opened.
The siren will sound and the turn signal lights will blink continuously for 30 seconds. (E.C only/ Except E.C : This happens 3 times). To turn off the system, unlock the door with the transmitter.
CAUTION: Avoid trying to start the engine while the system is armed.
1- 5
B070D03GK-AAT
Disarmed Stage
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B070E02GK-GAT
Replacing the battery When the transmitter's battery begins to get weak, it may take several pushes on the button to lock or unlock the doors, and the LED will not light. Replace the battery as soon as possible.
Battery type : CR2032
Replacement instructions:
HGK102
The system will be disarmed when either of the following steps are taken:
1) The driver's or passenger's door is unlocked by depressing the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter.
2) In the middle of alarming or after alarming, it disarms after 30 seconds if the key is turned to and kept in the "ON" position.
3) If after disarming the system with the transmitter the doors are not opened within 30 seconds, the system will automatically rearm.
After completing one of steps above, the turn signal light will blink twice to indicate that the system is disarmed.
Screwdriver
HGK122
1. Carefully separate the case with a blade screwdriver as shown in the illustration.
Battery
HGK121
2. Remove the old battery from the case and note the polarity. Make sure the polarity of the new battery is the same(+side facing down), then insert it in the transmitter.
NOTE: Install a new battery within 30 seconds after removing the old one. If installing a new battery takes more than 30 seconds, take the following steps.
1) Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position.
2) Make sure that the turn signal lights blink once by pushing the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter.
1- 6
B050A01GK-AAT
WINDOW GLASS Power Window
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
(1)
HGK096
The power windows operate only when the ignition key is in the "ON" position. The main switches are located on the driver's arm rest and control the front windows on the respective sides of the vehicle. The windows may be opened by depressing the front portion of the switch. To stop at the desired opening, release the switch. The window may be closed by pulling the front portion of the switch. In order to prevent operation of the passenger front window by the passenger, a window lock switch (1) is provided on the arm rest of the driver's door. To disable the passenger's power window, push the window lock switch. To revert to normal operation, push in on the window lock switch again.
HGK097
CAUTION: Never try to operate the main switch and subswitch in opposing directions at the same time. If this is done, the window will stop and cannot be opened or closed.
Auto-Down Window (Driver's Side) (If Installed) The Auto-Down window is moved to its fully open position by pushing the switch. To stop at the desired position push in on the switch again.
B050A02GK
WARNING: o Be careful that head, hands and body are
not trapped by a closing window. o If passengers remain in the car when you
leave, especially if a child remains alone, always remove the ignition key for their safety.
1- 7
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B080A01A-AAT
ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATS WARNING: Never attempt to adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of control or an accident which may cause death, serious injury or property damage.
WARNING: To ensure the seat is locked securely, attempt to move the seat forward or rearward without using the lock release lever.
B080C01A-AAT
Adjusting Seatback Angle
B080B02A-AAT
Adjusting Seat Forward and Rearward
collision may be reduced significantly when the seat backs are reclined. There is greater risk that the driver and passenger will slide under the seat belt which may result in serious injury if a crash occurs when the seatbacks are reclined. The seat belt cannot provide full protection to an occupant if the seat back is reclined.
B080D02A-AAT
Adjustable Headrests
HGK054
To move the seat toward the front or rear, pull the lock release lever upward. This will release the seat on its track so you can move it forward or rearward to the desired position. When you find the position you want, release the lever and slide the seat forward or rearward on its track until it locks into the desired position and cannot be moved further.
1- 8
HGK051
To recline the seatback, lean forward to take your weight off it, then pull up on the recliner control lever at the outside edge of the seat. Now lean back until the desired seatback angle is achieved. To lock the seatback into position, release the recliner control lever.
WARNING: To minimize risk of severe injury in the event of a collision or a sudden stop, both the driver's and passenger's seatbacks should always be in an upright position while the vehicle is in motion. The protection provided by the seat belts and airbags in a frontal
Lock Knob
HGK049
Headrests are designed to help reduce the risk of neck injuries. To raise the headrest, pull it up. To lower it, push it down while pressing the lock knob.
WARNING: o For maximum effectiveness in case of an
accident, the headrest should be adjusted so the top of the headrest is at the same height as the top of the occupant's ears.
The use of a cushion that holds the body away from the seatback is not recommended. o Do not operate the vehicle with the headrests removed as severe injury to an occupant may occur in the event of an accident. Headrests may provide protection against severe neck injuries when properly adjusted.
B080E01F-AAT
Lumbar Support Control (Driver's seat only) (If Installed)
SOFT
FIRM
HGK052
The driver's seat is equipped with adjustable lumbar support. To increase the amount of lumbar support, pull the lever forward. To decrease it, push the lever toward the rear.
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B080F01F-AAT
Seat Cushion Height Adjustment (Driver's Seat Only) (If Installed)
The seat warmer is provided to warm the front seats during cold weather. With the ignition key in the "ON" position, push either of the switches to warm the driver's seat or the passenger's seat. During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat warmer is not needed, keep the switches in the "OFF" position.
B129A01F-AAT
REAR SEAT POSITIONS
HGK050
To raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion, turn the knob forward or rearward.
B100A01Y-AAT
SEAT WARMER (If Installed)
HGK123
B129A01GK
WARNING: This vehicle contains two rear seating positions only and a seat belt for each seating position. Thus, never permit more than two occupants to ride in the rear seat because an unrestrained occupant could be seriously injured or killed in the event of a vehicle crash.
1- 9
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B130A01GK-AAT
REAR SEAT ENTRY (Walk in device) The driver and front passenger's seatbacks should be tilted to enter the rear seat.
(1)
(2) HGK053
By pulling up the walk in device lever (1) at the leftupper side of the driver side seatback, the seatback will tilt forward. Then pull the lock release lever (2) up to move the seat forward.
By pulling up the walk in device lever (1) at the right-upper side of the passenger side seatback, the seatback will tilt forward. Then push the seat forward to allow the occupants to enter.
Recliner Memory By pulling up the walk in device lever (1), the seatback is reclined and returned to the original position.
WARNING: Don't drive with the passenger side seatback reclined. It is dangerous to move it while driving. Be sure the seatback is caterred firmly before driving.
B099A01F-AAT
BEFORE FOLDING THE REAR SEATS
(1)
1- 10
HGK240
B099A01GK
In order to prevent the shoulder belt from being damaged while folding the rear seat, the shoulder belt must be passed through the hanger to keep it out of the way. CAUTION: Seat belts must be removed from the hanger when in use.
B110A02S-AAT
FOLDING REAR SEATBACKS
HGK108
The rear seatbacks may be folded to facilitate carrying long items or to increase the luggage capacity of the vehicle. o To unlock the seatback, push the seatback
locking button, then pull forward on the seatback panel. o When you return the seatback to its upright position, always be sure it has locked into position by pulling and pushing on the top of the seatback.
WARNING: The purpose of the fold-down rear seatbacks is to allow you to carry longer objects than could otherwise be accommodated. Never allow passengers to sit on top of the folded down seat back while the car is moving as this is not a proper seating position and no seat belts are available for use. This could result in injury in case of an accident or sudden stop. Objects carried on the folded down seatback should not extend higher than the top of the front seats. This could allow cargo to slide forward and cause injury or damage during sudden stops.
B140A01S-AAT
REAR SEAT WARNING
B140A01GK
For the safety of all passengers, luggage or other cargo should not be piled higher than the top of the seatback. In addition, do not place objects on
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
the rear shelf as they may move forward during braking or in an accident and strike vehicle passengers.
B150A02A-GAT
SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS All occupants of the vehicle should wear their seat belts at all times. Indeed, your province's laws may require that some or all occupants of the vehicle use seat belts. The possibility of injury or the severity of injury in an accident will be decreased if this elementary safety precaution is observed. In addition, the following recommendations are made:
B150B01A-GAT
Infant or Small Child Some countries require the use of child restraint systems for infants and small children. Whether this is required by law or not, it is strongly recommended that a child restraint seat or infant restraint system be used for infants or small children weighing less than 18 kilograms (40 pounds).
B150C02A-AAT
Larger Children Children who are too large for child restraint systems should always occupy the rear seat and use the available lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion should be fastened snug on the hips and as low as possible. Check belt fit periodically. A child's squirming could put the belt out of position. Children are afforded the most safety in the event of an accident when they are restrained by a proper restraint system in the rear seat. If a larger child (over age 13) must be seated in the front seat, the child should be securely restrained by the available lap/shoulder belt and the seat should be placed in the rearmost position. Children under the age of 13 should be restrained securely in the rear seat. NEVER place a child under the age of 13 in the front seat. NEVER place a rear facing child seat in the front seat of a vehicle.
B150D01A-AAT
Pregnant Women The use of a seat belt is recommended for pregnant women to lessen the chance of injury in an accident. When a seat belt is used, the lap belt portion should be placed as low and snugly as possible on the hips, not across the abdomen. For specific recommendations, consult a physician.
1- 11
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B150E01A-AAT
Injured Person A seat belt should be used when an injured person is being transported. When this is necessary, you should consult a physician for recommendations.
B150F01A-AAT
One Person Per Belt Two people (including children) should never attempt to use a single seat belt. This could increase the severity of injuries in case of an accident.
The shoulder belt can't do its job because it won't be against your body. Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash you could go into it with great force, receiving serious neck or other injuries. The lap belt can't do its job either. In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be applied there, not at your strong pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit back in the seat and wear your seat belt properly.
B150G01A-AAT
Do Not Lie Down To reduce the chance of injuries in the event of an accident and to achieve maximum effectiveness of the restraint system, all passengers should be sitting up and the front seats should be in an upright position when the car is moving. A seat belt cannot provide proper protection if the person is lying down in the rear seat or if the front seat is in a reclined position.
WARNING: Sitting in a reclined position or lying down when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle up, your seat belts can't do their job when you're reclined.
1- 12
B160A01S-GAT
CARE OF SEAT BELTS Seat belt systems should never be disassembled or modified. In addition, care should be taken to assure that seat belts and belt hardware are not damaged by seat hinges, doors or other abuse.
B160B01A-AAT
Periodic Inspection It is recommended that all seat belts be inspected periodically for wear or damage of any kind. Parts of the system that are damaged should be replaced as soon as possible.
B160C01A-AAT
Keep Belts Clean and Dry Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. If belts become dirty, they can be cleaned by using a mild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong detergents or abrasives should not be used because they may damage and weaken the fabric.
B160D01A-AAT
When to Replace Seat Belts Entire in-use seat belt assembly or assemblies should be replaced if the vehicle has been involved in an accident. This should be done even if no damage is visible. Additional questions concerning seat belt operation should be directed to your Hyundai Dealer.
B170A04A-AAT
HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEAT SHOULDER BELT (If installed)
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
WARNING: o The height adjuster must be in the locked
position when the vehicle is moving. o The misadjustment of height of the shoul-
der belt could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt in a crash.
extend and let you move around. If there is a sudden stop or impact, however, the belt will lock into position. It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly. Check to make sure that the belt is properly locked and that the belt is not twisted.
HGK109
You can adjust the height of the shoulder belt anchor to one of the 4 positions for maximum comfort and safety. If the height of the adjusting seat belt is too near your neck, you will not be getting the most effective protection. The shoulder portion should be adjusted so that it lies across your chest and midway over your shoulder nearest the door and not your neck. To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor, lower or raise the height adjuster into an appropriate position. To raise the height adjuster, pull it up. To lower it, push it down while pressing the height adjuster button. Release the button to lock the anchor into position. Try sliding the height adjuster to make sure that it has locked into the position.
B180A02A-GAT
SEAT BELTS 3-Point System with Emergency Locking Retractor To Fasten Your Belt
FUA1090P
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert the metal tab into the buckle. There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into the buckle. The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, the belt will
B200A01S-GAT
Adjusting Your Seat Belt
FUA1090Q
You should place the belt as low as possible on your hips, not on your waist. If the belt is located too high on your body, you could slide under it in case of accident or a sudden stop. This could result of death, serious injury or property damage. Both arms should not be under or over the belt. Rather, one should be over and the other under, as shown in the illustration. Never wear the seat belt under the arm nearest the door.
1- 13
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B210A01A-AAT
To Release the Seat Belt
FUA1090R
The seat belt is released by pressing the release button in the locking buckle. When it is released, the belt should automatically draw back into the retractor. If this does not happen, check the belt to be sure it is not twisted, then try again.
B230A03A-GAT
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(If Installed)
Children riding in the car should sit in the rear seat and must always be properly restrained to minimize the risk of injury in an accident, sudden stop or sudden maneuver. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats than in the front seat. Larger children not in a child restraint should use one of the seat belts provided. You are required by law to use safety restraints for children. If small children ride in your vehicle you must put them in a child restraint system (safety seat). Children could be injured or killed in a crash if their restraints are not properly secured. For small children and babies, a child seat or infant seat must be used. Before buying a particular child restraint system, make sure it fits your car seat and seat belts, and fits your child. Follow all the instructions provided by the manufacturer when installing the child restraint system.
WARNING: o A child restraint system must be placed in
the rear seat. Never install a child or infant seat on the front passenger's seat. Should an accident occur and cause the passenger side airbag to deploy, it could severely injure or kill an infant or child seated in an infant or child seat. Thus, only use a child restraint in the rear seat of your vehicle. o Since a safety belt or child restraint system can become very hot if it is left in a closed vehicle, be sure to check the seat cover and buckles before placing a child there. o When the child restraint system is not in use, store it in the trunk or fasten it with a safety belt so that it will not be thrown forward in the case of a sudden stop or an accident. o Children who are too large to be in a child restraint should sit in the rear seat and be restrained with the available lap/shoulder belts. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. o Always make sure that the shoulder belt portion of the outboard lap/shoulder belt is positioned midway over the shoulder, never across the neck or behind the back. Moving the child closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt fit. The lap belt portion of the lap/
1- 14
shoulder belt must always be positioned as low as possible on the child's hips and as snug as possible. o If the seat belt will not properly fit the child, Hyundai recommends the use of an approved booster seat in the rear seat in order to raise the child's seating height so that the seat belt will properly fit the child. o Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the seat. o Never use an infant carrier or child safety seat that "hooks" over a seatback; it may not provide adequate security in an accident. o Never allow a child to be held in a person's arms while they are in a moving vehicle, as this could result in serious injury to the child in the event of an accident or a sudden stop. Holding a child in a moving vehicle does not provide the child with any means of protection during an accident, even if the person holding the child is wearing a seat belt. o If the child restraint is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being seriously injured or killed in a collision greatly increases.
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B230G01A-GAT
Installation on the Outboard Rear Seats On outboard rear seats
B230G01GK
To install a child restraint system in the outboard rear seats, extend the shoulder/lap belt from its retractor. Install the child restraint system, buckle the seat belt and allow the seat belt to take up any slack. Make sure that the lap portion of the belt is tight around the child restraint system and the shoulder portion of the belt is positioned so that it cannot interfere with the child's head or neck. After installation of the child restraint system, try to move it in all directions to be sure the child restraint system is securely installed. If you need to tighten the belt, pull more webbing toward the retractor. When you unbuckle the seat belt and allow it to retract, the retractor will automatically revert back to its normal seated passenger emergency locking usage condition.
NOTE: o Before installing the child restraint sys-
tem, read the instructions supplied by the child restraint system manufacturer. o If the seat belt does not operate as described, have the system checked immediately by your authorized Hyundai dealer.
WARNING: Do not install any child restraint system in the front passenger seat. Should an accident occur and cause the passenger side airbag to deploy, it could severely injure or kill an infant or child seated in an infant or child seat. Therefore, only use a child restraint system in the rear seat of your vehicle.
1- 15
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B230B02GK-GAT
Using a Child Restraint System with "Tether Anchorage" System
B230E02GK-GAT
Securing a Child Restraint System with "Tether Anchorage" System
Cover, Child Restraint Hook Holder
Bolt, Holder (5/16"-30 mm)
Washer, Conical Spring
Holder, Child Restraint Hook
Spacer, Hook Holder Cover
Spacer (10 mm), Child Restraint
Hook Holder
Retainer Washer
B230B01Y
For small children and babies, the use of a child seat or infant seat is required. This child seat or infant seat should be of appropriate size for the child and should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. It is further required that the seat be placed in the vehicle's rear seat since this can make an important contribution to safety. Your vehicle is provided with two child restraint hook holders for installing the child seat or infant seat.
Load Space Cover
Tether strap hook
Front of Vehicle
Back panel
B230E01GK
Two child restraint hook holders are located on the vertical back panel.
1. Route the child restraint seat strap over the seatback. For vehicles with adjustable headrests, route the tether strap under the headrest and between the headrest posts, otherwise route the tether strap over the top of the seatback.
2. Remove the load space cover. 3. Connect the tether strap hook to the child
restraint hook holder and tighten to secure the seat.
1- 16
B230D01GK-GAT
Securing a Child Restraint System with "ISOFIX" System and "Tether Anchorage" System (If installed)
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
NOTE: At present, this seat is the only one complying with that provision. In case that other manufacturers will furnish proof of a respective certification, Hyundai is going to evaluate this seat carefully and will give a recommendation provided that seat complies to the law. Please ask your Hyundai dealer in this respect.
ISOFIX Anchor
ISOFIX Anchor Position Indicator
NOTE: An ISOFIX-child-seat can only be installed if the seat has a vehicle-specific approval according to ECE-R44. Before using the ISOFIXchild-seat, which was bought for another car, ask your Hyundai-dealer whether this seattype is approved and recommended for your Hyundai.
To secure the child restraint seat
B230F01GK
ISOFIX is a standardised method of fitting child seats that eliminates the need to use the standard adult seat belt to secure the seat in the vehicle. This enables a much more secure and positive location with the added benefit of easier and quicker installation.
An ISOFIX-seat can only be installed if it has vehicle-specific approval in accordance with the requirements of ECE-R44. For your Hyundai, the Hyundai ISOFIX GR1 / Hyundai Duo / Römer ISOFIX GR1 and the Römer Duo ISOFIX / Britax Duo ISOFIX is approved according to the requirement ECE-R44. This seat has been tested extensively by Hyundai and is recommended for your Hyundai.
B230D02GK
On each side of the rear seat, between the cushion and backrest, are located a pair of ISOFIX anchorage points together with a top tether mounting on the luggage compartment. During the installing, the seat has to be engaged at the anchorage-points in a way you can hear it clicking (check by pulling!) and has to be fixed with the Top Tether-belt on the belonging point in the luggage-compartment. The installing and the use of a child-seat has to be done according to the installing-manual, which is added to the ISOFIXseat.
HGK261
1. To engage the child restraint seat to the ISOFIX anchor, insert the child restraint seat latch into the ISOFIX anchor. Listen for the audible "click" sound.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the child restraint hook holder and tighten to secure the seat. Refer to "Securing a Child Restraint System with the Tether Anchorage System" on page 1-15.
1- 17
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
WARNING: o There is no center rear seating position. o Do not install a child restraint seat at the
center of the rear seat using the vehicle's ISOFIX anchors. The ISOFIX anchors are only provided for the left and right outboard of the rear seat. Do not misuse the ISOFIX anchors by attempting to attach a child restraint seat in the middle of the rear seat to the ISOFIX anchors. In a crash, the child restraint seat ISOFIX attachments may not be strong enough to secure the child restraint seat properly in the center of the rear seat and may break, causing serious injury or death. o Do not mount more than one child restraint to a child restraint lower anchorage point. The improper increased load may cause the anchorage points or tether anchor to break, causing serious injury or death. o Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible child restraint seat only to the appropriate locations shown in the illustration. o Always follow the installation and use instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint.
B230H03GK-GAT
Child Seat Restraint Suitability For Seat
Position (If installed) Use child safety seats that have been officially approved and are appropriate for your children.
Age Group
Seating Position
1st
Rear Rear
Passenger Outboard Center
0 : Up to 10 kg
(0 ~ 9 months)
X
X
N/A
0+ : Up to 13 kg
(0 ~ 2 years)
X
X
N/A
I : 9kg to 18kg
(9 months ~ 4 years)
X
L1
N/A
II & III : 15kg to 36kg
(4 ~ 12 years)
X
X
N/A
U :Suitable for "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group
UF :Suitable for forward-facing "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group
L1: Suitable for "Römer ISOFIX GR1" approved for use in this mass group (Approval No: E1 R44-03301133)
X : Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group
N/A: No seating position is provided
1- 18
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with thether anchorage and ISOFIX system to supply most suitable safety (EC ONLY). we recommend to buy a child restraint system to use thether anchorage and ISOFIX system.
B180B01GK-GAT
Pre-tensioner Seat Belt (If Installed) Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped with driver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts. The purpose of the pre-tensioner is to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly against the occupant's body in certain frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat belts can be activated alone or, where the frontal collision is severe enough, together with the airbags.
B180B01S
The pre-tensioner seat belt operates in a similiar way as an Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) type of seat belt. When the vehicle stops sudden-
ly, or if the occupant tries to lean forward too quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock into position. In certain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner will activate and pull the seat belt into tighter contact against the occupant's body.
Driver's airbag 1 Passenger's airbag
3 2
B180B01GK
The seat belt pre-tensioner system consists mainly of the following components. Their locations are shown in the illustration. 1. SRS airbag warning light 2. Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly 3. SRS control module
WARNING: To obtain maximum benefit from a pretensioner seat belt: 1. The seat belt must be worn correctly. 2. The seat belt must be adjusted to the
correct position.
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
NOTE: o Both the driver's and front passenger's
pre-tensioner seat belts will be activated in certain frontal collisions. The pretensioner seat belts can be activated alone or, where the frontal collision is severe enough, together with the airbags. o When the pre-tensioner seat belts are activated, a loud noise may be heard and fine dust, which may appear to be smoke, may be visible in the passenger compartment. These are normal operating conditions and are not hazardous. o Although it is harmless, the fine dust may cause skin irritation and should not be breathed for prolonged periods. Wash your hands and face thoroughly after an accident in which the pre-tensioner seat belts were activated.
CAUTION: o The control module that activates the SRS
airbag controls the pre-tensioner seat belt also. o If there is some function in the pretensioner seat belt circuit, the warning light will illuminate even if there is no malfunction in the SRS airbag system. If the SRS airbag warning light does not illuminate or illuminates continuously when the ignition key is turned to "ON", or if it remains illuminated after blinking for approximately 6 seconds, or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being driven,
please have an authorized Hyundai dealer inspect the pre-tensioner seat belts and SRS airbag system as soon as possible.
WARNING: o Pre-tensioners are designed to operate
only one time. After activation, pretensioner seat belts must be replaced. All seat belts, of any type, should always be replaced after they have been worn during a collision. o The pre-tensioner seat belt assembly mechanisms become hot during activation. Do not touch the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies for several minutes after they have been activated. o Do not attempt to inspect or replace the pre-tensioner seat belts yourself. This must be done by an authorized Hyundai dealer. o Do not strike the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies. o Do not attempt to service or repair the pretensioner seat belt system in any manner. o Improper handling of the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies, and failure to heed the warnings to not strike, modify, inspect, replace, service or repair the pretensioner seat belt assemblies may lead to improper operation or inadvertent activation and serious injury. o Always wear seat belts when driving or riding in a motor vehicle.
1- 19
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B240A01GK-GAT
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT (AIRBAG) SYSTEM (SRS) (If Installed) Driver's Airbag
B240A01GK
Your Hyundai is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint (Airbag) System. The indications of the system's presence are the letters "SRS AIR BAG" embossed on the ornament in the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel pad above the glove box.
The Hyundai SRS consists of airbags installed under the pad covers in the center of the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel above the glove box. The purpose of the SRS is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt system alone, in case of a frontal impact of sufficient severity.
NOTE: Be sure to read information about the SRS on the labels provided on the backside of the sun visor and in the glove box.
WARNING: o As its name implies, the SRS is designed
to work with, and be supplemental to, the driver's and the passenger's three point seat belt systems and is not a substitute for them. Therefore, your seat belts must be worn at all times while the vehicle is in motion. The airbags deploy only in certain frontal impact conditions severe enough to cause significant injury to the vehicle occupants. o The SRS is designed to deploy the airbags only when an impact is sufficiently severe and when the impact angle is less than 30° from the forward longitudinal axis of the vehicle and will not deploy in side, rear or rollover impacts. Additionally, the airbags will only deploy once. Thus, seat belts must be worn at all times. o Front airbags are not intended to deploy in light collisions in which protection can be provided by the seat belt alone.
Rear impact
Side Impact
Rollover
B240A02GK
o Front airbags are not intended to deploy in side-impact, rear-impact or rollover crashes. In addition, airbags will not deploy in frontal crashes below the deployment threshold speed.
o The driver should sit back as far as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle. If you are sitting too close to the airbag, it can cause death or serious injury when it inflates.
o No objects should be placed over or near the airbag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, and the front passenger's panel above the glove box, because any such object could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the airbags to deploy.
o If the airbags deploy, they must be replaced by an authorized Hyundai dealer.
1- 20
o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring, or other components of the SRS system. Doing so could result in injury, due to accidental firing of the airbags or by rendering the SRS inoperative.
o Do not install a child restraint system in the front passenger seat position. A child restraint system must never be placed in the front seat. The infant or child could be severely injured or killed by an airbag deployment in case of an accident.
o Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. If older children (teenagers and older) must ride in the front seat, make sure they are always properly belted and that the seat is moved back as far as possible.
o For maximum safety protection in all types of crashes, all occupants including the driver should always wear their seat belts whether or not an airbag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the airbag while the vehicle is in motion.
o The SRS airbag system must deploy very rapidly to provide protection in a crash. If an occupant is out of position because of not wearing a seat belt, the airbag may forcefully contact the occupant causing serious or fatal injuries.
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B240B01GK-GAT
SRS Components and Functions
B240B01L
The SRS consists of the following components: - Driver's Airbag Module - Passenger's Airbag Module - SRS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI) - SRS Control Module (SRSCM) The SRSCM continually monitors all elements while the ignition is "ON" to determine if a frontal or near-frontal impact is severe enough to require airbag deployment. The SRS service reminder indicator (SRI) on the instrument panel will blink for about 6 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position or after the engine is started, after which the SRI should go out.
The airbag modules are located both in the center of the steering wheel and in the front passenger's panel above the glove box. When the SRSCM detects a considerable impact to the front of the vehicle, it will automatically deploy the airbags. CAUTION: Do not install or place any accessories (drink holder, cassette holder, sticker, etc) on the front passenger's panel above the glove box in a vehicle with a passenger's air bag. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the passenger's air bag inflates.
B240B02L
Upon deployment, tear seams molded directly into the pad covers will separate under pressure from the expansion of the airbags. Further opening of the covers then allows full inflation of the airbags.
1- 21
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
CAUTION: When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside a vehicle, do not place it near the instrument cluster nor on the instrument panel pad surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas (instrument cluster, instrument panel pad or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the air freshener does leak onto these areas, wash them with water immediately.
B240B03L
A fully inflated airbag in combination with a properly worn seat belt slows the driver's or the passenger's forward motion, thus reducing the risk of head and chest injury. After complete inflation, the airbag immediately starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility.
Passanger's Airbag 1- 22
B240B01GK
FUA1115A
WARNING: o When the SRS is activated, there may be a
loud noise and fine dust will be released throughout the vehicle. These conditions are normal and are not hazardous. However, the fine dust generated during airbag deployment may cause skin irritation. Wash your hands and face thoroughly with lukewarm water and a mild soap after an accident in which the airbags were deployed.
o The SRS can function only when the ignition key is in the "ON" position. If the SRS SRI does not come on or illuminates continuously when the ignition key is turned to "ON", or continuously remains on after flashing for about 6 seconds when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, or after the engine is started, comes on while driving, the SRS is not working properly. If this occurs, have your vehicle immediately inspected by your Hyundai dealer.
o Before you replace a fuse or disconnect a battery terminal, turn the ignition key to the "LOCK" position or remove the ignition key. Never remove or replace the air bag related fuse(s) when the ignition key is in the "ON" position. Failure to heed this warning will cause the SRS SRI to illuminate.
B990B04Y-AAT
Side Impact Airbag
B990B02Y
Your Hyundai is equipped with a side impact airbag in each front seat. The purpose of the airbag is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt alone. The side impact airbags are designed to deploy only during certain side-impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact. The side impact airbags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations.
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
WARNING: o The side impact airbag is supplemental to
the driver's and the passenger's seat belt systems and is not a substitute for them. Therefore your seat belts must be worn at all times while the vehicle is in motion. The airbags deploy only in certain side impact conditions severe enough to cause significant injury to the vehicle occupants. o For best protection from the side impact airbag system and to avoid being injured by the deploying side impact airbag, both front seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened. The driver's hands should be placed on the steering wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 o'clock positions. The passenger's arms and hands should be placed on their laps. o Do not use any accessory seat covers. o Use of seat covers could prevent or reduce the effectiveness of the system. o Do not install any accessories on the side or near the side impact airbag. o Do not use excessive force on the side of the seat. o Do not place any objects over the airbag or between the airbag and yourself. o Do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplemental side impact airbag inflates.
o To prevent unexpected deployment of the side impact airbag that may result in personal injury,avoid impact to the side airbag sensor when the ignition key is on.
B240C02Y-GAT
SRS Care The SRS is virtually maintenance-free and there are no parts you can safely service by yourself. The entire SRS system must be inspected by an authorized Hyundai dealer 10 years after the date that the vehicle was manufactured. Any work on the SRS system, such as removing, installing, repairing, or any work on the steering wheel must be performed by a qualified Hyundai technician. Improper handling of the SRS system may result in serious personal injury.
YT10355A
1- 23
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
WARNING: o Do not install a child restraint system in
the front passenger seat position. A child restraint system must never be placed in the front seat. The infant or child could be severely injured by an airbag deployment in case of an accident. o Extreme Hazard! Do not use a reward facing restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in front of it! o Modification to SRS components or wiring, including the addition of any kind of badges to the pad covers or modifications to the body structure, can adversely affect SRS performance and lead to possible injury. o For cleaning the airbag pad covers, use only a soft, dry cloth or one which has been moistened with plain water. Solvents or cleaners could adversely affect the airbag covers and proper deployment of the system. o No objects should be placed over or near the airbag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, and the front passenger's panel above the glove box, because any such object could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the airbags to inflate. o If the airbags inflate, they must be replaced by an authorized Hyundai dealer.
o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring, or other components of the SRS system. Doing so could result in injury, due to accidental firing of the airbags or by rendering the SRS inoperative.
o If components of the airbag system must be discarded, or if the vehicle must be scrapped, certain safety preca utions must be observed. Your Hyundai dealer knows these precautions and can give you the necessary information. Failure to follow these precautions and procedures could increase the risk of personal injury.
o If you sell your vehicle, be sure to inform the new owner of these important points and make certain that this manual is transferred to the new owner.
o If your car was flooded and has soaked carpeting or water on flooring, you shouldn't try to start engine; have the car towed to authorized Hyundai dealer.
1- 24
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B250A01GK-GAT
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 123 4
5 67 89 10
11
12
13 14
15
16 17181920 21 2223 24 25 26
HGK001A
CAUTION:
When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the
instrument cluster nor on the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air
freshener onto these areas (Instrument cluster, instrument panel or air ventilator), it may damage
these parts. If the liquid from the air freshener does leak onto these areas, wash them with water
immediately.
1. Head Light Leveling Device (If installed) 2. Traction Control System (If installed) 3. Panel Brightness Control Knob
(Rheostat Switch) (If installed) 4. Multi-Function Light 5. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch 6. Front Fog Light Switch (If installed) 7. Rear Fog Light Switch (If installed) 8. Hazard Warning Switch 9. Digital Clock 10. Front Seat Warmer (If installed) 11. Passenger's Air Bag (If installed) 12. Passenger's side Drink Holder 13. Hood Release Lever 14. Fuse Box Relay 15. Steering Wheel Tilt Lever 16. Horn and Driver's Airbag 17. Cruise Control Switch (If installed) 18. Heating and Cooling Controls 19. Ashtray 20. Cigarette Lighter 21. Shift Lever 22. Audio System (If installed) 23. Multi Guage (If installed) 24. Parking Brake Lever 25. Glove Box 26. Center Console
1- 25
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B260A01GK-GAT
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
1
2 34 5 6 7 2
8
1. Speedometer 2. Turn Signal Indicator Light 3. Odometer/Trip Odometer 4. Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light
(If installed) 5. Coolant Temperature Gauge 6. Trip Computer 7. Fuel Gauge
1- 26
HGK026C
14
9 10
11 12 13 151617 18 1920 21 22 23
8. Tachometer 9. Traction Control Indicator Light (If installed) 10. Door Ajar Warning Light 11. Odometer/Trip Odometer Reset Knob 12. Charging System Warning Light 13. SRS (Airbag) Warning Light 14. Seat Belt Warning Light 15. High Beam Indicator Light 16. Oil Pressure Warning Light
17. Malfunction Indicator Light (If installed) 18. Low Fuel Warning Light 19. Parking Brake/Brake Fluid Level Warning
Light 20. Trip Computer Reset Knob 21. Cruise Indicator (If installed) 22. Tailgate Open Warning Light 23. Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light (If installed)
B260B01GK-GAT
AIR SRS (Airbag) Service BAG Reminder Indicator (SRI) The SRS service reminder indicator (SRI) comes on and flashes for about 6 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position or after the engine is started, after which it will go out.
This light also comes on when the SRS is not working properly. If the SRI does not come on or illuminates continuously when the ignition key is turned to "ON", or continuously remains on after flashing for about 6 seconds when you turned the ignition key to the "ON" position or started the engine, or if it comes on while driving, have the SRS inspected by an authorized Hyundai Dealer.
B260P02Y-GAT
ABS Service Reminder Indicator
(SRI)(If installed) When the key is turned to the "ON" position, the Anti-Lock Brake System will come on and then go off in a few seconds. If the ABS SRI remains on, comes on while driving, or does not come on when the key is turned to the "ON" position, this indicates that there may be a problem with the ABS. If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by your Hyundai dealer as soon as possible. The normal braking system will still be operational, but without the assistance of the anti-lock brake system.
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
WARNING: If the both ABS SRI and Parking Brake/Brake fluid level warning lights remain "ON" or come on while driving, there may be a problem with E.B.D (Electronic Brake Force Distribution). If this occurs, avoid sudden stops and have your vehicle checked by your Hyundai dealer as soon as possible.
B260D01A-AAT
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
The blinking green arrows on the instrument panel show the direction indicated by the turn signals. If the arrow comes on but does not blink, blinks more rapidly than normal, or does not illuminate at all, a malfunction in the turn signal system is indicated. Your dealer should be consulted for repairs.
B260F01A-AAT
High Beam Indicator Light
B260G01A-AAT
Low Oil Pressure Warning Light
CAUTION: If the oil pressure warning light stays on while the engine is running, serious engine damage may result. The oil pressure warning light comes on whenever there is insufficient oil pressure. In normal operation, it should come on when the ignition switch is turned on, then go out when the engine is started. If the oil pressure warning light stays on while the engine is running, there may be a serious malfunction. If this happens, stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so, turn off the engine and check the oil level. If the oil level is low, fill the engine oil to the proper level and start the engine again. If the light stays on with the engine running, turn the engine off immediately. In any instance where the oil light stays on when the engine is running, the engine should be checked by an authorized Hyundai dealer before the car is driven again.
The high beam indicator light comes on whenever the headlights are switched to the high beam or flash position.
1- 27
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B260H01GK-AAT
Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid
Level Warning Light CAUTION: If you suspect brake trouble, have your brakes checked by a Hyundai dealer as soon as possible. Driving your car with a problem in either the brake electrical system or brake hydraulic system is dangerous, and could result in a serious injury or death.
Warning Light Operation The parking brake/brake fluid level warning light should come on when the parking brake is applied and the ignition switch is turned to "ON" or "START". After the engine is started, the light should go out in three seconds. If the parking brake is not applied, the warning light should come on when the ignition switch is turned to "ON" or "START", then go out in three seconds. If the light comes on at any other time, you should slow the vehicle and bring it to a complete stop in a safe location off the roadway. The brake fluid level warning light indicates that the brake fluid level in the brake master cylinder is low and hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications should be added. After adding fluid, if no other trouble is found, the car should be immediately and carefully driven to a Hyundai dealer for inspection. If further trouble is experienced, the vehicle should not be driven at all but taken to a dealer by a professional towing service or some other safe method.
1- 28
Your Hyundai is equipped with dual-diagonal braking systems. This means you still have braking on two wheels even if one of the dual systems should fail. With only one of the dual systems working, more than normal pedal travel and greater pedal pressure are required to stop the car. Also, the car will not stop in as short a distance with only half of the brake system working. If the brakes fail while you are driving, shift to a lower gear for additional engine braking and stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so.
B260J01S-GAT
Charging System Warning Light
The charging system warning light should come on when the ignition is turned on, then go out when the engine is running. If the light stays on while the engine is running, there is a malfunction in the electrical charging system. If the light comes on while you are driving, stop, turn off the engine and check under the hood. First, make certain the generator drive belt is in place. If it is, check the tension of the belt. And then, have the system checked by your Hyundai dealer.
CAUTION: If the drive belt (generator belt) is loose, broken, or mission while the vehicle is driving, there may be a serious malfunction, engine could overheat because this belt also drives the water pump.
B260K01F-AAT
Tail Gate Open Warning Light
This light remains on unless the tail gate is completely closed.
B260L01A-GAT
Door Ajar Warning Light
The door ajar warning light warns you that a door is not completely closed.
B260M01A-AAT
Low Fuel Level Warning Light
The low fuel level warning light comes on when the fuel tank is approaching empty. When it comes on, you should add fuel as soon as possible. Driving with the fuel level warning light on or with the fuel level below "E" can cause the engine to misfire and damage the catalytic converter.
B265C01O-AAT
Traction Control Indicator Lights (If installed) The traction control indicators change operation according to the ignition switch position and whether the system is in operation or not. They will illuminate when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, but should go out after three seconds. If the TCS or TCS-OFF
indicator stays on, take your car to your authorized Hyundai dealer and have the system checked. See section 2 for more information about the TCS.
B260N01GK-AAT
Malfunction Indicator Light (If installed) This light illuminates when there is a malfunction of an exhaust gas related component, and the system is not functioning properly so that the exhaust gas regulation values are not satisfied. This light will also illuminate when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, and will go out after engine starting. If it illuminates while driving, or does not illuminate when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, take your car to your nearest authorized Hyundai dealer and have the system checked.
B260E01HP-GAT
Seat Belt Warning Light (If Installed) The seat belt warning light blinks for about 6 seconds when the ignition key is turned from the "OFF" position to "ON" or "START".
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B260Q01E-GAT
Cruise Indicator (If Installed)
B280A01A-AAT
FUEL GAUGE
The cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the cruise control main switch on the end of the barrel is pushed. The indicator light does not illuminate when the cruise control main switch is pushed a second time. Information about the use of cruise control is beginning on page 1-46.
B270A01A-AAT
BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING SOUND
The front disc brake pads have wear indicators that should make a high-pitched squealing or scraping noise when new pads are needed. The sound may come and go or be heard all the time when the vehicle is moving. It may also be heard when the brake pedal is pushed down firmly. Excessive rotor damage will result if the worn pads are not replaced. See your Hyundai dealer immediately.
HGK133
The needle on the gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel capacity is given in Section 9.
B290A02A-AAT
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE
HGK132
1- 29
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. The engine coolant is under pressure and could erupt and cause severe burns. Wait until the engine is cool before removing the radiator cap.
The needle on the engine coolant temperature gauge should stay in the normal range. If it moves across the dial to "H" (Hot), pull over and stop as soon as possible and turn off the engine. Then open the hood and, after the engine has cooled, check the coolant level and the water pump drive belt. If you suspect cooling system trouble, have your cooling system checked by a Hyundai dealer as soon as possible.
B300A01A-GAT
SPEEDOMETER
B330A02A-AAT
TACHOMETER
HGK131A
The tachometer registers the speed of your engine in revolutions per minute (rpm). CAUTION: The engine should not be raced to such a speed that the needle enters the red zone on the tachometer face. This can cause severe engine damage and may void your warranty.
B310B01GK-GAT
ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER
HGK028A
Function of digital odometer/trip odometer Pushing in the reset switch on the right side of speedometer when the ignition switch is turned "ON" will display the following sequence:
1
2
HGK130A
Your Hyundai's speedometer is calibrated in kilometers per hour or miles per hour. 1- 30
3
HGK055A
1. Odometer The odometer records the total driving distance in kilometers or miles, and is useful for keeping a record for maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Any alteration of the odometer may void your warranty coverage.
2,3 Trip odometer Records the distance of 2 trips in kilometers or miles. TRIP A: First distance you have traveled from your origination point to a first destination. TRIP B: Second distance from the first destination to the final destination.
To shift from TRIP A to TRIP B, press the reset switch. When pressed for 1 second, it will reset to 0.
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B400B01GK-GAT
TRIP COMPUTER
A Type
DISTANCE TO EMPTY AVERAGE SPEED
B Type
HGK095A
The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information gauge that displays information related to driving, such as estimated distance to empty, average speed and drive time on the LCD.
RESET SWITCH o The reset switch is used to zero the multi-
functional display mode. o Pushing in the reset switch on the left side of
tacometer changes the display as follows;
DRIVE TIME
1. DISTANCE TO EMPTY
A Type
B Type
HGK056
o This mode provides the estimated distance to empty from the current fuel in the fuel level tank.
o The trip computer may not register additional fuel if less than 6 liters of fuel are added to the vehicle.
o When the battery has been reinstalled after being discharged or disconnected, drive more than 32km for an accurate distance to empty. 1- 31
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
NOTE: o If the distance to empty is indicated "- -",
have the trip computer system checked by your authorized Hyundai dealer. o The distance to empty can differ from the actual tripmeter according to driving conditions. o The distance to empty can vary according to the driving conditions, driving pattern or vehicle speed.
2. AVERAGE SPEED
A Type
B Type
3. DRIVE TIME A Type
B Type
HGK058
o This mode indicates the drive time travelled since the last drive time reset.
o To reset the drive time to zero, press and hold the reset switch for more than 1 second while the drive time is being displayed.
B330C01GK-GAT
MULTI GAUGE (If installed) Multi gauge is consists of torque gauge, instantaneous fuel consumption gauge and volt gauge.
HGK229A
Torque gauge It shows instantaneous change of the torque by rpm.
HGK057A
o This mode indicates the average speed travelled since the last average speed reset.
o To reset the average speed to zero, press and hold the reset switch for more than 1 second while the average speed is being displayed.
1- 32
HGK230
Instantaneous Fuel Consumption gauge It shows instantaneous fuel consumption according to the driving condition. The more indicated figure is low, the more it indicates efficient driving situation.
HGK231
Volt gauge It shows moment volt change and makes for diver correspond to low volt situation.
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B340A01A-AAT
COMBINATION TURN SIGNAL, HEADLIGHT AND HIGH-BEAM SWITCH Turn Signal Operation Pulling down on the lever causes the turn signals on the left side of the car to blink. Pushing upwards on the lever causes the turn signals on the right side of the car to blink. As the turn is completed, the lever will automatically return to the center position and turn off the turn signals at the same time. If either turn signal indicator light blinks more rapidly than usual, goes on but does not blink, or does not go on at all, there is a malfunction in the system. Check for a burnedout fuse or bulb or see your Hyundai dealer.
B340B01A-AAT
Lane Change Signal
HGK038
To indicate a lane change, move the lever up or down to a point where it begins flashing.
The lever will automatically return to the center position when released.
B340C03E-AAT
Headlight Switch
HGK039
To operate the headlights, turn the barrel on the end of the multi-function switch. The first position turns on the parking lights, sidelights, tail lights and instrument panel lights. The second position turns on the headlights. NOTE: The ignition must be in the "ON" position to turn on the headlights. Parking light auto cut (If installed) If you do not turn the parking lights "OFF" after driving, the parking lights will automatically shut "OFF" when the driver's door is opened. To turn them "ON" again, you must simply turn the ignition key to the "ON" position.
1- 33
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B340F01A-GAT
Daytime Running Lights
(If Installed) Your Hyundai is equipped with daytime running lights. The daytime running lights are used to improve visibility for oncoming traffic. Your vehicle daytime running lights are designed to remain on continuously when the engine is operating even though the headlight switch is in the "OFF" position. However, the daytime running lights will be off while the parking brake is applied.
B340D01A-AAT
High-beam Switch To turn on the headlight high beams, push the lever forward (away from you). The high beam indicator light will come on at the same time. For low beams, pull the lever back toward you.
To operate the automatic light feature, turn the barrel on the end of the multi-function switch. If you set the multi-function switch to "AUTO", the tail lights and headlights will be turned automatically on or off according to external illumination.
B340E01A-AAT
Headlight Flasher
B340G01L-GAT
Auto Light (If installed)
HGK233
To flash the headlights, pull the switch lever toward you, then release it. The headlights can be flashed even though the headlight switch is in the "OFF" position.
B350A01A-AAT
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
(1)
(2)
(3)
HGK042
The windshield wiper switch has three positions:
(1) Intermittent wiper operation (2) Low-speed operation (3) High-speed operation
NOTE: To prevent damage to the wiper system, do not attempt to wipe away heavy accumulations of snow or ice. Accumulated snow and ice should be removed manually. If there is only a light layer of snow or ice, operate the heater in the defrost mode to melt the snow or ice before using the wiper.
1- 34
HGK041
B350B01O-AAT
Windshield Washer Operation
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
Mist Wiper Operation
To use the intermittent wiper feature, place the wiper switch in the "INT" position. With the switch in this position, the interval between wipes can be varied from 2 to 10 seconds by turning the interval adjuster barrel.
B350A01O-AAT
Tailgate Wiper And Washer Switch
HGK044
To use the windshield washer, pull the wiper/ washer lever toward the steering wheel. When the washer lever is operated, the wipers automatically make two passes across the windshield. The washer continues to operate until the lever is released.
NOTE: o Do not operate the washer more than 15
seconds at a time or when the fluid reservoir is empty. o In icy or freezing weather, be sure the wiper blades are not frozen to the glass prior to operating the wipers. o In areas where water freezes in winter, use windshield washer antifreeze.
HGK045
If a single wipe is desired in mist, push the windshield wiper and washer control lever upwards.
B350C01S-AAT
Adjustable Intermittent Wiper Operation
HGK043
HGK046
1. :The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the rear window and the wiper operates while the rear window wiper barrel is placed in this position.
2.OFF 3.INT :To use the intermittent wiper feature,
place the rear window wiper barrel in the "INT" position. 4.ON :When the point indicates "ON", the rear window wiper operates continuously.
1- 35
B370A01A-AAT
HAZARD WARNING SYSTEM
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B380A01A-AAT
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER SWITCH
A Type
B400A01A-AAT
DIGITAL CLOCK (If Installed)
A Type
B Type
B Type
HGK140
The hazard warning system should be used whenever you find it necessary to stop the car in a hazardous location. When you must make such an emergency stop, always pull off the road as far as possible. The hazard warning lights are turned on by pushing in the hazard switch. This causes all turn signal lights to blink. The hazard warning lights will operate even though the key is not in the ignition. To turn the hazard warning lights off, push the switch a second time.
1- 36
B380A01GK
The rear window defroster and heated outsides rearview mirrors are turned on by pushing in the switch. To turn the defroster off, push the switch a second time. The rear window defroster automatically turns itself off after about 15 minutes. To restart the defroster cycle, push in the switch again after it has turned itself off.
CAUTION: Do not clean the inner side of the rear window glass with an abrasive type of glass cleaner or use a scraper to remove foreign deposits from the inner surface of the glass as this may cause damage to the defroster elements.
NOTE: The ignition must be in the "ON" position for the rear window defroster to operate.
HGK143
There are three control buttons for the digital clock. Their functions are:
HOUR - Push "H" to advance the hour indicated. MIN - Push "M" to advance the minute indicated. RESET - Push "R" to reset minutes to ":00" to facilitate resetting the clock to the correct time. When this is done:
Pressing "R" between 10 : 30 and 11 : 29 changes the readout to 11 : 00. Pressing "R" between 11 : 30 and 12 : 29 changes the readout to 12 : 00.
B410A01A-AAT
INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHT CONTROL (RHEOSTAT)
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B420A02A-AAT
CIGARETTE LIGHTER
B430A01GK-AAT
FRONT ASHTRAY
HGK134A
The instrument panel lights can be made brighter or dimmer by turning the instrument panel light control knob.
HGK144
For the cigarette lighter to work, the key must be in the "ACC" position or the "ON" position. To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the way into its socket. When the element has heated, the lighter will pop out to the "ready" position. Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed in. This can damage the heating element and create a fire hazard. If it is necessary to replace the cigarette lighter, use only a genuine Hyundai replacement or its approved equivalent.
CAUTION: Do not use electric accessories or equipment other than the Hyundai genuine parts in the socket.
HGK146
The front ashtray may be opened by pushing and releasing the ashtray door at its top edge. To remove the ashtray in order to clean it, the metal ash receptacle should be lifted out from the ashtray door. Do not attempt to remove the entire ashtray door assembly or damage will result. To reinstall it, place it in the proper position and press it down in the ashtray door. The ashtray lamp will only illuminate when the exterior body lights are switched on.
1- 37
B450A01GK-GAT
DRINK HOLDER (If Installed)
Driver's
Passenger's
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B340G01A-GAT
HEADLIGHT LEVELING DEVICE SYSTEM (If Installed)
HGK149
The drink holder is used for holding cups or cans. To use the passenger's drink holder, push the drink holder.
WARNING: Do not place objects other than cups or cans in the drink holder. Such objects can be thrown out in the event of a sudden stop or an accident, possibly injuring the passengers in the vehicle.
HGK157
To adjust the headlight beam level according to the number of the passengers and the loading weight in the luggage area, turn the beam leveling switch. The higher the number of the switch position, the lower the headlight beam level. Always keep the headlight beam at the proper leveling position, or headlights may dazzle other road users. Listed below are the examples of proper switch settings. For loading conditions other than those listed below, adjust the switch position so that the beam level may be the nearest as the condition obtained according to the list.
1- 38
Loading condition
Driver only Driver + front passenger Full passengers (including driver) Full passengers (including driver) + full trunk loading (or light trailer loading) Driver + full trunk loading (or maximum trailer loading)
B460A01Y-AAT
SUNROOF (If installed) Sun Shade
Switch position
0 0 1
2
3
HGK029
Your HYUNDAI is equipped with a sliding sunshade which you can manually adjust to let in light with the sunroof closed, or to block sunlight.
WARNING: Never adjust the sunshade while driving.
B460B01GK-GAT
Opening the Sunroof System
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
CAUTION: o Do not open the sunroof in severely cold
temperature or when it is covered with ice or snow. o Periodically remove any dirt that may have accumulated on the guide rails.
B460D03GK-AAT
Manual Operation of Sunroof If the sunroof does not electrically operate:
B460C01GK-GAT
Tilting the Sunroof System
HGK030
The sunroof can be electrically opened or closed with the ignition key in the "ON" position. The sunroof is moved to its fully open position by pushing the "OPEN" switch, and to stop at the desired position, push in any switches (Open, Close, Up, Down). To close, press and hold the "CLOSE" button. Release the button when the sunroof reaches the desired position.
WARNING: o Do not close a sunroof if anyone's hands,
arms or body are between the sliding glass and the sunroof sash, as this could result in injury. o Do not place your head or arms out of the sunroof opening at any time.
HGK031
The sunroof is moved to its fully tilt up position by pushing the "UP" switch, and to stop at the desired position, push in any switches (Open, Close, Up, Down). To tilt down, press and hold the "DOWN" button. Release the button when the sunroof reaches the desired position.
NOTE: After washing the car or after there is rain, be sure to wipe off any water that is on the sunroof before operating it.
HGK032
1. Remove the cap located in the rear roof panel by using a coin or screw driver.
HGK033
2. Insert the hexagonal head wrench provided with the vehicle into the socket. This wrench can be found in the vehicle's trunk or glove box. 1- 39
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
3. Push and turn the wrench clockwise to close or counterclockwise to open the sunroof.
B480A01GK-GAT
MAP LIGHT
B491A01F-GAT
SPECTACLE CASE (If Installed)
B460E02GK-GAT
Resetting the Sunroof System If the battery has been recharged, disconnected or if the sunroof is operated with the hexagonal head wrench manually, you may need to reset the sunroof.
To do this; 1. Turn the ignition switch "OFF". 2. With pressing "open" "up" button at the same
time, turn the ignition switch "ON".
The resetting is failed when the ignition key to the "OFF" within 1.5 seconds.
3. If the sunroof is set like this, the sunroof is reset with tilting up/down automatically once for all.
CAUTION: If the sunroof is not reset, it may not be operated properly.
(1) (2) (3)
HGK034
(1) Push in the map light switch to turn on the driver side light.
(2) In the "DOOR" position, the interior courtesy light comes on when any door is opened regardless of the ignition key position. The light goes out gradually 6 seconds after the door is closed.
(3) Push in the map light switch to turn on the passenger side light.
HGK036
The spectacle case is located on the front overhead console. Push the end of the cover to open the spectacle case.
WARNING: Do not open the spectacle case while the vehicle is moving. The rear view mirror of the vehicle can be blocked by an open spectacle case.
1- 40
B500A01A-AAT
GLOVE BOX
HGK147
WARNING: To avoid the possibility of injury in case of an accident or sudden stop, the glove box door should be kept closed when the car is in motion. o To open the glove box, pull on the glove box
release lever.
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B510B01Y-AAT
OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR Electric Type
HGK128
The outside rearview mirrors can be adjusted to your preferred rear vision, both directly behind the vehicle, and to the rear of the left and right sides. The remote control outside rearview mirror switch controls the adjustments for both the right and left outside mirror.
To Adjust the Position of Either Mirror: 1. Move the selecting switch to the right or left to
activate the adjustable mechanism for the corresponding door mirror. 2. Now, adjust the mirror angle by depressing the appropriate perimeter switch as illustrated.
CAUTION: o Do not operate the switch continuously
for an unnecessary length of time. o Scraping ice from the mirror face could
cause permanent damage. To remove any ice, use a sponge, soft cloth or approved deicer.
WARNING: Be careful when judging the size or distance of any object seen in the passenger side rearview mirror. It is a convex mirror with a curved surface. Any objects seen in this mirror are closer than they appear.
B510D01Y-AAT
OUTSIDE REARVIEW HEATER (If Installed)
A Type
MIRROR
B Type
B380A01GK
1- 41
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
The outside rearview mirror heater is actuated in connection with the rear window defroster. To heat the outside rearview mirror glass, push in the switch for the rear window defroster. The rearview mirror glass will be heated for defrosting or defogging and will give you improved rear vision in inclement weather conditions. Push the switch again to turn the heater off. The outside rearview mirror heater automatically turns itself off after 15 minutes.
B510C01A-AAT
FOLDING THE OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRRORS
WARNING: Do not adjust or fold the outside rearview mirrors while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of control, and an accident which could cause death, serious injury or property damage.
B520A01A-AAT
DAY/NIGHT INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
B520B01O-GAT
DAY/NIGHT REAR VIEW MIRROR (Electric type) (If installed)
Sensor
B520B01GK
The electric type day/night inside rearview mirror automatically controls the glare of headlights of the car behind you. Adjust the rearview mirror to the desired position.
B510C01GK
To fold the outside rearview mirrors, push them towards the rear. The outside rearview mirrors can be folded rearward for parking in narrow areas.
B520A01GK
Your Hyundai is equipped with a day/night inside rearview mirror. The "night" position is selected by flipping the tab at the bottom of the mirror toward you. In the "night" position, the glare of headlights of cars behind you is reduced.
1- 42
B530A01A-AAT
PARKING BRAKE
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B360A01F-AAT
FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH (If Installed)
B360B01GK-GAT
REAR FOG LIGHT SWITCH (If installed)
HGK178
Always engage the parking brake before leaving the car. This also turns on the parking brake indicator light when the key is in the "ON" or "START" position. Before driving away, be sure that the parking brake is fully released and the indicator light is off.
o To engage the parking brake, pull the lever up as far as possible.
o To release the parking brake, pull up the lever and press the thumb button. Then, while holding the button in, lower the brake lever.
HGK142
To turn on the front fog lights, push the switch. They will light when the headlights are turned on.
HGK183
To turn on the rear fog lights, push the switch. They will come on when the headlights are turned on.
1- 43
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B550A01S-GAT
HIGH-MOUNTED REAR STOP LIGHT
A Type
B Type
C Type
B620A01S-AAT
FRONT DOOR EDGE WARNING LIGHT
1. Pull the release knob to unlatch the hood.
B550A01GK
In addition to the lower-mounted rear stoplights on either side of the car, the high mounted rear stoplight in the center of the rear window or inserted in the rear spoiler also lights when the brakes are applied.
1- 44
B620A01GK
A red light comes on when the front door is opened. The purpose of this light is to assist when you get in or out and also to warn passing vehicles.
B570A01GK-GAT
HOOD RELEASE
Hood Release Lever
HGK106
HGK098
2. Press the secondary latch lever up and lift the hood.
3. Raise the hood by hand.
When closing the hood, slowly close the hood and make sure it locks into place.
WARNING: o Always double check to be sure that the
hood is firmly latched before driving away. If it is not latched, the hood could fly open while the vehicle is being driven, causing a total loss of visibility, which might result in an accident. o Do not move the vehicle with the hood in the raised position, as vision is obstructed and the hood could fall or be damaged.
B560A01A-AAT
REMOTE FUEL-FILLER LID RELEASE
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B540A01F-AAT
TAIL GATE Remote Tail Gate Release
HGK105
The fuel-filler lid may be opened from inside the vehicle by pulling up on the fuel-filler lid opener located on the front floor area on the left side of the car.
NOTE: If the fuel-filler lid will not open because ice has formed around it, tap lightly or push on the lid to break the ice and release the lid. Do not pry on the lid. If necessary, spray around the lid with an approved de-icer fluid (do not use radiator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.
HGK124
WARNING: Gasoline vapors are dangerous. Before refueling, always stop the engine and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler area. If you need to replace the filler cap, use a genuine Hyundai replacement part. If you open the fuel filler cap during high ambient temperatures, a slight "pressure sound" may be heard. This is normal and not a cause for concern. Whenever you open the fuel filler cap, turn it slowly.
HGK103
To open the tail gate without using the key, pull up the lid release lever located on the driver's door panel. To close, lower the tail gate, then press down on it until it locks. To be sure the tail gate is securely fastened, always try to pull it up again.
WARNING: The tail gate should always be kept completely closed while the vehicle is in motion. If it is left open or ajar, poisonous exhaust gases may enter the car resulting in serious illness or death to the occupants. See additional warnings concerning exhaust gases on page 2-1.
1- 45
B540C01F-AAT
To Unlock Using the Key
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B580A01A-AAT
SUN VISOR
B540C01GK
To open the tail gate, insert the key and turn it clockwise to unlock. The tail gate compartment light illuminates when the tail gate is opened.
B540D01GK-GAT
When you close the tailgate
HGK227
WARNING: Do not close an open tailgate (rear hatch) while a person(s) is sitting upright on the rear seat. The tailgate or tailgate glass may contact the head of a person sitting upright on the rear seat. Closing the tailgate onto a person's head may cause serious injuries, including death.
Vanity mirror
HGK145
Your Hyundai is equipped with sun visors to give the driver and front passenger either frontal or sideward shade. To reduce glare or to shut out direct rays of the sun, turn the sun visor down. A vanity mirror is provided on the back of the sun visor for the front passenger.
NOTE: The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) label containing useful information can be found on the back of each sun visor.
WARNING: Do not place the sun visor in such a manner that it obscures visibility of the roadway, traffic or other objects.
1- 46
HGK226
B600A01HP-AAT
STEERING WHEEL TILT LEVER
(If installed) To adjust the steering wheel:
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B610A01S-GAT
HORN
Working Zone
Some objects can be kept in the net of the luggage compartment. Use the luggage net on the floor or at the back of the luggage compartment to prevent objects from sliding.
WARNING: Avoid eye injury. DO NOT overstretch. ALWAYS keep face and body out of recoil path. DO NOT use when strap has visible signs of wear or damage.
HGK127
1. Pull the lever toward you and hold it to unlock. 2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to the
desired position. 3. After adjustment, release the lever.
WARNING: Do not attempt to adjust the steering wheel while driving as this may result in loss of control of the vehicle and serious injury or death.
HGK141
Press the pad on the steering wheel to sound the horn.
B540D02HP-GAT
LUGGAGE NET (If Installed) A Type
B Type
HGK241
B660A01S-GAT
CRUISE CONTROL (If Installed)
Main switch
B660A01GK
The cruise control system provides automatic speed control for your comfort when driving on freeways, tollroads, or other noncongested highways. This is designed to function above approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
1- 47
B660B01E-GAT
To Set the Cruise Speed
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
WARNING: To avoid accidental cruise control engagement, keep the cruise control main switch off when not using the cruise control.
B660C01E-GAT
To Cancel the Cruise Speed
B660D01E-GAT
To Resume the Preset Speed
B660B01GK
1. Push in the cruise control main switch on the end of the barrel. The "CRUISE" indicator light in the instrument cluster will be illuminated. This turns the system on.
2. Acceleratetothedesiredcruisingspeedabove 40 km/h (25 mph).
3. Push the control switch downward to "SET (COAST)" and release it.
4. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal and the desired speed will automatically be maintained.
5. To increase speed, depress the accelerator pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed the preset speed. When you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal, the vehicle will return to the speed you have set.
B660C01GK
Do one of the following:
o Pull the control switch toward the steering wheel to "CANCEL" position.
o Depress the brake pedal. o Depress the clutch pedal (Manual transaxle). o Shift the selector lever to "N" position (Auto-
matic transaxle). o Decrease the vehicle speed lower than the
memorized speed by 20 km/h (12 mph). o Decrease the vehicle speed to less than 40
km/h (25 mph). o Release the main switch.
B660D01GK
The vehicle will automatically resume the speed set prior to cancellation when you push the control switch upward to "RESUME (ACCEL)" position and release it, providing the vehicle speed is above 40 km/h (25 mph).
B660E01E-AAT
To Reset at a Faster Speed 1. Push the control switch upward to "RESUME
(ACCEL)" position and hold it. 2. Accelerate to desired speed and release the
control switch. While the control switch is held, the vehicle will gradually gain speed.
1- 48
B660F01E-AAT
To Reset at a Slower Speed
B660B01GK
1. Push the control switch downward to "SET (COAST)" and hold it. The vehicle will decelerate.
2. When the desired speed is obtained, release the control switch. While the control switch is pushed, the vehicle speed will gradually decrease.
WARNING: o Keep the main switch off when not using
the cruise control. o Do not use the cruise control when it may
not be safe to keep the car at a constant speed, for instance, driving in heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or snow-covered) or winding roads or over 6% up-hill or down-hill roads. o Pay particular attention to the driving conditions whenever using the cruise control system.
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
o During cruise-control driving with a manual transaxle vehicle, do not shift into neutral without depressing the clutch pedal, or the engine will be overrevved. If this happens, depress the clutch pedal or release the main switch.
o With the cruise control engaged, when the brake pedal is applied, it is normal to hear the cruise control system deactivate. This is an indication of normal system operation.
o During normal cruise control operation, when the "SET(COAST)" is activated or reactivated after applying the brakes, the cruise control will energize after approximately 3 seconds. This delay is normal.
1- 49
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B710A01GK-GAT
HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL
12
3
4 12
1. Side defrost nozzle 2. Side Ventilator 3. Center Ventilator 4. Windshield Defrost Ventilator
1- 50
HGK001
B710A01S-AAT
VENTILATION To operate the ventilation system:
o Set the air intake control to "Fresh" mode ( ).
o To direct all intake air to the dashboard vents, set the airflow control to "Face".
o Adjust the fan speed control to the desired speed.
o Set the temperature control between "Cool" and "Warm".
B710B01S-AAT
CENTER VENTILATOR The center ventilators are located in the middle of the dashboard. The direction of air flow from the vents in the center of the dashboard is adjustable. To control the direction of the air flow, move the knob in the center of the vent up-and-down and side-to-side.
B710C01S-AAT
SIDE VENTILATOR The side ventilators are located on each side of the dashboard. To change the direction of the air flow, move the knob in the center of the vent upand-down and side-to-side. The side vent knobs control the amount of outside air entering the vehicle through the side vents. The vents are opened when the vent knob is moved to the up position. The vents are closed when the vent knob is moved to the down position. Keep these vents clear of any obstructions.
B670A01GK-GAT
ROTARY TYPE
1 23
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B670B01A-AAT
Fan Speed Control (Blower Control)
B670E02A-AAT
Temperature Control
4
5
1. Air Conditioning switch 2. Air intake control switch 3. Rear window defroster switch 4. Air flow control switch 5. Fan speed control switch 6. Temperature control switch
6 HGK002
HGK006
This is used to turn the blower fan on or off and to select the fan speed. This blower fan speed, and therefore the volume of air delivered from the system, may be controlled manually by setting the blower control between the "1" and "4" positions.
Cool
Warm HGK007
This control is used to adjust the degree of heating or cooling desired.
1- 51
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B670C01FC-AAT
Air Intake Control
HGK016
This is used to select fresh outside air or recirculating inside air. To change the air intake control mode, (Fresh mode, Recirculation mode) push the control button. FRESH MODE ( ) : The indicator light on the button goes off when the air intake control is fresh mode. RECIRCULATION MODE ( ): The indicator light on the button is illuminated when the air intake control is recirculation mode. With the "Fresh" mode selected, air enters the vehicle from the outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.
With the "Recirculation" mode selected, air from within the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.
NOTE: o It should be noted that prolonged opera-
tion of the heating in "Recirculation" mode will give rise to fogging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment will become stale. In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the "Recirculation" mode selected may result in the air within the passenger compartment becoming excessively dry. o When the ignition switch is turned "ON" the air intake control will change to " " mode (regardless of switch position). This is normal operation.
B670D01GK-AAT
Air Flow Control
HGK005
This is used to direct the flow of air. Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or windshield. Five symbols are used to represent Face, Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost air position.
1- 52
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
If the "Floor-Defrost" mode is selected, the A/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will be activated.
HGK021
Face-Level Selecting the "Face" mode will cause air to be discharged through the face level vents.
HGK023
Floor-Level Air is discharged through the floor vents, windshield defroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle, side ventilator.
HGK025
Defrost-Level Air is discharged through the windshield defroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle, side ventilator. If the "Defrost" mode is selected, the A/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will be activated.
HGK022
Bi-Level Air is discharged through the face vents and the floor vents. This makes it possible to have cooler air from the dashboard vents and warmer air from the floor outlets at the same time.
HGK024
Floor-Defrost Level Air is discharged through the windshield defroster nozzle, the floor vents, side defroster nozzle, side ventilator.
1- 53
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B690A01S-AAT
HEATING CONTROLS For normal heating operation, set the air intake control to the "Fresh" position and the air flow control to "Floor". For faster heating, the air intake control should be in the "Recirculation" position. If the windows fog up, move the air flow control to the "Def" (defroster) position. (The A/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will be activated.) For maximum heat, move the temperature control to "Warm".
1- 54
B720A02FC-GAT
DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING
HGK002
Use the heating/ventilation system to defrost or defog the windshield: To remove interior fog on the windshield: o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( )
position. (The A/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will be activated.) o Set the temperature control to the desired position. o Set the fan speed control between "1" and "4" position.
To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield: o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( )
position. (The A/C will turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will be activated.)
o Set the temperature control to warm. o Set the fan speed control to position "3" or "4".
NOTE: When the A/C is operated continuously on the floor-defrost level ( ) or defrost level ( ), it may cause fog to form on the exterior windshield. If this occurs, set the air flow control to the face level position ( ) and fan speed control to the low position.
B730A01FC-AAT
Operation Tips o To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from enter-
ing the car through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air intake control to "Recirculation". Be sure to return the control to "Fresh" when the irritation has passed to keep fresh air in the vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable. o Air for the heating/cooling system is drawn in through the grilles just ahead of the windshield. Care should be taken that these are not blocked by leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions. o To prevent interior fog on the windshield, set the air intake control to the fresh air ( ) position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust temperature control to desired temperature fan speed to the desired position.
B740A01S-AAT
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM (If installed) Air Conditioning Switch
HGK018
The air conditioning is turned on or off by pushing the A/C button on the heating/air conditioning control panel.
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B740B01S-AAT
Air Conditioning Operation Cooling
HGK002
To use the air conditioning to cool the interior: o Set the side vent control to "OFF", to shut off
outside air entry. o Turn on the fan control switch. o Turn on the air conditioning switch by pushing
in on the switch. The air conditioning indicator light should come on at the same time. o Set the air intake control to "Fresh" mode ( ). o Set the temperature control to "Cool". ("Cool" provides maximum cooling. The temperature may be moderated by moving the control toward "Warm".) o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed. For greater cooling, turn the fan control to one of the higher speeds or temporarily select the "Recirculation" position on the air intake control.
B740C01S-AAT
Dehumidified Heating For dehumidified heating: o Turn on the fan control switch. o Turn on the air conditioning switch. The air
conditioning indicator light should come on at the same time. o Set the air intake control to "Fresh" mode ( ). o Set the air flow control to "Face". o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed. o For more rapid action, set the fan at one of the higher speeds. o Adjust the temperature control to provide the desired amount of warmth.
1- 55
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B740D01A-AAT
Operation Tips o If the interior of the car is hot when you first
get in, open the windows for a few minutes to expel the hot air. o When you are using the air conditioning system, keep all windows closed to keep hot air out. o When moving slowly, as in heavy traffic, shift to a lower gear. This increases engine speed, which in turn increases the speed of the air conditioning compressor. o On steep grades, turn the air conditioner off to avoid the possibility of the engine overheating. o During winter months or in periods when the air conditioner is not used regularly, run the air conditioner once every month for a few minutes. This will help circulate the lubricants and keep your system in peak operating condition.
1- 56
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B970A01Y-AAT
AUTOMATIC HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL SYSTEM (If lnstalled) Your Hyundai is equipped with an automatic heating and cooling control system controlled by simply setting the desired temperature.
B970B01GK-GAT
Heating and Cooling Controls TYPE A (Without Air Quality System)
TYPE B (With Air Quality System)
1
23 4
5
6
1
2 34
5
6
78
9
10
11
1. Temperature Control Button 2. Defroster Switch 3. Display Window 4. Air Conditioning Switch 5. Rear Window Defroster Switch 6. Fan Speed Control Switch
HGK003
78
9 10 12 11
7. Air Flow Control Switch 8. AUTO (Automatic Control)Switch 9. OFF Switch 10. Air lntake Control Switch 11. Ambient Temperature Switch 12. Air Quality System Switch (If installed)
HGK004
1- 57
B970C02E-GAT
Automatic Operation
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
HGK020
The FATC (Full Automatic Temperature Control) system automatically controls heating and cooling as follows:
1. Push the "AUTO" switch. The indicator light will illuminate confirming that the Face, Floor and/or Bi-Level modes as well as the blower speed and, air conditioner will be controlled automatically.
HGK014
2. Push the "TEMP" button to set the desired temperature. The temperature will increase to the maximum 32°C(90°F) by pushing on the button. Each push of the button will cause the temperature to increase by 0.5°C(1°F). The temperature will decrease to the minimum 17°C(62°F) by pushing on the button. Each push of the button will cause the temperature to decrease by 0.5°C(1°F).
NOTE:
If the battery has been discharged or discon-
nected, the temperature mode will reset to
centigrade degrees.
This is a normal condition and you can change
the temperature mode from centigrade to
farenheit as follows;
Press the TEMP button down 3 seconds or
more
with
the
OUTSIDE TEMP
button
held
down.
The
display shows that the unit of temperature is
adjusted to centigrade or fahrenheit.
(°C °F or °F °C)
Photo sensor
G280A01GK
NOTE: Never place anything over the sensor which is located on the instrument panel to ensure better control of the heating and cooling system.
1- 58
B995A01Y-GAT
AMBIENT SWITCH
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B980B01Y-AAT
Fan Speed Control Switch
B670C01GK-AAT
Air Intake Control Switch (Without A.Q.S)
HGK009
Pressing the
OUTSIDE TEMP
button displays the ambient
temperature on the display.
B980A01Y-AAT
MANUAL OPERATION
The heating and cooling system can be controlled manually as well by pushing buttons other than the "AUTO" button. In this state, the system sequentially works according to the order of buttons selected. The function of the buttons which are not selected will be controlled automatically. Press the "AUTO" button in order to convert to automatic control of the system.
HGK015
The fan speed can be set to the desired speed by pressing the appropriate fan speed control button. The higher the fan speed is, the more air is delivered. Pressing the "OFF" button turns off the fan.
HGK008-1
This is used to select fresh outside air or recirculation inside air. To change the air intake control mode, (Fresh mode, Recirculation mode) push the control button.
FRESH MODE ( ) : The indicator light on the button goes on when the air intake control is fresh mode.
RECIRCULATION MODE ( ) : The indicator light on the button is illuminated when the air intake control is recirculation mode.
With the "Fresh" mode selected, air enters the vehicle from the outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.
1- 59
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
With the "Recirculation" mode selected, air from within the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.
NOTE: o It should be noted that prolonged opera-
tion of the heating system in "recirculation" mode will give rise to fogging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment will become stale. In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the "Recirculation" mode selected may result in the air within the passenger compartment becoming excessively dry. o When the ignition switch is turned "ON" the air intake control will change to " " mode (regardless of switch position). This is normal operation. The air intake control operates in "AUTO" mode when turning the ignition to the ON position if the "AUTO" mode was used before shutting off the engine.
B980C01GK-GAT
Air Intake Control Switch (With A.Q.S) (If Installed)
HGK010-1
This is used to select fresh outside air or recirculate inside air automatically.
: OFF : ON
Fresh mode : Air enters the vehicle from the outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.
Recirculation mode : Air from within the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.
1- 60
Exhaust gas cutoff mode :
Air enters the vehicle from the outside.
But if exhaust gas enters the vehicle from the
outside, the exhaust gas cutoff mode ( ) is
automatically converted to the
mode, to
prevent exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
NOTE:
o It should be noted that prolonged opera-
tion of the heating system in recirculation
mode (
) will give rise to misting of
the windshield and side windows and the
air within the passenger compartment will
become stale. In addition, prolonged use
of the air conditioning with the recircula-
tion mode (
) selected may result in
the air within the passenger compartment
becoming excessively dry.
o When the ignition switch is turned "ON"
the air intake control will change to "Fresh"
mode (regardless of switch position). This
is normal operation. The air intake control
operates in "AUTO" mode when turning
the ignition to the ON position if the
"AUTO" mode was used before shutting
off the engine.
CAUTION: If the windows fog up with the Recirculation or A.Q.S mode selected, set the air intake control to the Fresh air position or A.Q.S control to "OFF".
B980D01Y-AAT
Heating and Cooling System Off Press the "OFF" button to stop the operation of the heating and cooling system.
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
makes it possible to have cooler air from the dashboard vents and warmer air from the floor outlets at the same time.
B980E01GK-GAT
Air Flow Control
HGK019
This is used to direct the flow of air. Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or windshield. Four symbols are used to represent Face, Bi-Level, Floor and Floor-Defrost air position.
HGK021
Face-Level When selecting the "Face" mode, the indicator light will come on, causing air to be discharged through the face level vents.
HGK023
Floor-Level When selecting the "Floor-Level" mode, the indicator light will come on and the air will be discharged through the floor vents, windshield defroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle, side ventilator.
HGK022
Bi-Level When selecting the "Bi-Level" mode, the indicator light will come on and the air will be discharged through the face vents and the floor vents. This
HGK024
1- 61
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
Floor-Defrost Level
When selecting the "Floor-Defrost" mode, the indicator light will come on and the air will be discharged through the windshield defrost nozzle, the floor vents, side defroster nozzle, side ventilator.
B760A03GK-GAT
AIR CONDITIONER FILTER (IN FRONT OF BLOWER UNIT) (If Installed)
Outside air
Inside air
Filter
B980F01E-GAT
Defrost Switch
HGK012
When the "Defrost" button is pressed, the " " mode will be automatically selected and the air will be discharged through the windshield defrost vents. To assist in defrosting, the air conditioning will operate if ambient temperature is higher than 3.5°C and automatically turns off if the ambient temperature drops below 3.5°C.
Inside air
Blower fan Evaporator core
Heater core
B760A01E
The air filter is located in front of the blower unit behind the glove box. It operates to decrease pollutants from entering the car and to filter the air.
CAUTION: o Replace the filter every 20,000 km (12,000
miles) or once a year. If the car is being driven in severe conditions such as dusty, rough roads, more frequent air filter inspections and changes are required. o When the air flow rate is decreased, it must be checked at authorized dealer.
1- 62
B750A02A-AAT
STEREO SOUND SYSTEM How Car Audio Works
FM reception
Ionosphere
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
AM reception
Ionosphere
FM radio station
Mountains
Unobstructed area
SSAR010A
AM and FM radio signals are broadcast from transmitter towers located around your city. They are intercepted by the radio antenna on your car. This signal is then received by the radio and sent to your car speakers. When a strong radio signal has reached your vehicle, the precise engineering of your audio system ensures the best possible quality reproduction. However, in some cases the signal coming to your vehicle may not be strong and clear. This can be due to factors such as the distance from the radio station, closeness of other strong radio stations or the presence of buildings, bridges or other large obstructions in the area.
SSAR011A
AM broadcasts can be received at greater distances than FM broadcasts. This is because AM radio waves are transmitted at low frequencies. These long, low frequency radio waves can follow the curvature of the earth rather than travelling straight out into the atmosphere. In addition, they curve around obstructions so that they can provide better signal coverage.
Buildings
Obstructed area Iron bridges SSAR012A
FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequencies and do not bend to follow the earth's surface. Because of this, FM broadcasts generally begin to fade at short distances from the station. Also, FM signals are easily affected by buildings, mountains, or other obstructions. These can result in certain listening conditions which might lead you to believe a problem exists with your radio. The following conditions are normal and do not indicate radio trouble:
1- 63
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
SSAR013A
o Fading - As your car moves away from the radio station, the signal will weaken and sound will begin to fade. When this occurs, we suggest that you select another stronger station.
o Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or large obstructions between the transmitter and your radio can disturb the signal causing static or fluttering noises to occur. Reducing the treble level may lessen this effect until the disturbance clears.
SSAR014A
o Station Swapping - As an FM signal weakens, another more powerful signal near the same frequency may begin to play. This is because your radio is designed to lock onto the clearest signal. If this occurs, select another station with a stronger signal.
o Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals being received from several directions can cause distortion or fluttering. This can be caused by a direct and reflected signal from the same station, or by signals from two stations with close frequencies. If this occurs, select another station until the condition has passed.
B750B02Y-AAT
Using a cellular phone or a two-way
radio When a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle, noise may be produced from the audio equipment. This does not mean that something is wrong with the audio equipment. In such a case, use the cellular phone at a place as far as possible from the audio equipment.
CAUTION: When using a communication system such a cellular phone or a radio set inside the vehicle, a separate external antenna must be fitted. When a cellular phone or a radio set is used with an internal antenna alone, it may interfere with the vehicle's electrical system and adversely affect safe operation of the vehicle.
WARNING: Don't use a cellular phone when you are driving. Stop at a safe place to use a cellular phone.
1- 64
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
H240A01O-GAT
STEREO RADIO OPERATION (H250) (If Installed)
5. BAND Selector
3. TREBLE/FADER Control Knob (TREB/FAD)
6. PRESET Buttons
2. BASS/BALANCE Control Knob (BASS/BAL)
4. TUNE/SEEK Select Button
7. SCAN Button
1. POWER ON/OFF, VOLUME Control Knob
H250A01GK
1- 65
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
H240B02A-GAT
1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob The radio unit may be operated when the ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Press the knob to switch the power on. The LCD shows the radio frequency in the radio mode or the tape direction indicator in the tape mode. To switch the power off, press the knob again.
VOLUME Control Rotate the knob clockwise to increase the volume and turn the knob counterclockwise to reduce the volume.
2. BASS Control Knob Press to pop the knob out and turn to the left or right for the desired bass tone.
BAL (Balance Control) Knob Pull the bass control knob further out. Turn the control knob clockwise to emphasize right speaker sound (left speaker sound will be attenuated). When the control knob is turned counterclockwise, left speaker sound will be emphasized (right speaker sound will be attenuated).
3. TREB (Treble Control) Knob Press to pop the knob out and turn to the left or right for the desired treble tone.
FAD (Fader Control) Knob Pull the treble control knob further out. Turn the control knob counterclockwise to emphasize front speaker sound (rear speaker sound will be attenuated). When the control knob is turned clockwise, rear speaker sound will be emphasized (front speaker sound will be attenuated).
4. TUNE (Manual) Select Button Press the side or side to increase or to decrease the frequency. Press either button and hold down to continuously scroll. Release button once the desired station is reached.
SEEK Operation (Automatic Channel
Selection) Press the TUNE select button 1 sec or more.Releasing it will automatically tune to the next available station with a beep sound. When the side is pressed longer than 1 second, releasing will automatically tune to the next higher frequency and when the side is pressed longer than 1 second, releasing will automatically tune to the next lower frequency.
5. BAND Selector Pressing the FM/AM button changes the AM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The mode selected is displayed on LCD.
6. PRESET STATION SELECT Button Six (6) stations for AM, FM and FM2 respectively can be preset in the electronic memory circuit on this unit.
HOW TO PRESET STATIONS Six AM and twelve FM stations may be programmed into the memory of the radio. Then, by simply pressing the band select button and/or one of the six station select buttons, you may recall any of these stations instantly. To program the stations, follow these steps:
o Press band selector to set the band for AM, FM, or FM2.
o Select the desired station to be stored by seek or manual tuning.
o Determine the preset station select button you wish to use to access that station.
o Press the station select button for more than two seconds. A select button indicator will show in the display indicating which select button you have depressed. The frequency display will flash after it has been stored into the memory with a beep sound. You should then release the button, and proceed to program the next desired station. A total of 18 stations can be programmed by selecting one AM and two FM stations per button.
o When completed, any preset station may be recalled by selecting AM, FM or FM2 band and the appropriate station button.
1- 66
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
7. SCAN Button When the scan button is pressed, the frequency will increase and the receivable stations will be tuned in one after another, receiving each station for 5 seconds. To stop scanning, press the scan button again.
1- 67
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
H240C01O-GAT
CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER OPERATION (H250) (If Installed)
3. TAPE PROGRAM Button 6. TAPE SLOT 2. AUTO MUSIC SELECT Button 4. EJECT Button
1- 68
1. FF/REW Button 5. DOLBY SELECT Button
H250A01GK
H240A02O-AAT
1. FF/REW Button o The FF (fast forward tape winding) starts when
the button is pressed during PLAY or REW. o The PLAY starts when the button is pressed again during FF. o The REW (rewinding) starts when the button is pressed during PLAY or FF. o The PLAY starts when the button is pressed again during REW.
2. AUTO MUSIC SELECT Button Press the button to find the starting point of each song in a prerecorded music tape. The quiet space between songs (must have at least a 4 sec. gap) can be identified by the AUTO MUSIC SELECT button.
o Pressing the button will play the beginning of the next music segment.
o Pressing the button will start replay at the beginning of the music just listened to.
3. TAPE PROGRAM Button This allows you to play the reverse side of the tape by merely depressing the program button. An arrow will appear in the display to show tape direction.
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
NOTE: When tape operation is abnormal or ER8 fault code is displayed, press the eject button more than 5 seconds to reset the deck function.
4. EJECT Button o When the EJECT button is pressed with a
cassette loaded, the cassette will eject. o When the EJECT button is pressed during
FF/REW, the cassette will eject.
5. DOLBY SELECT Button If you get background noise during PLAY, you can reduce this considerably by merely pressing DOLBY SELECT button. If you want to release, press the button again.
1- 69
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B250A01GK-GAT
CD AUTO CHANGER (H250) (If Installed)
1. CD CHANGER Select Button 3. TRACK UP/DOWN
1- 70
6. SCAN Button 4. FF/REW Button 5. REPEAT Button
2. DISC Select Button
H250A01GK
B260F01GK-AAT
The CD auto changer is located in the right side of the quarter trim.
o To use the CD auto changer.
1. Open the sliding lid of the CD auto changer.
2. To eject the compact disc magazine, press the EJECT button located inside the CD auto changer.
3. Insert the discs into the magazine. 4. PushthemagazineintotheCDautochang-
er and close the sliding lid.
o The CD auto changer can be used when the ignition switch is in either the "ON" or "ACC" position.
1. CD Select Button
When the CD changer magazine contains discs, press the "CDC" button and the CD changer can be used even if the radio is being used. The Hyundai CD changer can hold up to eight discs. The disc number will be lit, and the track number, and elapsed time will be displayed.
2. DISC Select Button
To select the CD you want, push "
TUNE DISC
" to cha-
nge the disc number.
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
3. TRACK UP/DOWN o The desired track on the disc currently being
played can be selected using the track number. o Press once to skip forward to the beginning of the next track. Press once to skip back to the beginning of the track.
4. FF/REW ( / ) If you want to fast forward or reverse through the compact disc track, push and hold in FF ( ) or REW ( ) button. When you release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing.
5. REPEAT o To repeat the track you are listening to, press
the RPT button. To cancel , press again. o If you do not release RPT operation when the
track ends, it will automatically be replayed. This process will be continued until you push the button again.
NOTE: o When replacing the fuse, replace it with a
fuse having the correct capacity. o This equipment is designed to be used
only in a 12 volt DC battery system with negative ground. o This unit is made of precision parts. Do not attempt to disassemble or adjust any parts. o When driving your vehicle, be sure to keep the volume of the unit set low enough to allow you to hear sounds coming from the outside.
CAUTION: Do not insert warped or poor quality discs into the CD changer as damage to the unit may occur.
6. SCAN Button
o Press the SCAN button to playback the first 10 seconds of each track.
o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec. for the desired track.
1- 71
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
H260A01O-AAT
STEREO RADIO OPERATION (H260) (If Installed)
3. BASS/TREBLE Control Knob 4. SCAN Button 6. BAND Selector
1- 72
7. PRESET Button 5. TUNE/SEEK Select Button 1. POWER ON-OFF/VOLUME/BALANCE Control Knob 2. FADER Control Knob
H260A01O
H260B02E-AAT
1. POWER ON-OFF Control Knob The radio unit may be operated when the ignition key is in the "ACC" or "ON" position. Press the knob to switch the power on. The LCD shows the radio frequency in the radio mode or the CD track indicator in either the CD mode or CD AUTO CHANGER mode. To switch the power off, press the knob again.
VOLUME Control Rotate the knob clockwise to increase the volume and turn the knob counterclockwise to reduce the volume.
BALANCE Control Pull and turn the control knob clockwise to emphasize right speaker sound (left speaker sound will be attenuated). When the control knob is turned counterclockwise, left speaker sound will be emphasized (right speaker sound will be attenuated).
2. FAD (Fader Control) Knob Turn the control knob counterclockwise to emphasize front speaker sound (rear speaker sound will be attenuated). When the control knob is turned clockwise, rear speaker sound will be emphasized (front speaker sound will be attenuated).
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
3. BASS Control Knob Press to pop the knob out and turn to the left or right for the desired bass tone.
TREB (Treble Control) Knob Pull the bass control knob further out. Turn to the left or right for the desired treble tone.
4. SCAN Button When the scan button is pressed, the frequency will increase and the receivable stations will be tuned in one after another, receiving each station for 5 seconds. To stop scanning, press the scan button again.
5. TUNE (Manual) Select Button Press the ( ) side or ( ) side to increase or to decrease the frequency. Press either button and hold down to continuously scroll. Release button once the desired station is reached.
SEEK Operation (Automatic Channel Selection) Press the TUNE select button for 1 sec or more. Releasing it will automatically tune to the next available station with a beep sound. When the ( ) side is pressed longer than 1 second, releasing will automatically tune to the next higher frequency and when the ( ) side is pressed longer than 1 second, releasing will automatically tune to the next lower frequency.
6. BAND Selector Pressing the FM/AM button changes the AM, FM1 and FM2 bands. The mode selected is displayed on LCD.
7. PRESET STATION SELECT Button Six (6) stations for AM, FM or FM2 respectively can be preset in the electronic memory circuit on this unit.
HOW TO PRESET STATIONS Six AM and twelve FM stations may be programmed into the memory of the radio. Then, by simply pressing the band select button and/or one of the six station select buttons, you may recall any of these stations instantly. To program the stations, follow these steps:
o Press band selector to set the band for AM, FM or FM2.
o Select the desired station to be stored by seek, scan or manual tuning.
o Determine the preset station select button you wish to use to access that station.
o Press the station select button for more than two seconds. A select button indicator will show in the display indicating which select button you have depressed. The frequency display will flash after it has been stored into the memory.
1- 73
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
You should then release the button, and proceed to program the next desired station. A total of 18 stations can be programmed by selecting one AM and two FM stations per button. o When completed, any preset station may be recalled by selecting AM, FM or FM2 band and the appropriate station button.
1- 74
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
H260B01O-AAT
COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (H260) (If Installed)
4. SCAN Button 1.Playing CD 3. TRACK UP/DOWN
6. EJECT Button
2. FF/REW Button 5. REPEAT Button
H260A01O
1- 75
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B260D02O-AAT
1. Playing CD o Insert the CD with the label facing upward. o Insert the CD to start CD playback, during
radio operation. o When a disc is in the CD deck, if you press the
play button, the CD player will begin playing even if the radio is being used. o The CD player can be used when the ignition switch is in either the "ON" or "ACC" position.
2. FF/REW ( / ) If you want to fast forward or reverse through the compact disc track, push and hold the FF ( ) or REW ( ) button. When you release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing.
3. TRACK UP/DOWN o The desired track on the disc currently being
played can be selected using the track number. o Press once to skip forward to the beginning of the next track. Press once to skip back to the beginning of the track.
4. SCAN Button o Press the SCAN button to playback the first
10 seconds of each track. o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec.
when you have reached the desired track.
5. REPEAT Button o To repeat the track you are currently listening
to, press the RPT button. To cancel , press again. o If you do not release RPT operation when the track ends, it will automatically be replayed. This process will be continued until you push the button again.
6. EJECT Button When the EJECT button is pressed with a CD loaded, the CD will eject.
NOTE: o If the CD does not operate properly or if
the ER2 fault code is displayed, use one of two methods to reset the CD deck function. - Remove the audio fuse for 5 minutes.
Then, reinstall the audio fuse. - Diconnect the negative terminal of the
battery and wait 5 minutes. Then reconnect the negative battery terminal. o To assure proper operation of the unit, keep the vehicle interior temperature within a normal range by using the vehicle's air conditioning or heating system. o When replacing the fuse, replace it with a fuse having the correct capacity.
o The preset station frequencies are all erased when the car battery is disconnected. Therefore, all data will have to be set again if this should occur.
o Do not add any oil to the rotating parts. Keep magnets, screwdrivers and other metallic objects away from the tape mechanism and head.
o This equipment is designed to be used only in a 12 volt DC battery system with negative ground.
o This unit is made of precision parts. Do not attempt to disassemble or adjust any parts.
o When driving your vehicle, be sure to keep the volume of the unit set low enough to allow you to hear sounds coming from the outside.
o Do not expose this equipment (including the speakers) to water or excessive moisture.
CAUTION: Do not insert warped or poor quality discs into the CD player as damage to the unit may occur.
1- 76
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B260E01E-AAT
CD AUTO CHANGER (H260) (If Installed)
6. SCAN Button 1. CD Select Button 3. TRACK UP/DOWN
4. FF/REW Button 5. REPEAT Button 2. DISC Select Button
H260A01O
1- 77
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B260F01GK-AAT
The CD auto changer is located in the right side of the quarter trim.
o To use the CD auto changer.
1. Open the sliding lid of the CD auto changer.
2. To eject the compact disc magazine, press the EJECT button located inside the CD auto changer.
3. Insert the discs into the magazine. 4. PushthemagazineintotheCDautochang-
er and close the sliding lid.
o The CD auto changer can be used when the ignition switch is in either the "ON" or "ACC" position.
1. CD Select Button
When the CD changer magazine contains discs, press the "CD" button and the CD changer can be used even if the radio is being used. The Hyundai CD changer can hold up to eight discs. The disc number will be lit, and the track number, and elapsed time will be displayed.
2. DISC Select Button
To select the CD you want, push " TUNE " to change
the disc number.
DISC
3. TRACK UP/DOWN o The desired track on the disc currently being
played can be selected using the track number. o Press once to skip forward to the beginning of the next track. Press once to skip back to the beginning of the track.
4. FF/REW ( / ) If you want to fast forward or reverse through the compact disc track, push and hold in the FF ( ) or REW ( ) button. When you release the button, the compact disc player will resume playing.
5. REPEAT o To repeat the track you are listening to, press
the RPT button. To cancel , press again. o If you do not release RPT operation when the
track ends, it will automatically be replayed. This process will be continued until you push the button again.
6. SCAN Button o Press the SCAN button to playback the first
10 seconds of each track. o Press the SCAN button again within 10 sec.
for the desired track.
NOTE: o When replacing the fuse, replace it with a
fuse having the correct capacity. o This equipment is designed to be used
only in a 12 volt DC battery system with negative ground. o This unit is made of precision parts. Do not attempt to disassemble or adjust any parts. o When driving your vehicle, be sure to keep the volume of the unit set low enough to allow you to hear sounds coming from the outside.
CAUTION: Do not insert warped or poor quality discs into the CD changer as damage to the unit may occur.
1- 78
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B890A01Y-AAT
AUDIO FAULT CODE
If you see any error indication in the display while using the system in the CD or Tape mode, find the cause in the chart below. If you cannot clear the error indication, take the car to your Hyundai dealer.
INDICATION Er2 Er3
Er6 Er8 HHH no CD
CAUSE CD DECK MECHANICAL ERROR (EJECT ERROR, LOADING ERROR) FOCUS ERROR DATA READ ERROR
DISC ERROR
TAPE DECK ERROR TAPE EJECT ERROR TEMPERATURE IS TOO HIGH
NO DISC IN MAGAZINE NO CD MAGAZINE IN THE AUTO CHANGER
SOLUTION
AFTER RESETTING THE AUDIO SYSTEM, PUSH THE EJECT BUTTON. IF DISC IS NOT EJECTED, CONSULT YOUR HYUNDAI DEALER.
MAKE SURE THE DISC IS NOT SCRATCHED OR DAMAGED. PRESS THE EJECT BUTTON AND PULL OUT THE DISC. THEN INSERT A NORMAL CD DISC.
CHECK IF THE DISC IS INSERTED CORRECTLY IN THE CD PLAYER. MAKE SURE THE DISC IS NOT SCRATCHED OR DAMAGED.
AFTER RESETTING THE AUDIO SYSTEM, PUSH THE EJECT BUTTON. IF TAPE DOES NOT EJECT, CONSULT YOUR HYUNDAI DEALER.
FAULT CODE WILL RESET AUTOMATICALLY WHEN THE TEMPERATURE RETURNS TO NORMAL.
INSERT DISC IN MAGAZINE OR INSERT CD MAGAZINE IN THE AUTO CHANGER.
1- 79
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B260A01GK-GAT
INFINITY SOUND SYSTEM (B260)(If installed)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1. On/Off Switch ( ) 2. Tone Button ( ) 3. Road traffic announcement button( 4. Operating mode switching button (
) Mode)
1- 80
5. Function button ( Function) 6. Waveband switching button ( 7. CD eject button ( ) 8. Volume control
Band)
10
11
9. Multifunction buttons 10. Display 11.Right rotary control
B260A01GK
B260B01GK-GAT
ANTI-THEFT DEVICE
Portable panel
B260B01GK
1. Remove portable panel
As an effective anti-theft device, the portable panel can be removed from unit. For this purpose, press and hold button. The display has been folded down. After 20 seconds an audible signal indicates that the control component is folded down. The unit is switched to mute. The unit switches off after a further 10 seconds.
NOTE: o For safety reasons, it is not permissible to
leave the portable panel open when driving. o Please insert the portable panel in the accompanying protective Cover after removal.
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
2. Inserting portable panel Insert the portable panel so that it engages first in the lower left catch and then in the lower right. Then press the portable panel into the upper catches. Or position portable panel directly over all four catches and press in firmly to engage. For proper functioning, ensure that the portable panel is firmly engaged in all four catches.
B260C01GK-GAT
GENERAL OPERATION 1.Switch On / Off Press the button to switch the power on. To switch the power off, press the button again.
2. Adjust Volume Turn volume control to right / left. The volume is increased or decreased. The current volume level is shown on the display.
3. Mute Function The unit can be switched to mute in each operation mode by pressing the volume control. MUTE appears on the display. The mute function is cancelled by pressing the volume control, changing the operation mode, changing the waveband or inserting a CD
4. Activate Tone menu Press button. The tone menu is activated. The following functions can be called up: BASS (Bass), TREB (Treble), BAL (balance), FAD (Fader), LOUD (Loudness) and STEREO (Reception optimization). Bass and treble setting for the AM / FM wavebands, for road traffic announcements and CD operation are stored separately (values form -7 to +7). The setting for fader balance and loudness (no loudness with AM) are stored together for all operating modes (values from -7 to +7).
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
B260B02GK
5. Adjust Bass Press button and then multifunction button (1) "-" or "+". BASS and the set value are displayed. Set the desired bass via both buttons.
Center setting: Press both buttons simultaneously.
1- 81
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
6.Adjust Treble Press button and then multifunction button (2) "-" or "+". TREB and the set value are displayed. Set the desired treble via both buttons.
Center setting: Press both buttons simultaneously.
7. Adjust Balance Press button and then multifunction button (3) " " or " ". BAL and the set value are displayed. Set the desired balance via both buttons.
Center setting: Press both buttons simultaneously.
8. Fader Press button and then multifunction button (4) " " or " ". FAD and the set value are displayed. Set the desired fade level via both buttons.
Center setting: Press both buttons simultaneously.
9. Loudness On / Off Press button and then multifunction button (5) "LD". LOUD ON or LOUD OFF are displayed. The loudness can be switched on or off alternately by pressing the multifunction button.
1- 82
10.Linear Adjustment It controls the amplification ratio from high to low tone. Activate tone menu. Then again press and hold button for more than 2 seconds. The tone values for the set signal source (e.g. radio/ FM) are set to an average value FM LINEAR. Press and hold button for more than 4 seconds. All tone values for the signal sources radio and tape /CD are set to an average value ALL LINEAR.
11.Adjust Mono /Stereo Three different reception optimization setting can be set in order to suppress reception dependent interference and reflections. Repeatedly press multifunction button (6) "ST" in tone menu until the desired optimization is set.
AUTO: Setting for normal operation - i.e., the unit switches from stereo to mono and back depending upon reception location (provides the optimum setting for almost all reception areas).
STEREO: Setting for unusual reception situations - i.e. the unit is set permanently to stereo (e.g. for private radio stations in city areas)
MONO: Setting for reception conditions in which reflections constantly occur - i.e., the unit is set constantly to mono. The setting is effective immediately after pressing the multifunction button "ST" and is also retained on switching off.
B260D01GK-GAT
RADIO OPERATION
1. Select operating Mode Press Button. The operating mode. Radio, CD can be selected. The last selected operating mode is selected after the button is pressed for the first time. If the other operating modes are to be selected, press the button quickly and repeatedly until the desired operating mode is selected.
2. Select Waveband
Press
button repeatedly until desired
waveband FM 1, FM 2 or AM is selected. When
changing the waveband, the last selected station
is selected.
3. Switch on radio menu mode
Press button. The radio menu mode is switched on and displayed, The unit switches back to the normal display if no buttons are pressed within the next 8 seconds.
4. Radio Operation
Setting procedures for station selection. The desired broadcasting station can be selected via station search, manual tuning, autostore, direct frequency input and station buttons.
5. FM, AM station search Turn the right rotary control to the left/right in desired waveband. The radio searches in descending/ascending order.
6. Scan search In the desired waveband (FM or AM) press the right rotary control, SC is displayed. An automatic station search is started. The first search is performed on an insensitive plane, all further searches on a sensitive plane. Receivable stations can be heard for 8 seconds. Press the right rotary control if the received program should be retained.
7. Direct frequency input Select radio menu mode and then, within 8 seconds, enter the frequency using the multifunction buttons.
8. FM /AM station - retrieve/store Store: 10 frequencies or programs can be stored respectively on each of wavebands FM 1, FM 2 and AM. Press multifunction button for 2 - 4 seconds in order to store the desired station or program.
Retrieve: press multifunction button "1-0". The stored station is requested. The frequency is displayed if the station cannot be identified.
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B260B04GK
9.AM / FM autostore Select desired wave band. Select radio menu mode by pressing button. Then Press multifunction button "AS" repeatedly until AS-SEEK is displayed. The 10 stations with the best reception are stored under the station buttons in order of quality. The auto store plane is identified on the display by AS. Select radio menu mode in order to quit the autostore storage plane. Then press multifunction button "AS". The radio switches back to the station button plane.
10.Manual tuning Select radio menu and the turn the right rotary control. Turning steps of 100 kHz (FM) or 9 kHz (AM) are performer. Pressing the right rotary control switches to fine tuning (1 kHz steps) for AM. The function is quit if there is no further actuation within 10 seconds.
B260E01GK-GAT
CD OPERATION
1.CDs - insert / eject Press button briefly; the display folds downwards and the CD slot with the printed side upwards. The unit pulls in the CD automatically and begins to play the disc from the first track. Then fold the display up again. After playing the last track, the unit automatically begins to play the first track of the CD again. If there is already a CD in the CD slot, press button repeatedly until CD appears on the display. In order to eject a CD, press button briefly; the display folds downward and the CD is ejected. Then remove the CD. Then fold the display up again.
NOTE: The CD is not ejected when the unit is switched off but remains in the CD slot.
2. Track skip - forwards / reverse Turn right rotary control to right/left. If the track has been playing for longer than 10 seconds when the return function is triggered, a return to the beginning of the track takes place. Through further turning of the right rotary control, several tracks can be skipped over in forward or reverse directions. Skip returns to the first to the last track.
1- 83
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
(1) (2) (3) (4)
(5)
B260B05GK
3. Scan search
Press and hold the right rotary control, until the prompt "SC" (5) appears on the display. All following CD tracks are played for 8 seconds each. Press the rotary control again to terminate the search.
4. Fast forward /rewind Fast forward (audible) is activated by pressing the multifunction button (3) " " and fast rewind (audible) is activated by pressing the multifunction button (2) " ". The relative time is displayed during this function.
5. Relative time, number of tracks, total playing time By pressing the multifunction button (1) "T", the relative time for the track currently being played is displayed for approx.10seconds.
1- 84
By against pressing the multifunction button "T" (within 10 seconds), the number of tracks and total playing time of the CD currently being played are displayed for approx.10 seconds
6. Random play The random play is activated by pressing the multifunction button (4) "RP". The tracks of the current CD are then played in random order. "RP" appears on the display. The random play function is terminated by repeated pressing of the multifunction button "RP".
7. Direct track selection The unit is switched to select mode by pressing the multifunction button "0" The digits 1-0 and TRACK _ _ are displayed. A track can be selected directly by using the multifunction buttons "1-0". The unit switches back to CD menu mode if no buttons are actuated for approx.8seconds.
8. Temperature protection circuit A temperature protection circuit is utilized in this unit in order to protect the laser diode against over heating. When this protection circuit is activated, CD TEMP. appears for 8 seconds. The unit switches back to the last selected signal source (FM / AM). The single CD operation can be requested again after a short cooling phase. However, if the temperature is still too high, the unit again switches back to the previously selected signal source.
B850A02F-AAT
CARE OF DISC Proper Handling
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
Storage When not in use, place your discs in their individual cases and store them in a cool place away from the sun, heat, and dust. Do not grip or pull out the disc with your hand while the disc is being pulled into the unit by the self loading mechanism.
Keep Your Discs Clean
B860A01A-AAT
Care of Cassette Tapes
B850A01L
Handle your disc as shown. Do not drop the disc. Hold the disc so you will not leave fingerprints on the surface. If the surface is scratched, it may cause the pickup to skip signal tracks. Do not affix tape, paper, or gummed labels on the disc. Do not write on the disc.
Damaged Disc Do not attempt to play damaged, warped or cracked discs. These could severely damage the playback mechanism.
B850A02L
Fingerprints, dust, or soil on the surface of a disc could cause the pickup to skip signal tracks. Wipe the surface clean with a clean soft cloth. If the surface is heavily soiled, dampen a clean soft cloth in a solution of mild neutral detergent to wipe it clean.
B860A01L
Proper care of your cassette tapes will extend the tape life and increase your listening enjoyment. Always protect your tapes and cassette cases from direct sunlight, severe cold and dusty conditions. When not in use, cassettes should always be stored in the protective cassette case. When the vehicle is very hot or cold, allow the interior temperature to become more comfortable before listening to your cassettes.
o Never leave a cassette inserted in the player when not being played. This could damage the tape player unit and the cassette tape.
o We strongly recommend against the use of tapes longer than C-60 (60 minutes total). Tapes such as C-120 or C-180 are very thin and do not perform as well in the automotive environment.
1- 85
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
Head
HGK062
o Be sure that the cassette label is not loose or peeling off or tape ejection may be difficult.
o Never touch or soil the actual audio tape surfaces.
o Keep all magnetized objects, such as electric motors, speakers or transformers away from your cassette tapes and tape player unit.
o Store cassettes in a cool, dry place with the open side facing down to prevent dust from settling in the cassette body.
o Avoid repeated fast reverse usage to replay one given tune or tape section. This can cause poor tape winding to occur, and eventually cause excessive internal drag and poor audio quality in the cassette. If this occurs, it can sometimes be corrected by fast winding the tape from end to end several times. If this does not correct the problem, do not continue to use the tape in your vehicle.
Cotton applicator
SSAR042B
o The playback head, capstan and pinch rollers will develop a coating of tape residue that can result in deterioration of sound quality, such as a wavering sound. They should be cleaned monthly using a commercially available head cleaning tape or special solution available from audio specialty shops. Follow the supplier's directions carefully and never oil any part of the tape player unit.
o Always be sure that the tape is tightly wound on its reel before inserting in the player. Rotate a pencil in the drive sprockets to wind up any slack.
B860A04A
NOTE: Look at a tape before you insert it. If the tape is loose, tighten it by turning one of the hubs with a pencil or your finger. If the label is peeling off, do not put it in the drive mechanism. Do not leave tapes sitting where they are exposed to hot, warm, or high humidity, such as on top of the dashboard or in the player. If a tape is exposed to excessively hot or cold, let it reach a moderate temperature before putting it in the player.
1- 86
B870A01A-GAT
ANTENNA Fixed Rod Antenna
FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI
B870A01F
Your car uses a fixed rod antenna to receive both AM and FM broadcast signals. This antenna is a removable type. To remove the antenna, turn the antenna counterclockwise. To install the antenna, turn the antenna clockwise.
CAUTION: Be sure to remove the antenna before washing the car in an automatic car wash or the antenna may be damaged.
1- 87
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
2. DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
C010A01O-AAT
WARNING: ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!
Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately.
o Do not inhale exhaust fumes. Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.
o Be sure the exhaust system does not leak. The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by your Hyundai dealer.
o Do not run the engine in an enclosed area. Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.
o Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car. If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and the fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.
If you must drive with the tail gate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:
1. Close all windows. 2. Open side vents. 3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.
To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.
2
2- 1
C020A01A-AAT
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE Before you start the engine, you should always:
1. Look around the vehicle to be sure there are no flat tires, puddles of oil, water or other indications of possible trouble.
2. After entering the car, check to be sure the parking brake is engaged.
3. Check that all windows, and lights are clean. 4. Check that the interior and exterior mirrors
are clean and in position. 5. Check your seat, seatback and headrest to
be sure they are in their proper positions. 6. Close all the doors. 7. Fasten your seat belt and be sure that all
other occupants have fastened theirs. 8. Turn off all lights and accessories that are not
needed. 9. When you turn the ignition switch to "ON",
check that all appropriate warning lights are operating and that you have sufficient fuel. 10.Check the operation of warning lights and all bulbs when key is in the "ON" position.
C030A01A-GAT
COMBINATION IGNITION SWITCH
To Start the Engine o If your Hyundai is equipped with a manual
transaxle, place the shift lever in neutral and depress the clutch pedal fully. o If your Hyundai has an automatic transaxle, place the shift lever in "P" (park).
2- 2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
o To start the engine, insert the ignition key and turn it to the "START" position. Release it as soon as the engine starts. Do not hold the key in the "START" position for more than 15 seconds.
NOTE: For safety, the engine will not start if the shift lever is not in "P" or "N" Position (Automatic Transaxle).
C040A01A-AAT
KEY POSITIONS WARNING: The engine should not be turned off or the key removed from the ignition key cylinder while the vehicle is in motion. The steering wheel is locked by removing the key.
LOCK
ACC ON
START
C040A01E
o "START" The engine is started in this position. It will crank until you release the key.
NOTE: Do not hold the key in the "START" position for more than 15 seconds.
o "ON" When the key is in the "ON" position, the ignition is on and all accessories may be turned on. If the engine is not running, the key should not be left in the "ON" position. This will discharge the battery and may also damage the ignition system.
o "ACC" With the key in the "ACC" position, some electrical accessories (radio, etc.) may be operated.
o "LOCK" The key can be removed or inserted in this position. To protect against theft, the steering wheel locks by removing the key.
NOTE: To unlocking the steering wheel, insert the key, and then turn the steering wheel and key simultaneously.
C070C01A-AAT
To remove the ignition key
ACC
LOCK
ON
START
C070C01E
1. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position. 2. Simultaneously push and turn the ignition key
counterclockwise from the "ACC" position to the "LOCK" position. 3. The key can be removed in the "LOCK" position.
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
C050A01A-AAT
STARTING
LOCK
ON
START
C050A01E
WARNING: Never run the engine in a closed or poorly ventilated area any longer than is needed to move your car in or out of the area. The carbon monoxide gas emitted is odorless and can cause serious injury or death.
C050B01A-GAT
Normal Conditions: The Starting Procedure:
1. Insert key, and fasten the seat belt. 2. Depress the clutch pedal fully and place the
gearshift lever (manual transaxle) in neutral or the selector lever (automatic transaxle) in "P" (park) position. 3. After turning the ignition key to the "ON" position, make certain all warning lights and gauges are functioning properly before starting the engine.
WARNING: Be sure that the clutch is fully depressed when starting a manual transaxle vehicle. Otherwise, there is the potential to cause damage to the vehicle or injury to someone inside or outside the vehicle as a result of the forward or backward movement of the vehicle that will occur if the clutch is not depressed when the vehicle is started.
4. Turn the ignition key to the "Start" position and release it when the engine starts.
2- 3
C070A01GK-AAT
OPERATING THE MANUAL TRANSAXLE
A Type
B Type
HGK181
Your Hyundai's manual transaxle has a conventional shift pattern. This shift pattern is imprinted on the shift knob. The transaxle is fully synchronized in all forward gears so shifting to either a higher or a lower gear is easily accomplished.
B Type
Mis shift prevention tab
2- 4
HGK242
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
When shifting into reverse gear, pull the mis-shift prevention tab and shift into reverse gear position. (B Type: 6 speed type)
NOTE: o To shift into reverse, rest the lever in
neutral for at least 3 seconds after your car is completely stopped. Then move the lever into the reverse position. o During cold weather, shifting may be difficult until the transaxle lubricant has warmed up. This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle. o If you 've come to a complete stop and it's hard to shift into 1st or R(Reverse), put the shift lever in N(Neutral) position and release the clutch. Press the clutch pedal back down, and then shift into 1st or R(Reverse) gear position. o Do not use the shift lever as a handrest during driving, as this can result in premature wear of the transaxle shift forks.
CAUTION: When downshifting from fifth gear to fourth gear, caution should be taken not to inadvertently press the gear shift lever sideways in such a manner that second gear is engaged. Such a drastic downshift may cause the engine speed to increase to the point that the tachometer will enter the red zone. Such over-revving of the engine may possibly cause engine damage.
C070B01A-AAT
Using the Clutch
The clutch should be pressed all the way to the floor before shifting, then released slowly. The clutch pedal should always be used after fully returning to the original position. Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. This can cause unnecessary wear. Do not partially engage the clutch to hold the car on an incline. This causes unnecessary wear. Use the parking brake to hold the car on an incline. Do not operate the clutch pedal rapidly and repeatedly.
C070D03A-AAT
Good Driving Practices o Never take the car out of gear and coast down
a hill. This is extremely hazardous. Always leave the car in gear. o Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause them to overheat and malfunction. Instead, when you are driving down a long hill, slow down and shift to a lower gear. When you do this, engine braking will help slow the car. o Slow down before shifting to a lower gear. This will help avoid over-revving the engine, which can cause damage. o Slow down when you encounter cross winds. This gives you much better control of your car. o Be sure the car is completely stopped before you attempt to shift into reverse. The transaxle can be damaged if you do not. To shift into reverse, depress the clutch, move the shift lever to neutral, wait three seconds, then shift to the reverse position. o Exercise extreme caution when driving on a slippery surface. Be especially careful when braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a slippery surface, an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle to go out of control.
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
WARNING: o Avoid high cornering speeds. o Do not make quick steering wheel move-
ments, such as sharp lane changes or fast, sharp turns. o Always wear your seat belts. In a collision crash, un unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seatbelt. o The risk of rollover is greatly increased if you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds. o Loss of control often occurs if two or more wheels drop off the roadway and the driver oversteers to reenter the roadway. o In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes. o Never exceed posted speed limits.
C070E01GK-GAT
RECOMMENDED SHIFT POINTS The shift points as shown below are recommended for optimum fuel economy and performance.
A Type (5 speed)
Shift from-to
1-2 2-3 3-4 4-5
Recommended
20 km/h (15 mph) 40 km/h (25 mph) 55 km/h (35 mph) 75 km/h (45 mph)
B Type (6 speed)
Shift from-to
1-2 2-3 3-4 4-5 5-6
Recommended
15 km/h (10 mph) 35 km/h (20 mph) 50 km/h (30 mph) 70 km/h (45 mph) 95 km/h (60 mph)
2- 5
C090A04Y-GAT
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
HGK174
The highly efficient Hyundai automatic transaxle has four forward speeds and one reverse speed. The individual speeds are selected automatically, depending on the position of the speed selector lever. The selector lever has 2 gates; the main gate and the manual gate. NOTE: For information on manual gate operation, refer to "Sports Mode". In the main gate, the selector lever has 4 positions, and is equipped with a button to avoid inadvertent wrong selection. NOTE:
Depress the brake pedal and push the button when shifting. Push the button when shifting. The selector lever can be shifted freely. 2- 6
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
The first few shifts on a new vehicle, or if the battery has been disconnected, may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and the shifting sequence will adjust after shifts are cycled a few times by the T.C.M (Transmission Control Module). CAUTION: Never shift into "R" or "P" position while the vehicle is moving.
C090A02L
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster indicate the selector lever position when the ignition is switched "ON". During "D" or sports mode operation, the gear currently in use displays in the numeral indicator.
C090B01A-AAT
The function of each position is as follows:
o P (Park): Use to hold the vehicle in place when parked or while starting the engine. Whenever parking the car, apply the parking brake and shift the selector lever to the "P" (Park) position.
CAUTION: Never place the selector lever in the "P" (Park) position unless the vehicle is fully stopped. Failure to observe this caution will cause severe damage to the transaxle.
C090C01A-AAT
o R(Reverse): Use for backing up the vehicle. Bring the car to a complete stop before shifting the selector lever to "R" position.
C090D02O-AAT
o N (Neutral): In the "N" position, the transaxle is in neutral, which means that no gears are engaged. The engine can be started with the shift lever in "N" position, although this is not recommended except if the engine stalls while the car is moving.
C090E01O-AAT
o D(Drive): Use for normal driving. The transaxle will automatically shift through a four gear sequence.
C090F02GK-GAT
Sports Mode
HGK175
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion, sports mode is selected by pushing the selector lever from the "D" position into the manual gate. To return to "D" range operation, push the selector lever back into the main gate. In sports mode, moving the selector lever backwards and forwards can make rapid gearshifts simple. In contrast to a manual transaxle, the sports mode allows gearshifts with the accelerator pedal depressed. UP (+) : Push the lever forward once to shift up one gear. DOWN (-) : Pull the lever backwards once to shift down one gear.
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
CAUTION: o In sports mode, the driver must execute
shifts in accordance with prevailing road conditions, taking care to keep the engine speed below the red zone. o For engine protection, upward shifts are made automatically when the engine rpm reaches the red zone. o By rapidly moving the selector lever backwards (-) twice it is possible to skip one gear by using the sports mode. Since sudden engine braking and/or rapid acceleration can cause a loss of traction, however, downshifts must be made carefully in accordance with the vehicle's speed.
NOTE: o In sports mode, only the four forward
gears can be selected. To reverse or park the vehicle, move the selector lever to the "R" or "P" position as required. o In sports mode, downward shifts are made automatically when the vehicle slows down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear is automatically selected. o To maintain the required levels of vehicle performance and safety, the system may not execute certain gearshifts when the selector lever is operated.
o Before driving away from a stop on a slippery road, push the selector lever forward into the +(UP) position. This causes the transaxle to shift into 2nd gear which is better for smooth driving away on a slippery road. Push the selector lever to the -(DOWN) side to shift back to 1st gear.
C090H01L-GAT
NOTE: o For smooth and safe operation, depress
the brake pedal when shifting from "Neutral" position or "Park" position to a forward or reverse gear. o The ignition key must be in the "ON" position and the brake pedal fully depressed in order to move the shift lever from the "P" (Park) position to any of the other positions. o It is always possible to shift from "R", "N", "D" position to "P" position. The vehicle must be fully stopped to avoid transaxle damage.
2- 7
C090I01L-GAT
CAUTION: o Shift into "R" and "P" position only when
the vehicle has completely stopped. o Do not accelerate the engine in reverse or
any of the forward positions with the brakes applied. o Always apply the footbrake when shifting from "P" or "N", to "R", "D"position. o Do not use the "P" (Park) position in place of the parking brake. Always set the parking brake, shift the transaxle into "P" (Park) position and turn off the ignition when you leave the vehicle, even momentarily. Never leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running. o Check the automatic transaxle fluid level regularly, and add fluid as necessary.
C090N02O-AAT
Good Driving Practices o Never move the gear selector lever from "P"
or "N" to any other position with the accelerator pedal depressed. o Never move the gear selector lever into "P" when the vehicle is in motion. o Be sure the car is completely stopped before you attempt to shift into "R". o Never take the car out of gear and coast down a hill. This may be extremely hazardous. Always leave the car in gear when moving. o Do not "ride" the brakes. This can cause them to overheat and malfunction. Instead, when you are driving down a long hill, slow down
2- 8
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
and shift to a lower gear. When you do this, engine braking will help slow the car. o Slow down before shifting to a lower gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may not be engaged. o Always use the parking brake. Do not depend on placing the transaxle in "P" to keep the car from moving. o Exercise extreme caution when driving on a slippery surface. Be especially careful when braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a slippery surface, an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle to go out of control.
WARNING: o Avoid high cornering speeds. o Do not make quick steering wheel move-
ments, such as sharp lane changes or fast, sharp turns. o Always wear your seat belts. In a collision crash, un unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seatbelt. o The risk of rollover is greatly increased if you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds. o Loss of control often occurs if two or more wheels drop off the roadway and the driver oversteers to reenter the roadway. o In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes. o Never exceed posted speed limits.
C130A01A-AAT
GOOD BRAKING PRACTICES WARNING: Nothing should be carried on top of the shelf panel behind the rear seat. If there were an accident or a sudden stop, such objects could move forward and cause damage to the vehicle or injure the occupants.
o After being parked, check to be sure the parking brake is not engaged and that the parking brake indicator light is out before driving away.
o Driving through water may get the brakes wet. They can also get wet when the car is washed. Wet brakes can be dangerous! Your car will not stop as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet brakes cause the car to pull to one side. To dry the brakes, apply the brakes lightly until the braking action returns to normal, taking care to keep the car under control at all times. If the braking action does not return to normal, stop as soon as it is safe to do so and call your Hyundai dealer for assistance.
o Don't coast down hills with the car out of gear. This is extremely hazardous. Keep the car in gear at all times, use the brakes to slow down, then shift to a lower gear so that engine braking will help you maintain a safe speed.
o Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving can be dangerous because it can result in the brakes overheating and losing their effectiveness. It
also increases the wear of the brake components. o If a tire goes flat while you are driving, apply the brakes gently and keep the car pointed straight ahead while you slow down. When you are moving slowly enough for it to be safe to do so, pull off the road and stop in a safe place. o If your car is equipped with an automatic transaxle, don't let your car creep forward. To avoid creeping forward, keep your foot on the brake pedal when the car is stopped. o Use caution when parking on a hill. Engage the parking brake and place the gear selector lever in "P" (automatic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear (manual transaxle). If your car is facing downhill, turn the front wheels into the curb to help keep the car from rolling. If your car is facing uphill, turn the front wheels away from the curb to help keep the car from rolling. If there is no curb or if it is required by other conditions to keep the car from rolling, block the wheels. o Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the parking brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the gear selector lever in "P" (automatic) or in first or reverse gear (manual transaxle) and block the rear wheels so the car cannot roll. Then release the parking brake.
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
o Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade with the accelerator pedal. This can cause the transmission to overheat. Always use the brake pedal or parking brake.
C120A02A-AAT
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (If Installed) The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to prevent wheel lock-up during sudden braking or on hazardous road surfaces. The ABS control module monitors the wheel speed and controls the pressure applied to each brake. Thus, in emergency situations or on slick roads, ABS will increase vehicle control during braking.
NOTE: During ABS operation, a slight pulsation may be felt in the brake pedal when the brakes are applied. Also, a noise may be heard in the engine compartment while braking. These conditions are normal and indicate that the anti-lock brake system is functioning properly.
WARNING: Your ABS will not prevent accidents due to improper or dangerous driving maneuvers. Even though vehicle control is improved during emergency braking, always maintain a safe distance between you and objects ahead. Vehicle speeds should always be reduced during extreme road conditions. The braking distance for cars equipped with an anti-lock braking system may be longer than for those without it in the following road conditions. During these conditions the vehicle should be driven at reduced speeds. o Driving on rough, gravel or snow-covered
roads. o Driving on with tire chains installed. o Driving on roads where the road surface is
pitted or has different surface height. The safety features of an ABS equipped vehicle should not be tested by high speed driving or cornering. This could endanger the safety of yourself or others.
2- 9
C300A03Y-GAT
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS) (If installed)
HGK156A
On slippery road surfaces, the traction control system (TCS) limits the drive wheels from spinning excessively, thus helping the car to accelerate. It also provides sufficient driving force and steering performance as the car turns at accelerated speeds.
SLIP Control Limits the drive wheels from spinning excessively during starting or while making accelerated turns on slippery roads to avoid losing the driving force of the front wheels.
Driving hints TCS does not actively apply brakes. Be sure to decelerate the car sufficiently before entering curves.
2- 10
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
CAUTION: When the TCS indicator blinks, SLIP control has been activated. It also means that the road is slippery or your car is accelerating excessively. In this situation, gently release foot pressure from the accelerator pedal and maintain moderate speed.
WARNING: Traction control is only a driving aid; all normal precautions for driving in inclement weather and on slippery road surfaces should be observed.
C310B01O-AAT
TCS ON/OFF Mode When the TCS is running, the TCS indicator light in the instrument cluster will blink. If you turn the system off by pressing the TCS switch, the TCS-OFF indicator light will come on and stay on. In the TCS-OFF mode, the SLIP control will be deactivated. Adjust you driving accordingly. To turn the system back on, press the switch again. The TCS-OFF indicator light should go off.
NOTE: 1) The TCS mode will automatically be turned
ON after the engine is turned off and restarted.
2) When the traction control system is operating properly, you can feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle. This is only the effect of brake control and indicates nothing unusual.
3) When the engine starts, a click is heard from the engine compartment; however, this is only the sound of traction control being checked.
4) When moving out of the mud or fresh snow, pressing the accelerator pedal may not cause the engine speed to increase due to TCS operation.
C310D01O-AAT
Indicators and Warning The indicators should illuminate when the ignition key is turned to ON or START but should go out after three seconds. If the indicators do not illuminate, or the TCS or TCS-OFF indicator does not go out after 3 seconds, have it checked by an authorized dealer.
Should there be any unusual conditions in the device while driving, TCS-OFF indicator illuminates as a warning. If TCS-OFF indicator illuminates, pull your car to a safe place and stop the engine. Then, start the engine again to check if the TCSOFF indicator goes out.
If the indicator remains lit even after the engine has been started, have your car checked by an authorized Hyundai dealer.
NOTE: 1) When the TCS-OFF indicator illuminates,
traction control is automatically deactivated for safety. 2) Thiswarningfunctionisnotprovidedwhen the driver selects the TCS-OFF mode.
C140A01A-GAT
DRIVING FOR ECONOMY You can save fuel and get more kilometers from your car if you follow these suggestions:
o Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moderate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts or fullthrottle shifts and maintain a steady cruising speed. Don't race between stoplights. Try to adjust your speed to that of the other traffic so you don't have to change speeds unnecessarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever possible. Always maintain a safe distance from other vehicles so you can avoid unnecessary braking. This also reduces brake wear.
o Drive at a moderate speed. The faster you drive, the more fuel your car uses. Driving at a moderate speed, especially on the highway, is one of the most effective ways to reduce fuel consumption.
o Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal. This can increase fuel consumption and also in-
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
crease wear on these components. In addition, driving with your foot resting on the brake pedal may cause the brakes to overheat, which reduces their effectiveness and may lead to more serious consequences. o Take care of your tires. Keep them inflated to the recommended pressure. Incorrect inflation, either too much or too little, results in unnecessary tire wear. Check the tire pressures at least once a month. o Be sure that the wheels are aligned correctly. Improper alignment can result from hitting curbs or driving too fast over irregular surfaces. Poor alignment causes faster tire wear and may also result in other problems as well as greater fuel consumption. o Keep your car in good condition. For better fuel economy and reduced maintenance costs, maintain your car in accordance with the maintenance schedule in Section 5. If you drive your car in severe conditions, more frequent maintenance is required (see Section 5 for details). o Keep your car clean. For maximum service, your Hyundai should be kept clean and free of corrosive materials. It is especially important that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate on the underside of the car. This extra weight can result in increased fuel consumption and also contribute to corrosion. o Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary weight in your car. Weight reduces fuel economy. o Don't let the engine idle longer than necessary. If you are waiting (and not in traffic), turn
off your engine and restart only when you're ready to go. o Remember, your Hyundai does not require extended warm-up. As soon as the engine is running smoothly, you can drive away. In very cold weather, however, give your engine a slightly longer warm-up period. o Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine. Lugging is driving too slowly in too high a gear resulting in the engine bucking. If this happens, shift to a lower gear. Over-revving is racing the engine beyond its safe limit. This can be avoided by shifting at the recommended speeds. o Use your air conditioning sparingly. The air conditioning system is operated by engine power so your fuel economy is reduced when you use it.
C150A01A-AAT
SMOOTH CORNERING Avoid braking or gear changing in corners, especially when roads are wet. Ideally, corners should always be taken under gentle acceleration. If you follow these suggestions, tire wear will be held to a minimum.
C160A01A-AAT
WINTER DRIVING The more severe weather conditions of winter result in greater wear and other problems. To minimize the problems of winter driving, you should follow these suggestions:
2- 11
C160B01A-GAT
Snowy or Icy Conditions To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may be necessary to use snow tires or to install tire chains on your tires. If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires. Failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your car. Speeding, rapid acceleration, sudden brake applications, and sharp turns are potentially very hazardous practices. During deceleration, use engine braking to the fullest extent. Sudden brake applications on snowy or icy roads may cause skids to occur. You need to keep sufficient distance between the vehicle in front and your vehicle. Also, apply the brake gently. It should be noted that installing tire chains on the tire will provide a greater driving force, but will not prevent side skids.
NOTE: Tire chains are not legal in all provinces. Check province laws before fitting tire chains.
C160C01A-AAT
Use High Quality Ethylene Glycol Coolant Your Hyundai is delivered with high quality ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling system. It is the only type of coolant that should be used because it helps prevent corrosion in the cooling system, lubricates the water pump and prevents freezing. Be sure to replace or replenish your coolant in
2- 12
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
accordance with the maintenance schedule in Section 5. Before winter, have your coolant tested to assure that its freezing point is sufficient for the temperatures anticipated during the winter.
C160D01F-AAT
Check Battery and Cables Winter puts additional burdens on the battery system. Visually inspect the battery and cables as described in Section 6 (See page 6-18). The level of charge in your battery can be checked by your Hyundai dealer or a service station.
C160E01A-AAT
Change to "Winter Weight" Oil if Necessary In some climates it is recommended that a lower viscosity "winter weight" oil be used during cold weather. See Section 9 for recommendations. If you aren't sure what weight oil you should use, consult your Hyundai dealer.
C160F01F-GAT
Check Spark Plugs and Ignition System Inspect your spark plugs as described in Section 6 (See page 6-8) and replace them if necessary. Also check all ignition wiring and components to be sure they are not cracked, worn or damaged in any way.
C160G01A-GAT
To Keep Locks from Freezing To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into the key opening. If a lock is covered with ice, squirt it with an approved de-icing fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is frozen internally, you may be able to thaw it out by using a heated key. Handle the heated key with care to avoid injury.
NOTE: The proper temperature for using the immobilizer key is from -40°C to 80°C. If you heat the immobilizer key over 80°C to open the frozen lock, it may cause damage to the transponder in its head.
C160H01A-AAT
Use Approved Anti-Freeze in Window Washer System To keep the water in the window washer system from freezing, add an approved anti-freeze solution in accordance with instructions on the container. Window washer anti-freeze is available from Hyundai dealers and most auto parts outlets. Do not use engine coolant or other types of anti-freeze as these may damage the finish.
C160I01A-AAT
Don't Let Your Parking Brake Freeze Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged position. This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk the parking brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the gear selector lever in "P" (automatic) or in first or reverse gear (manual transaxle) and block the rear wheels so the car cannot roll. Then release the parking brake.
C160J01A-AAT
Don't Let Ice and Snow Accumulate
Underneath Under some conditions, snow and ice can build up under the fenders and interfere with the steering. When driving in severe winter conditions where this may happen, you should periodically check underneath the car to be sure the movement of the front wheels and the steering components is not obstructed.
C160K01A-AAT
Carry Emergency Equipment Depending on the severity of the weather where you drive your car, you should carry appropriate emergency equipment. Some of the items you may want to carry include tire chains, tow straps or chains, flashlight, emergency flares, sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper, gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
C170A01A-AAT
HIGHER SPEED MOTORING Pre-Trip Inspections 1. Tires: Adjust the tire inflation pressures to specification. Low tire inflation pressures will result in overheating and possible failure of the tires. Avoid using worn or damaged tires which may result in reduced traction or tire failure.
NOTE: Never exceed the maximum tire inflation pressure shown on the tires.
2. Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil: High speed travel consumes more fuel than urban motoring. Do not forget to check both engine coolant and engine oil.
3. Drive belt: A loose or damaged drive belt may result in overheating of the engine.
C180A01A-AAT
USE OF LIGHTS Check your lights regularly for correct operation and always keep them clean. When driving during the day in conditions of poor visibility, it is helpful to drive with headlights on low beam. This enables you to be seen as well as to see.
C190A01A-GAT
TRAILER OR VEHICLE TOWING If you are considering towing with your car, you should first check with your Province Department of Motor Vehicles to determine their legal requirements. Since laws vary from province to province, the requirements for towing trailers, cars, other types of vehicles, or apparatus may differ. Ask your Hyundai dealer for further details before towing.
CAUTION Do not do any towing with your car during its first 2,000 km (1,200 miles) in order to allow the engine to properly break in. Failure to heed this caution may result in serious engine or transaxle damage.
C190B01S-AAT
Trailer Hitches Select the proper hitch and ball combination, making sure that it's location is compatible with that of the trailer or vehicle being towed. Use a quality non-equalizing hitch which distributes the tongue load uniformly throughout the chassis.
The hitch should be bolted securely to the car and installed by a qualified technician. DO NOT USE A HITCH DESIGNED FOR TEMPORARY INSTALLATION AND NEVER USE ONE THAT ATTACHES ONLY TO THE BUMPER.
2- 13
C190C02Y-GAT
Trailer Brakes If your trailer is equipped with a braking system, make sure it conforms to federal and/or local regulations and that it is properly installed and operating correctly.
NOTE: If you tow a trailer or vehicle, your car will require more frequent maintenance due to the additional load. See "Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions" on page 5-4.
CAUTION: o Never connect a trailer brake system di-
rectly to the vehicle brake system. o When towing a trailer on steep grades (in
excess of 12%) pay close attention to the engine coolant temperature gauge to ensure the engine does not overheat. If the needle of the coolant temperature gauge moves across the dial towards "H" (HOT), pull over and stop as soon as it is safe to do so, and allow the engine to idle until it cools down. You may proceed once the engine has cooled sufficiently.
C190D01A-GAT
Safety Chains Should the hitch connection between your car and the trailer or vehicle you are towing fail, the trailer or vehicle could wander dangerously across other lanes of traffic and ultimately collide with
2- 14
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
another vehicle. To eliminate this potentially dangerous situation, safety chains, attached between your car and the trailer or towed vehicle, are required in most provinces.
C190E01GK-GAT
Trailer Weight Limit
Tongue load
Total trailer weight
SSA2200B
Tongue loads can be increased or decreased by redistributing the load in the trailer. This can be verified by checking the total weight of the loaded trailer and then checking the load on the tongue.
NOTE: 1. Never load the trailer with more weight in
the back than in the front. About 60% of the trailer load should be in the front half on the trailer and the remaining 40% in the rear.
Gross Axle Weight Gross Vehicle Weight
SSA2200D
2. The total gross vehicle weight with trailer must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) shown on the vehicle identification plate (see page 8-1). The total gross vehicle weight is the combined weight of the vehicle, driver, all passengers and their luggage, cargo, hitch, trailer tongue load and other optional equipment.
3. The front or rear axle weight must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) shown on the vehicle identification plate (see page 8-1). It is possible that your towing package does not exceed the GVWR but exceeds the GAWR. Improper trailer loading and/or too much luggage in the trunk can overload the rear axle. Redistribute the load and check the axle weight again.
4. The maximum permissible static vertical load on the coupling device:
1.6 L 2.0/2.7 L
50 kg 60 kg
5. The maximum permissible overhang of the coupling point : 990 mm.
View from below the vehicle Coupling point
HGK260
CAUTION: The following specifications are recommended when towing a trailer. The loaded trailer weight cannot safely exceed the values in the following chart.
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
kg
Without Brake Type
With Brake
1.6 L
Type
2.0/2.7 L
Maximum Towable Weight
Trailer 550 1,200 1,400
WARNING: Improperly loading your car and trailer can seriously affect its steering and braking performance causing a crash which you may be serious injury or death.
C190F01A-GAT
Trailer or Vehicle Towing Tips 1. Before towing, check hitch and safety chain
connections as well as proper operation of the trailer running lights, brake lights, and turn signals. 2. Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed (Less than 100 km/H). 3. Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal conditions. 4. To maintain engine braking efficiency and electrical charging performance, do not use fifth gear (manual transaxle) or overdrive (automatic transaxle). 5. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving. 6. Check the condition and air pressure of all tires on the trailer and your car. Low tire pressure can seriously affect the handling. Also check the spare tire. 7. The vehicle/trailer combination is more affected by crosswind and buffeting. When being passed by a large vehicle, keep a constant speed and steer straight ahead. If there is too much wind buffeting, slow down to get out of the other vehicle's air turbulence. 8. When parking your car and trailer, especially on a hill, be sure to follow all the normal precautions. Turn your front wheel into the curb, set the parking brake firmly, and put the transmission in 1st or Reverse (manual) or Park (automatic). In addition, place wheel chocks at each of the trailer's tires.
2- 15
9. If the trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving, and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time.
10.During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure, and that the lights and any trailer brakes are still working.
11.Avoid jerky starts, sudden acceleration or sudden stops.
12.Avoid sharp turns and rapid lane changes. 13.Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long
or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency. 14.When going down a hill, shift into a lower gear and use the engine braking effect. When ascending a long grade, downshift the transmission to a lower gear and reduce speed to reduce chances of engine overloading and/or overheating. 15.If you have to stop while going uphill, do not hold the vehicle in place by pressing on the accelerator. This can cause the automatic transmission to overheat. Use the parking brake or footbrake.
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
NOTE: When towing check transaxle fluid more frequently.
CAUTION: If overheating should occur when towing, (temperature gauge reads near red zone), taking the following action may reduce or eliminate the problem.
1. Turn off the air conditioner. 2. Reduce highway speed. 3. Select a lower gear when going uphill. 4. While in stop and go traffic, place the gear
selector in park or neutral and idle the engine at a higher speed.
2- 16
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
3. WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
D010A01A-AAT
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START WARNING: If the engine will not start, do not push or pull the car to start it. This could result in a collision or cause other damage. In addition, push or pull starting may cause the catalytic converter to be overloaded and create a fire hazard.
D010B02A-AAT
If Engine Doesn't Turn Over or Turns Over Slowly
2. Check the battery connections to be sure they are clean and tight.
3. Turn on the interior light. If the light dims or goes out when you operate the starter, the battery is discharged.
4. Check the starter connections to be sure they are securely tightened.
5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. See instructions for "Jump Starting" on the following pages.
D010C01A-AAT
If Engine Turns Over Normally but Does Not Start 1 Check fuel level. 2 With the key in the off position, Check all
connectors at ignition coils and spark plugs. Reconnect any that may be disconnected or loose. 3 Check the fuel line in the engine compartment. 4 If engine still refuses to start, call a Hyundai dealer or seek other qualified assistance.
D020A02A-AAT
JUMP STARTING DOHC
V6
3
Battery HGK184
D010B01GK
1. If your car has an automatic transaxle, be sure the gear selector lever is in "N" or "P" and the emergency brake is set.
D010D01A-AAT
If Engine Stalls While Driving
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers. 3. Try to start the engine again. If your vehicle
will not start, contact a Hyundai dealer or seek other qualified assistance.
Battery HGK184A
WARNING: The gas produced by the battery during the jump-start operation is highly explosive. If these instructions are not followed exactly, serious personal injury and damage to the vehicle may occur! If you are not sure how to follow this procedure, seek qualified assis-
3-1
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
tance. Automobile batteries contain sulfuric acid. This is poisonous and highly corrosive. When jump starting, wear protective glasses and be careful not to get acid on yourself, your clothing or on the car.
o If you should accidentally get acid on your skin or in your eyes, immediately remove any contaminated clothing and flush the area with clear water for at least 15 minutes. Then promptly obtain medical attention. If you must be transported to an emergency facility, continue to apply water to the affected area with a sponge or cloth.
o The gas produced by the battery during the jump-start operation is highly explosive. Do not smoke or allow a spark or open flame in the vicinity.
o The battery being used to provide the jump start must be 12-volt. If you cannot determine that it is a 12-volt battery, do not attempt to use it for the jump start.
o To jump start a car with a discharged battery, follow this procedure exactly:
1. If the booster battery is installed in another vehicle, be sure the two vehicles are not touching.
2. Turn off all unnecessary lights and accessories in both vehicles.
3-2
3. Attach the clamps of the jumper cable in the exact location shown on the previous page. First, attach one clamp of the jumper cable to the positive (+) post or cable of the discharged battery. Then attach the other end of the same cable to the positive (+) post or cable of the booster battery. Next, using the other cable, attach one clamp to the negative (-) post or cable of the booster battery. Then attach the other end of that cable to a solid metal part of the engine away from the battery. Do not connect the cable to any moving part.
4. Start the engine in the car with the booster battery and let it run for a few minutes. This will help to assure that the booster battery is fully charged. During the jumping operation, run the engine in this vehicle at about 2000 rpm.
5. Start the engine in the car with the discharged battery using the normal starting procedure. After the engine starts, leave the jumper cables connected and let the engine run at fast idle or about 2000 rpm for several minutes.
6. Carefully remove the jumper cables in the reverse order of attachment.
If you do not know why your battery became discharged (because the lights were left on, etc.), have the charging system checked by your Hyundai dealer.
D030A02A-AAT
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS If your temperature gauge indicates overheating, you experience a loss of power, or hear loud pinging or knocking, the engine is probably too hot. If this happens to you, you should:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
2. Place the gear selector lever in "P" (automatic), or neutral (manual transaxle) and set the parking brake. If the air conditioning is on, turn it off.
3. If engine coolant is running out under the car or steam is coming out from the hood, stop the engine. Do not open the hood until the engine coolant has stopped running or the steaming has stopped. If there is no visible loss of engine coolant and no steam, leave the engine running and check to be sure the engine cooling fan is operating. If the fan is not running, turn the engine off.
4. Check to see if the water pump drive belt is missing. If it is not missing, check to see that it is tight. If the drive belt seems to be satisfactory, check for engine coolant leaking from the radiator, hoses or under the car. (If the air conditioning had been in use, it is normal for cold water to be draining from it when you stop).
WARNING: While the engine is running, keep hair, hands, and clothing away from moving parts such as the fan and drive belts to prevent injury.
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
5. If the water pump drive belt is broken or engine coolant is leaking out, stop the engine immediately and call the nearest Hyundai dealer for assistance.
WARNING: Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. This can allow coolant to be blown out of the opening and cause serious burns.
6. If you cannot find the cause of the overheating, wait until the engine temperature has returned to normal. Then, if the engine coolant has been lost, carefully add coolant to the reservoir (page 6-8) to bring the fluid level in the reservoir up to the halfway mark.
7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert for further signs of overheating. If overheating happens again, call a Hyundai dealer for assistance.
CAUTION: Serious loss of engine coolant indicates there is a leak in the cooling system and this should be checked as soon as possible by a Hyundai dealer.
D040A01GK-GAT
TEMPORARY SPARE TIRE The following instructions for the temporary spare tire should be observed:
1. Check inflation pressure as soon as practical after installing the spare tire, and adjust to the specified pressure. The tire pressure should be periodically checked and maintained at the specified pressure while the tire is stored.
Spare Tire Pressure
Tire Size Inflation Pressure
T125/70R 16 420 kPa (60 psi)
2. The spare tire should only be used temporarily and should be returned to the luggage compartment as soon as the original tire can be repaired or replaced.
3. Continuous use at speeds of over 80 km/h (50 mph) is not recommended.
4. As the temporary spare tire is specifically designed for your car, it should not be used on any other vehicle.
5. The temporary spare tire should not be used on any other wheels, nor should standard tires, snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings be used with the temporary spare wheel. If such use is attempted, damage to these items or other car components may occur.
6. The temporary spare tire pressure should be checked once a month while the tire is stored.
CAUTION: o Do not use snow chains with your tempo-
rary spare tire. o Do not use more than one temporary spare
tire at a time.
D040B01A-AAT
Handling the Spare Tire
HGK190
Remove the installation bolt to remove the spare tire. To replace the spare tire in its storage compartment, tighten the bolt firmly with your fingers until there is no more play in the spare tire.
3-3
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
D050A01A-AAT
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and let the car slow down while driving straight ahead. Do not apply the brakes immediately or attempt to pull off the road as this may cause a loss of control. When the car has slowed to such a speed that it is safe to do so, brake carefully and pull off the road. Drive off the road as far as possible and park on firm, level ground. If you are on a divided highway, do not park in the median area between the two traffic lanes.
2. When the car is stopped, turn on your emergency hazard flashers, set the parking brake and put the transaxle in "P" (automatic) or reverse (manual transaxle).
3. Have all passengers get out of the car. Be sure they all get out on the side of the car that is away from traffic.
4. Change the tire following the instructions provided on the following pages.
D060A01A-AAT
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
D060A01GK
The procedure described on the following pages can be used to rotate tires as well as to change a flat tire. When preparing to change a flat tire, check to be sure the gear selector lever is in "P" (automatic) or reverse gear (manual transaxle) and that the parking brake is set, then:
D060K01FC-GAT
Wheel Cap (If Installed)
Groove
HGK224
1. Wrap a piece of cloth around the tip of the screw driver to avoid scratching.
2. Insert the screw driver into the groove of the wheel cap and pry gently to remove the wheel cap.
3. Change the flat tire. Groove
Boss
HGK196
3-4
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
4. Reinstall the wheel cap by fitting the boss of the wheel cap in the groove of the wheel, hitting the center of the wheel cap with your hand.
D060B02GK-AAT
1. Obtain Spare Tire and Tool
The jack is located behind the right side of luggage trim. Remove the jack cover by unscrewing the bolts. Turn the jack end counterclockwise to lower the jack height by using a screw driver or wrench bar and remove it from the bracket.
D060C01A-AAT
2. Block the Wheel
Flat tire
D060D02A-AAT
3. Loosen Wheel Nuts
HGK189
Remove the spare tire and remove the jack and tool bag from the trunk.
HGK192
Block the wheel that is diagonally opposite from the flat to keep the vehicle from rolling when the car is raised on the jack.
HGK193
The wheel nuts should be loosened slightly before raising the car. To loosen the nuts, turn the wrench handle counterclockwise. When doing this, be sure that the socket is seated completely over the nut so it cannot slip off. For maximum leverage, position the wrench so the handle is to the left as shown in the drawing. Then, while holding the wrench near the end of the handle, push down on it with steady pressure. Do not remove the nuts at this time. Just loosen them about one-half turn.
HGK191
3-5
D060E01A-AAT
4. Put the Jack in Place
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
D060F02E-AAT
5. Raising the Car
D060G02Y-AAT
6. Changing Wheels
Wrench bar
HGK186
The base of the jack should be placed on firm, level ground. The jack should be positioned as shown in the drawing.
3-6
Wheel nut wrench
HFC4022
After inserting a bar into the wheel nut wrench, install the bar into the jack as shown in the drawing. To raise the vehicle, turn the jack handle clockwise. As the jack begins to raise the vehicle, double check that it is properly positioned and will not slip. If the jack is on soft ground or sand, place a board, brick, flat stone or other object under the base of the jack to keep it from sinking. Raise the car high enough so that the fully inflated spare tire can be installed. To do this, you will need more ground clearance than is required to remove the flat tire.
WARNING: Do not get under the car when it is supported by the jack! This is very dangerous as the jack could fall and cause serious injury or death. No one should stay in the car while the jack is being used.
HGK232
Loosen the wheel nuts and remove them with your fingers. Slide the wheel off the studs and lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To put the wheel on the hub, pick up the spare tire, line up the holes with the studs and slide the wheel onto them. If this is difficult, tip the wheel slightly and get the top hole in the wheel lined up with the top stud. Then jiggle the wheel back and forth until the wheel can be slid over the other studs.
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
D060H02A-AAT
7. Re-install Wheel Nuts
D060I01E-GAT
8. Lower Vehicle and Tighten Nuts
STA3071H
WARNING: Wheels and wheel covers may have sharp edges. Handle them carefully to avoid possible severe injury. Before putting the wheel into place, be sure that there is nothing on the hub or wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel, etc.) that interferes with the wheel from fitting solidly against the hub. If there is, remove it. If there is not good contact on the mounting surface between the wheel and hub, the wheel nuts could come loose and cause the loss of a wheel. Loss of a wheel may result in loss of control of the vehicle. This may cause serious injury or death.
D060H01GK
To reinstall the wheel, hold it on the studs, put the wheel nuts on the studs and tighten them finger tight. The nuts should be installed with their small diameter ends directed inward. Jiggle the tire to be sure it is completely seated, then tighten the nuts as much as possible with your fingers again.
HGK194
Lower the car to the ground by turning the wheel nut wrench counterclockwise. Then position the wrench as shown in the drawing and tighten the wheel nuts. Be sure the socket is seated completely over the nut. Do not stand on the wrench handle or use an extension pipe over the wrench handle. Go around the wheel tightening every other nut until they are all tight. Then double-check each nut for tightness. After changing wheels, have a technician tighten the wheel nuts to their proper torque as soon as possible.
Wheel nut tightening torque: Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel: 900-1,100 kg.cm,100 kg.cm (65-80 lb.ft)
3-7
D060J01FC-GAT
After Changing Wheels
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
D080A02A-GAT
IF YOUR CAR MUST BE TOWED
D080B01A-AAT
Towing a Car with a Manual Transaxle
HGK195
If you have a tire gauge, remove the valve cap and check the air pressure. If the pressure is lower than recommended, drive slowly to the nearest service station and inflate to the correct pressure. If it is too high, adjust it until it is correct. Always reinstall the valve cap after checking or adjusting tire pressure. If the cap is not replaced, air may leak from the tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy another and install it as soon as possible. After you have changed wheels, always secure the flat tire in its place in the luggage compartment and return the jack and tools to their proper storage locations.
D080A01GK
o OK FOR AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL TRANSAXLE EQUIPPED VEHICLE
CAUTION: Your car can be damaged if towed incorrectly!
If your car has to be towed, it should be done by your Hyundai dealer or a commercial tow truck service. This will help assure that your car is not damaged in towing. Also, professionals are generally aware of local laws governing towing. In any case, rather than risk damage to your car, it is suggested that you show this information to the tow truck operator. Be sure that a safety chain system is used and that all local laws are observed.
HGK199
o OK FOR AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL TRANSAXLE EQUIPPED VEHICLE WITH NO DAMAGE
o If the car is being towed with the rear wheels on the ground, be sure the parking brake is released.
o If the car is being towed with the front wheels on the ground, be sure that the transaxle is in neutral. Also, be sure that the ignition key is in the "ACC" position. This is necessary to prevent damage to the steering lock mechanism, which is not designed to hold the front wheels straight while the car is being towed.
o If any of the loaded wheels or suspension components are damaged, a towing dolly must be used.
3-8
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
D080C02A-GAT
Towing a Car With an Automatic Transaxle
HGK200
o NOT OK FOR AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE EQUIPPED VEHICLE
o OK FOR MANUAL TRANSAXLE
CAUTION: A car with an automatic transaxle should never be towed from the rear with the front wheels on the ground. This can cause serious damage to the transaxle. If the car must be towed from the rear, a towing dolly must be used under the front wheels.
If the car is being towed with the rear wheels on the ground, be sure the parking brake is released.
D080C01GK
o OK FOR AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL TRANSAXLE EQUIPPED VEHICLE
NOTE: Before towing, check the level of the transaxle fluid. If it is below the "HOT" range on the dipstick, add fluid. If you cannot add fluid, a towing dolly must be used.
D080D02A-AAT
Emergency Towing
For emergency towing when no commercial tow vehicle is available, attach a tow cable, chain or strap to one of the towing hooks under the front/ rear of your car. Do not attempt to tow your vehicle in this manner on any unpaved surface. This could result in serious damage to your car. Nor should towing be attempted if the wheels, drive train, axles, steering or brakes are damaged. Before towing, be sure the transaxle is in neutral and the key is in "ACC" (with the engine off) or in the "ON" position (with the engine running). A driver must be in the towed car to steer it and operate the brakes.
CAUTION: o If the car is being towed with all four
wheels on the ground, it can be towed only from the front. Be sure that the transaxle is in neutral. Do not tow at speeds greater than 50 km/h (30 mph) and for more than 25 km (15 miles). o Be sure the steering is unlocked by placing the key in the "ACC" position. A driver must be in the towed vehicle to operate the steering and brakes
HGK188
3-9
WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY
D120A02A-GAT
IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS Information about the key of immobilizer system (if installed) will be found on page 1-2.
3-10
CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
4. CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
E010A01A-AAT
CORROSION PROTECTION Protecting Your Hyundai from Corrosion By using the most advanced design and construction practices to combat corrosion, Hyundai produces cars of the highest quality, however, this is only part of the job. To achieve the longterm corrosion resistance your Hyundai can deliver, the owner's cooperation and assistance is also required.
E010B01A-AAT
Common Causes of Corrosion The most common causes of corrosion on your car are:
o Road salt, dirt and moisture that is allowed to accumulate underneath the car.
o Removal of paint or protective coatings by stones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapes and dents which leave unprotected metal exposed to corrosion.
E010C01A-AAT
High-Corrosion Areas If you live in an area where your car is regularly exposed to corrosive materials, corrosion protection is particularly important. Some of the common causes of accelerated corrosion are road salts, dust control chemicals, ocean air and industrial pollution.
E010D01A-AAT
Moisture Breeds Corrosion Moisture creates the conditions in which corrosion is most likely to occur. For example, corrosion is accelerated by high humidity, particularly when temperatures are just above freezing. In such conditions, the corrosive material is kept in contact with the car surfaces by moisture that is slow to evaporate. Mud is a particular corrosive because it is slow to dry and holds moisture in contact with the vehicle. Although the mud appears to be dry, it can still retain the moisture and promote corrosion. High temperatures can also accelerate corrosion of parts that are not properly ventilated so the moisture can be dispersed. For all these reasons, it is particularly important to keep your car clean and free of mud or accumulations of other materials. This applies not only to the visible surfaces but particularly to the underside of the car.
E020A01A-AAT
TO HELP PREVENT CORROSION You can help prevent corrosion from getting started by observing the following:
E020B01A-AAT
Keep Your Car Clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is to keep your car clean and free of corrosive materials. Attention to the underside of the car is particularly important.
o If you live in a high-corrosion area -- where road salts are used, near the ocean, areas
4
with industrial pollution, acid rain, etc.--, you
should take extra care to prevent corrosion.
In winter, hose off the underside of your car at
least once a month and be sure to clean the
underside thoroughly when winter is over.
o When cleaning underneath the car, give par-
ticular attention to the components under the
fenders and other areas that are hidden from
view. Do a thorough job; just dampening the
accumulated mud rather than washing it away
will accelerate corrosion rather than prevent
it. Water under high pressure and steam are
particularly effective in removing accumulat-
ed mud and corrosive materials.
o When cleaning lower door panels, rocker
panels and frame members, be sure that
drain holes are kept open so that moisture
can escape and not be trapped inside to ac-
celerate corrosion.
4-1
CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
E020C01A-AAT
Keep Your Garage Dry Don't park your car in a damp, poorly ventilated garage. This creates a favorable environment for corrosion. This is particularly true if you wash your car in the garage or drive it into the garage when it is still wet or covered with snow, ice or mud. Even a heated garage can contribute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated so moisture is dispersed.
E020D01A-AAT
Keep Paint and Trim in Good Condition Scratches or chips in the finish should be covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as possible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. If bare metal is showing through, the attention of a qualified body and paint shop is recommended.
E020E01A-AAT
Don't Neglect the Interior Moisture can collect under the floor mats and carpeting to cause corrosion. Check under the mats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry. Use particular care if you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or chemicals in the car. These should be carried only in proper containers and any spills or leaks should be cleaned up, flushed with clear water and thoroughly dried.
4-2
E030A01GK-AAT
WASHING AND WAXING
Washing Your Hyundai Never wash your car when the surface is hot from being in the sun. Always wash your car in the shade.
Wash your car frequently. Dirt is abrasive and can scratch the paint if it is not removed. Air pollution or acid rain may damage the paint and trim through chemical action if pollutants are allowed to remain in contact with the surface. If you live near the ocean or in an area where road salts or dust control chemicals are used, you should pay particular attention to the underside of the car. Start by rinsing the car to remove dust and loose dirt. In winter, or if you have driven through mud or muddy water, be sure to thoroughly clean the underside as well. Use a hard direct stream of water to remove accumulations of mud or corrosive materials. High pressure car washes may cause water to enter your vehicle. Use a good quality car-washing solution and follow the manufacturer's directions on the package. These are available at your Hyundai dealer or auto parts outlet. Don't use strong household detergents, gasoline, strong solvents or abrasive cleaning powders as these may damage the finish. Use a clean sponge or cloth, rinse it frequently and don't damage the finish by rubbing too hard. For stubborn spots, dampen them frequently and remove them a little at a time.
To clean whitewall tires, use a stiff brush or soapy steel-wool scouring pad. To clean plastic wheel covers, use a clean sponge or soft cloth and water.
To clean cast aluminum alloy wheels, use a mild soap or neutral detergent. Do not use abrasive cleaners. Protect the bare-metal surfaces by cleaning, polishing and waxing. Because aluminum is subject to corrosion, be sure to give aluminum alloy wheels special attention in winter. If you drive on salted roads, clean the wheels thoroughly afterwards.
After washing, be sure to rinse thoroughly. If soapy water dries on the finish, streaking will result.
When the weather is warm and the humidity low, you may find it necessary to rinse each section immediately after washing to avoid streaking.
After rinsing, dry the car using a damp chamois or soft, absorbent cloth. The reason for drying the car is to remove water from the car so it will dry without water spots. Don't rub, this can damage the finish.
If you find any nicks or scratches in the paint, use touch-up paint to cover them to prevent corrosion. To protect the paintwork of the car against corrosion, you must clean your Hyundai (at least once a month). Give special attention to the removal of salt, mud and other substances on the underside of the splashboards of the car. Make
CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
sure that the outlets and the underside of the doors are open. Paint damage can be caused by small accumulation of tar, industrial precipitation, tree resin, insects and bird droppings, when not removed immediately. If water alone is not strong enough to remove the accumulated dirt, use a mild car washing solution. Be sure to rinse the surface after washing to remove the solution. Never allow the solution to dry on the painted surfaces.
E030B01A-AAT
Spot Cleaning Don't use gasoline, strong solvents or corrosive cleaning agents. These can damage the finish of the car. To remove road tar, use turpentine on a clean, soft cloth. Be gentle. To remove dead insects or tree sap, use warm water and mild soap or car-washing solution. Soak the spot and rub gently. If the paint has lost its luster, use a commercial car-cleaning polish.
E030C01A-AAT
Polishing and Waxing Always wash and dry the car before polishing or waxing or using a combination cleaner and wax. Use a good quality commercial product and follow the manufacturer's directions on the container. Polish and wax the bright trim pieces as well as the paint.
E030D01A-AAT
When to Wax Again You should polish and wax the car again when water no longer beads on a clean surface but spreads out over a larger area.
E030E01A-AAT
Maintaining Bumpers Special precautions must be observed to preserve the appearance of the bumpers on your Hyundai. They are:
o Be careful not to spill battery electrolyte or hydraulic brake fluid on the bumpers. If you do, wash it off immediately with clear water.
o Be gentle when cleaning the bumper surfaces. They are made of soft plastic and the surface can be damaged if mistreated. Do not use abrasive cleaners. Use warm water and mild soap or car-washing solution.
o Do not expose the bumpers to high temperatures. For example, if you have your car repainted, do not leave the bumpers on the car if the car is going to be placed in a hightemperature paint booth.
E040A01A-AAT
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
To Clean the Vinyl Upholstery To clean the vinyl upholstery, first remove loose dirt and dust with a vacuum cleaner. Then apply a solution of mild soap or detergent and water using a clean sponge or soft cloth. Allow this to stay on the surface to loosen the dirt, then wipe with a clean damp sponge or cloth. If all the dirt stains are not removed, repeat this procedure until the upholstery is clean. Do not use gasoline, solvent, paint thinner or other strong cleaners.
E040B01A-AAT
To Clean the Leather Upholstery (If Installed) In the normal course of use, leather upholstered surfaces will, like any material, pick-up dust and dirt. This dust and dirt must be cleaned off or it may work into the surface of the leather, causing damage.
Fine leather needs care, and should be cleaned when necessary. Washing leather thoroughly with soap and water will keep your leather lustrous, beautiful and ensure you have many years of wear. Take a piece of cheese cloth and using any mild soap and lukewarm water, work up a good lather. Thoroughly wash the leather. Wipe clean with a slightly damp cloth and dry with soft cloth. Do this as often as the leather becomes soiled.
4-3
CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE
During tanning operations, sufficient oils are incorporated through processing that none need be applied during the life of the leather. Oil applied to the finished surface will in no way help the leather and may do more harm than good. Varnishes and furniture polishes should never be used under any conditions.
E040C01A-AAT
Cleaning the Carpets Use a foam-type carpet cleaner. Cleaners of this type are available in aerosol cans in liquid form or powder. Read the instructions and follow them exactly. Using a vacuum cleaner with the appropriate attachment, remove as much dirt from the carpets as possible. Apply the foam following the manufacturer's directions, then rub in overlapping circles. Do not add water. These cleaners work best when the carpet is kept as dry as possible.
E040E01A-AAT
Cleaning the Windows You may use any household window cleaner on the windows. However, when cleaning the inside of the rear window be careful not to damage the rear window defroster wiring.
E050A01A-AAT
Any Questions? If you have any questions about the care of your car, consult your Hyundai dealer.
E040D01A-AAT
Cleaning the Seat Belts
To clean the seat belts, use a cloth or sponge with mild soap or detergent and warm water. Do not use strong detergents, dye, bleach or abrasive materials on the seat belts as this may weaken the fabric. While cleaning the belts, inspect them for excessive wear, cuts, fraying or other signs of damage and replace them if necessary.
4-4
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
5. VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
F010A01A-GAT
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS Service Requirements To assure that you receive the greatest number of kilometers of satisfying operation from your Hyundai, certain maintenance procedures must be performed. Although careful design and engineering have reduced these to a minimum, those that are required are of the utmost importance. It is your responsibility to have these maintenance procedures performed to comply with the terms of the warranties covering your new Hyundai. The Service Passport supplied with your new vehicle provides further information about these warranties.
F010B01A-AAT
Maintenance Requirements The maintenance required for your Hyundai can be divided into three main areas:
o Specified scheduled procedures o General checks o Do-it-yourself maintenance
F010C01A-GAT
Specified Scheduled Procedures These are the procedures such as inspections, adjustments and replacements that are listed in the maintenance charts starting on page 5-2. These procedures must be performed at the intervals shown in the maintenance schedule to assure that your warranty remains in effect. Although it is strongly recommended that they be performed by the factory-trained or distributor-trained technicians at your Hyundai dealer, these procedures may be performed at any qualified service facility. It is suggested that genuine Hyundai service parts be used for any required repairs or replacements. Other parts of equivalent quality such as engine oil, engine coolant, manual or auto transaxle oil, brake fluid and so on which are not supplied by Hyundai Motor Company or its distributor may be used without affecting your warranty coverage but you should always be sure these are equivalent to the quality of the original Hyundai parts. Your Service Passport provides further information about your warranty coverage.
F010D01A-AAT
General Checks These are the regular checks you should perform when you drive your Hyundai or you fill the fuel tank. A list of these items will be found on page 6-4.
F010E01A-AAT
Do-It-Yourself Maintenance
If you are mechanically inclined, own a few tools that are required and want to take the time to do so, you can inspect and service a number of items. For more information about doing it yourself, see Section 6.
F010F01A-AAT
A Few Tips
o Whenever you have your Hyundai serviced,
keep copies of the service records in your
glovebox. This will help ensure that you can
document that the required procedures have
been performed to keep your warranties in
effect. This is especially important when
service is not performed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.
5
o If you choose to do your own maintenance
and repairs, you may find it helpful to have
an official Hyundai Shop Manual. A copy of
this publication may be purchased at your
Hyundai dealer's parts department.
F020A02A-GAT
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RE-
QUIREMENTS Inspection should be performed any time a malfunction is experienced or suspected. Receipts for all emission control system services should be retained to demonstrate compliance with conditions of the emissions system warranty. For severe usage maintenance requirements, see page 5-4 of this section.
5-1
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
F030A01GK-GAT
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE The following maintenance services must be performed to assure good vehicle control and performance. Keep receipts for all vehicle services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.
F030B03GK-GAT
R :Replace I : Inspect and, after Inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary.
NO.
DESCRIPTION
KILOMETERS X 1000
MONTHS
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
1 ENGINE OIL & FILTER (SG OR ABOVE)
See Note (1)
2 DRIVE BELT
1.6 DOHC/2.0 DOHC CVVT (ALT, W/PUMP, P/STR'G) 2.7 V6 (AUTO-TENSIONER, ALT, P/STR'G, A/CON)
3 FUEL FILTER (MPI)
4 FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSES & CONNECTIONS
5 TIMING BELT
6 VAPOR HOSE & FUEL FILLER CAP
7 VACUUM CRANKCASE VENTILATION HOSES
8 AIR CLEANER FILTER
9 SPARK PLUGS
SPARK PLUGS (PLATINUM COATED)
10 VALVE CLEARENCE (2.0L)
15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
R
I
R
I
R
See Note (2)
R
See Note (3)
Note : (1) SF OR LOWER: EVERY 10,000 KM OR 6 MONTHS : "R" FOR 2.0 DOHC CVVT : SH (API), GF-1 (ILSAC) OR ABOVE
(2) FOR EVERY 40,000 KM: "R" 5- 2 (3) FOR EVERY 96,000 KM OR 48 MONTHS, WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST : "I"
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
F030C01GK-GAT
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
NO.
DESCRIPTION
KILOMETERS X 1000 MONTHS
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
1 COOLING SYSTEM
2 COOLANT
3 MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL
4 AUTOMATIC
European Community Only
TRANSAXLE FLUID
Except European Community
5 BRAKE HOSES AND LINES
6 BRAKE FLUID
7 REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE
8 BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS
9 EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER
10 SUSPENSION MOUNTING BOLTS
11 STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/LOWER ARM BALL JOINT
12 POWER STEERING PUMP, BELT AND HOSES
13 DRIVESHAFTS AND BOOTS
14 AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT
15 AIR CONDITIONER FILTER (FOR BLOWER UNIT)
15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
See Note (1)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
See Note (2)
Note : (1) FOR EVERY 24 MONTHS OR 45,000 KM, WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST : "R" (2) FOR EVERY 12 MONTHS OR 20,000 KM, WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST : "R"
5-3
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
F040A03GK-GAT
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE ITEM
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER
1.6 DOHC/2.7 V6
2.0 DOHC CVVT
AIR CLEANER FILTER
SPARK PLUGS
TIMING BELT
BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS
REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS/PADS, PARKING BRAKE
STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE
& BOOTS/LOWER ARM BALL JOINT
DRIVESHAFTS AND BOOTS
MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL
AUTOMATIC
European Community Only
TRANSAXLE FLUID
Except European Community
AIR CONDITIONER FILTER (FOR BLOWER UNIT)
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
R
R R R I I
I
I R
R
R
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
EVERY 7,500 KM OR 6 MONTHS EVERY 5,000 KM OR 6 MONTHS MORE FREQUENTLY MORE FREQUENTLY EVERY 60,000 KM OR 48 MONTHS MORE FREQUENTLY MORE FREQUENTLY
MORE FREQUENTLY
EVERY 15,000 KM OR 12 MONTHS EVERY 100,000 KM EVERY 45,000 KM EVERY 40,000 KM MORE FREQUENTLY
DRIVING CONDITION
A, B, C, F, H
C, E B, H D, E, F, G C, D, G, H C, D, G, H
C, D, E, F
C, D, E, F, G A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J
A, C, E, F, G, H, I
C, E
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS A - Repeated short distance driving B - Extensive idling C - Driving in dusty, rough roads D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very
cold weather E - Driving in sandy areas
5- 4
F - More than 50% driving in heavy city traffic during hot weather above 32°C (90°F)
G - Driving in mountainous areas H - Towing a trailer I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use car or vehicle towing J - Driving over 170 km/h
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
F060A01A-AAT
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
F060M01A-AAT
o Engine Oil and Filter The engine oil and filter should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. If the car is being driven in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter changes are required.
F060B02A-AAT
o Drive Belts Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. Drive belts should be checked periodically for proper tension and adjusted as necessary.
F060C01A-AAT
o Fuel Filter A clogged filter can limit the speed at which the vehicle may be driven, damage the emission system and cause hard starting. If an excessive amount of foreign matter accumulates in the fuel tank, the filter may require replacement more frequently. After installing a new filter, run the engine for several minutes, and check for leaks at the connections. Fuel filters should be installed by trained technicians.
F060D01A-AAT
o Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses and Connections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Have a trained technician replace any damaged or leaking parts immediately.
F060E01A-AAT
o Timing Belt Inspect all parts related to the timing belt for damage and deformation. Replace any damaged parts immediately.
F060G01A-AAT
o Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler cap The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should be inspected at those intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. Make sure that a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly replaced.
F060F01A-AAT
o Vacuum, Crankcase Ventilation Hoses
Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration. Particular attention should be paid to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold.
Inspect the hose routing to assure that the hoses do not come in contact with any heat source, sharp edges or moving component which might cause heat damage or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose connections, such as clamps and couplings, to make sure they are secure, and that no leaks are present. Hoses should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of deterioration or damage.
F060H01A-AAT
o Air Cleaner Filter A Genuine Hyundai air cleaner filter is recommended when the filter is replaced.
F060J01A-AAT
o Spark Plugs Make sure to install new spark plugs of the correct heat range.
F060N02E-GAT
o Valve Clearance Inspect excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. A qualified technician should perform the operation.
F070B01A-GAT
o Cooling System Check the cooling system part, such as radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Replace any damaged parts.
5-5
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
F070C01A-AAT
o Coolant The coolant should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule.
F070D01A-AAT
o Manual Transaxle Oil Inspect the manual transaxle oil according to the maintenance schedule.
NOTE: If the oil level is low, check for possible leaks before adding oil. Do not overfill.
F070E02A-AAT
o Automatic Transaxle Fluid The fluid level should be in the "HOT" range of the dipstick, after the engine and transaxle are at normal operating temperature. Check the automatic transaxle fluid level with the engine running and the transaxle in neutral, with the parking brake properly applied. Use DIAMOND ATF SP-III or SK ATF SP-III when adding or changing fluid.
F070F01A-AAT
o Brake Hoses and Lines Visually check for proper installation, chafing, cracks, deterioration and any leakage. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.
F070G02A-AAT
o Brake Fluid Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir. The level should be between "MIN" and "MAX" marks on the side of the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4.
F070H01A-AAT
o Rear Brake Drums/Linings, Parking Brake
Check the rear brake drums and linings for scoring, burning, leaking fluid, broken parts, and excessive wear. Inspect the parking brake system including the parking brake lever and cables. For detailed service procedures, refer to the Shop Manual.
F070J01A-AAT
o Brake Pads, Calipers and Rotors Check the pads for excessive wear, discs for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage.
F070K01A-AAT
o Exhaust Pipe and Muffler Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and hangers for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Start the engine and listen carefully for any exhaust gas leakage. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.
F070L01A-AAT
o Suspension Mounting Bolts Check the suspension connections for looseness or damage. Retighten to the specified torque.
F070M01A-AAT
o Steering Gear Box, Linkage & Boots/ Lower arm Ball Joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine off, check for excessive free-play in the steering wheel. Check the linkage for bends or damage. Check the dust boots and ball joints for deterioration, cracks, or damage. Replace any damaged parts.
F070N01A-AAT
o Power Steering Pump, Belt and Hoses
Check the power steering pump and hoses for leakage and damage. Replace any damaged or leaking parts immediately. Inspect the power steering belt for evidence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear, oiliness and proper tension. Replace or adjust it if necessary.
F070P01A-AAT
o Driveshafts and Boots Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Replace any damaged parts and, if necessary, repack the grease.
5- 6
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
F070Q01A-AAT
o Air Conditioning Refrigerant Check the air conditioning lines and connections for leakage and damage. Check air conditioning performance according to the relevant shop manual if necessary.
5-7
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
6. DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
G010A01GK-GAT
ENGINE COMPARTMENT (1.6 DOHC)
1
23 4
5
CAUTION: When inspecting or servicing the engine, you should handle tools and other heavy objects carefully so that the plastic rocker cover of the engine is not damaged.
6
67 8
9
10
1. Engine oil filler cap 2. Brake Booster 3. Brake fluid reservoir 4. Clutch fluid reservoir (If installed) 5. Relay box
11 12 13
6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir cap 7. Power steering fluid reservoir 8. Engine coolant reservoir 9. Engine oil level dipstick 10.Radiator cap
HGK238
11.Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick (If installed)
12.Air cleaner 13.Battery
6-1
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
G010A01GK-AAT
ENGINE COMPARTMENT (2.0 DOHC CVVT)
1
23 4
5
CAUTION: When inspecting or servicing the engine, you should handle tools and other heavy objects carefully so that the plastic rocker cover of the engine is not damaged.
67
8
9
10
1. Engine oil filler cap 2. Brake Booster 3. Brake fluid reservoir 4. Clutch fluid reservoir (If installed) 5. Relay box
6-2
11
12 13
6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir cap 7. Power steering fluid reservoir 8. Engine coolant reservoir 9. Engine oil level dipstick 10.Radiator cap
HGK059
11.Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick (If installed)
12.Air cleaner 13. Battery
G010B01GK-GAT
ENGINE COMPARTMENT (2.7 V6)
1
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
23
4
5
CAUTION: When inspecting or servicing the engine, you should handle tools and other heavy objects carefully so that the plastic rocker cover of the engine is not damaged.
6
78
9
1. Power steering fluid reservoir 2. Brake Booster 3. Brake fluid reservoir 4. Air filter element
10
11
12
5. Relay box 6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir cap 7. Engine coolant reservoir 8. Engine oil level dipstick
HGK209
9. Radiator cap 10.Engine oil filler cap 11.Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick
(If installed) 12.Battery
6-3
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
G020A01A-AAT
GENERAL CHECKS Engine Compartment The following should be checked regularly:
o Engine oil level and condition o Transaxle fluid level and condition o Brake fluid level o Clutch fluid level o Engine coolant level o Windshield washer fluid level o Accessory drive belt condition o Engine Coolant hose condition o Fluid leaks (on or below components) o Power steering fluid level o Battery condition o Air filter condition
G020B01A-AAT
Vehicle Exterior The following should be checked monthly:
o Overall appearance and condition o Wheel condition and wheel nut torque o Exhaust system condition o Light condition and operation o Windshield glass condition o Wiper blade condition o Paint condition and body corrosion o Fluid leaks o Door and hood lock condition o Tire pressure and condition (including spare
tire)
6-4
G020C01A-AAT
Vehicle Interior The following should be checked each time when the vehicle is driven:
o Lights operation o Windshield wiper operation o Horn operation o Defroster, heating system operation (and air
conditioning, if installed) o Steering operation and condition o Mirror condition and operation o Turn signal operation o Accelerator pedal operation o Brake operation, including parking brake o Manual transaxle operation, including clutch
operation o Automatic transaxle operation, including
"Park" mechanism operation o Seat control condition and operation o Seat belt condition and operation o Sunvisor operation
If you notice anything that does not operate correctly or appears to be functioning incorrectly, inspect it carefully and seek assistance from your Hyundai dealer if service is needed.
G030A01A-AAT
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL
Engine oil is essential to the performance and service of the engine. It is suggested that you check the oil level at least once a week in normal use and more often if you are on a trip or driving in severe conditions.
G030B02GK-GAT
Recommended Oil 1.6L (DOHC), 2.7 L (V6)
20W-40 20W-50 15W-40 15W-50
10W-30 10W-40 10W-50
5W-40 5W-30
5W-20
°C -25 -15 -10 0 10 20
°F -13
5 -14 32 50 68
40 104 SSA6030B
SH, SG or SG/CD (API) multi-grade and fuel efficient oil is recommended.
2.0 L (DOHC CVVT)
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
G030C01A-AAT
To Check the Oil Level
G030D01A-GAT
Adding Oil
DOHC
V6
DOHC
V6
HGK259
See the lubrication chart on the page 9-3.
NOTE: o The use of a 5W-20 multi grade oil is not
recommended for sustained high speed use. o When replacing or adding the oil, below SAE 10W-30 is recommended. Using a high viscosity oil of SAE 15W-40 and over makes malfunction of CVVT engine when the engine is cool.
HGK210
Before checking the oil, warm up the engine to the normal operating temperature and be sure it is parked on level ground. Turn the engine off. Wait five minutes, then remove the dipstick, wipe it off, fully reinsert the dipstick and withdraw it again. Then note the highest level the oil has reached on the dipstick. It should be between the upper ("FULL") and lower ("LOW") range.
HGK211
If the oil level is close to or below the "L" mark, add oil until it reaches the "F" mark. To add oil:
1. Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise.
2. Add oil, then check the level again. Do not overfill.
3. Replace the cap by turning it clockwise.
The distance between the "F" and "L" marks is equal to about 1 liter of oil.
6-5
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
G350A01A-GAT
ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION Function of Engine Oil Engine oil has the primary function of lubricating and cooling the inside of the engine.
Engine oil consumption It is normal that an engine should consume some engine oil while normal driving. The cause of oil consumption in a normal engine are as follows;
o Engine oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston rings and cylinders.
o A thin film of oil is left on the cylinder wall when a piston moves downwards in the cylinder. High negative pressure generated during engine operation sucks some of the oil into the combustion chamber. This oil with some oil of the cylinder wall is burned by the high temperature combustion gases during the combustion process.
o The engine oil consumption is strongly effected by the viscosity and quality of oil, engine rpm and driving condition etc. More engine oil may be consumed under severe driving conditions such as high speeds, frequent acceleration and deceleration, compared to normal driving condition.
6-6
G040A02GK-GAT
CHANGING THE OIL AND FILTER
DOHC
V6
G040A01GK
The engine oil and filter should be changed at those intervals specified in the maintenance schedule in Section 5. If the car is being driven in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter changes are required.
The procedure for changing the oil and filter is as follows:
1. Park the car on level ground and set the parking brake. Start the engine and let it warm up until the needle on the coolant temperature gauge moves above the lowest mark. Turn the engine off and place the gear selector lever in "P" (automatic) or reverse gear (manual transaxle).
2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil filler cap.
3. Slide underneath the car and loosen the drain plug by turning it counterclockwise with a wrench of the proper size. Be sure that a drain pan is in position to catch the oil as it drains out, then remove the drain plug.
WARNING: Be very careful when draining the engine oil as it may be hot enough to burn you!
4. When the oil has stopped draining, replace the drain plug using a new washer and retighten by turning it clockwise.
Tightening torque: 4.5 ~ 4.0 kgf.m (1.6/2.0L) 4.5 ~ 3.5 kgf.m (2.7L)
5. Remove the oil filter by turning it counterclockwise with a oil filter wrench of the proper size. A certain amount of oil will come out when you remove the filter. So be sure to have your drain pan in place underneath it.
6. Install a new oil filter in accordance with the instructions on the carton or on the filter itself. Do not over-tighten.
Tightening torque: 1.2 ~ 1.6 kgf.m.
Be sure that the mounting surface on the engine is clean and that the old gasket is removed completely. Lubricate the new gasket on the filter with clean engine oil before installation.
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
7. Refill the crankcase with the recommended engine oil. Refer to the specification in chapter 9 for engine oil capacity.
8. Start the engine and check to be sure no oil is leaking from the drain plug or oil filter.
9. Shut off the engine and recheck the oil level.
NOTE: Always dispose of used engine oil in an environmentally acceptable manner. It is suggested that it be placed in a sealed container and taken to a service station for maybe reclaimation. Do not pour the oil on the ground or put it in with the household trash.
WARNING: Used motor oil may cause irritation or cancer of the skin if left in contact with the skin for prolonged periods of time. Wash your hands thoroughly with soap and warm water as soon as possible after handling used oil.
G050A01A-AAT
CHECKING AND CHANGING THE ENGINE COOLANT WARNING: Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. When the engine is hot, the engine coolant is under pressure and may erupt through the opening if the cap is removed. You could be seriously burned if you do not observe this precaution. Do not remove the radiator cap until the radiator is cool to the touch.
G050B01A-AAT
Recommended Engine Coolant
HGK187
Use a high quality ethylene-glycol coolant in a 50/50 mix with water. The engine coolant should be compatible with aluminum engine parts. Additional corrosion inhibitors or additives should not be used. The cooling system must be maintained with the correct concentration and type of engine coolant to prevent freezing and corrosion. Never allow the concentration of antifreeze to exceed the 60% level or go below the 35% level, or damage to the cooling system may result. For proper concentration when adding or replacing the engine coolant, refer to the following table.
Ambient Engine Coolant concentration
temperature Antifreeze
°C ( °F)
solution
Water
-15 (5)
35%
65%
-25 (-13)
40%
60%
-35 (-31)
50%
50%
-45 (-49)
60%
40%
G050C01A-AAT
To Check the Coolant Level
The coolant level can be seen on the side of the plastic coolant reservoir. The level of the coolant should be between the "LOW" and "FULL" lines on the reservoir when the engine is cool. If the level is below the "LOW" mark, add engine coolant to bring it up between "LOW" and "FULL". If the level is low, inspect for coolant leaks and recheck the fluid level frequently. If the level drops again, visit your Hyundai dealer for an inspection and diagnosis of the reason.
6-7
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
G050D02A-AAT
To Change the Engine Coolant The engine coolant should be changed at those intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5.
NOTE: Engine coolant can damage the finish of your car. If you spill engine coolant on the car, wash it off thoroughly with clean water.
1. Park the car on level ground, set the parking brake and remove the radiator cap when cool.
2. Be sure your drain receptacle is in place. Open the drain cock on the radiator. Allow all the engine coolant to drain from the cooling system, then securely close the drain cock.
3. Check Section 9 for the capacity of the cooling system in your car. Then, following the manufacturer's directions on the engine coolant container, add the appropriate quantity of engine coolant to the radiator.
4. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise without pressing down on it, until it stops. This relieves any pressure remaining in the cooling system. And remove the radiator cap by pushing down and turning counterclockwise. Now fill the radiator with clean demineralized or distilled water. Continue to add clean demineralized or distilled water in small quantities until the fluid level stays up in the radiator neck.
6-8
5. Replace the radiator and reservoir caps and check to be sure the drain cocks are fully closed and not leaking.
WARNING: The cooling fan is controlled by engine coolant temperature and may sometimes operate even when the engine is not running. Use extreme caution when working near the blades of the coolant fan so that you are not injured by a rotating fan blade. As the engine coolant temperature decreases, the fan will automatically shut off. This is a normal condition.
G060A02Y-GAT
SPARK PLUGS
DOHC
V6
1.0~1.1 mm (0.039 ~ 0.043 in.) *0.7~0.8 mm (0.028 ~ 0.032 in.) 1.0~1.1 mm (0.039 ~ 0.043 in.) *0.7~0.8 mm (0.028 ~ 0.032 in.)
*: leaded one
YN60100A
Your engine was originally equipped with platinum-tipped spark plugs. (For 2.7L only). Platinum-tipped spark plugs will last longer than conventional type spark plugs and can be identified by blue lines on the ceramic shell.
NOTE: Do not clean or regap platinum-tipped spark plugs.
G060B01GK-GAT
Replacing the Spark Plugs
The spark plugs should be changed at the intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5 or whenever engine performance indicates they should be changed. Symptoms that suggest poor spark plug performance include engine misfiring under load, loss of fuel economy, poor acceleration, etc. When spark plugs are replaced, always use spark plugs recommended by Hyundai. The use of other spark plugs can result in loss of performance, radio interference or engine damage.
NOTE: When replacing the spark plugs, genuine Hyundai replacement parts are recommended.
Recommended Spark Plugs:
Type
Remark
RC10YC4(CHAMPION) BKR5ES-11(NGK)
1.6/2.0L
RC10PYPB4(CHAMPION) 2.7L* PFR5N-11(NGK)
RC10YC(CHAMPION) BKR5ES(NGK)
1.6/2.0L
RC10YC(CHAMPION)
BKR5ES(NGK)
2.7L
* Platinum coated.
Unleaded Leaded
G060C02GK-GAT
Changing the Spark Plugs
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
HGK256
You will find it easier to change spark plugs if the engine is cold. Always change one spark plug at a time. This helps avoid getting the wires mixed up.
1. Remove the engine rocker cover.
NOTE: It is recommended that the spark plugs for 2.7L Engines should be changed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.
2. Using a clean cloth, remove any dirt that has accumulated around the base of the spark plug so it cannot fall into the cylinder when the spark plug is removed.
3. To remove the spark plug cable, pull straight up on the insulated connector, not the cable. Pulling on the cable may damage the carbon core conductor.
HGK257
WARNING: It is recommended that the engine be cool or cold when changing the spark plugs. If the engine is hot, you could burn yourself on the insulated connector, the spark plug or the engine itself.
4. When preparing to remove the old spark plug, guide the socket down over the spark plug, being careful not to damage the ceramic insulator.
5. To remove the old spark plug, turn the wrench handle in a counterclockwise direction.
6. To install the new spark plug, guide the socket down over the spark plug, being careful not to damage the ceramic insulator.
HGK258
NOTE: Spark plugs should be tightened firmly. Overtightening can damage the threads in the aluminum cylinder head. Also, leaving them too loose can cause the spark plug to get very hot and possibly result in damage to the engine. 7. Replace the cable by pushing the insulated
connector directly down onto the electrode. Check to be sure it has snapped into place and can't fall off.
6-9
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
G070A02GK-AAT
CHANGING THE AIR CLEANER FILTER
G080A02A-AAT
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
G090A01A-GAT
FILLING THE WASHER RESERVOIR
HGK213
To change the filter, unsnap the clips around the cover. When this is done, the cover can be lifted off, the old filter removed and the new filter put in its place. Genuine Hyundai Replacement Parts are recommended.
CAUTION: o Operating your vehicle without a proper
air cleaner filter in place can result in excessive engine wear. o Be careful that dust or dirt does not enter the air intake, or damage may result. o When removing the air cleaner filter, be careful that dust or dirt does not enter the air intake. These may result in damage to the air cleaner filter.
HEF119
The wiper blades should be carefully inspected from time to time and cleaned to remove accumulations of road film or other debris. To clean the wiper blades and arms, use a clean sponge or cloth with a mild soap or detergent and water. If the wipers continue to streak or smear the glass, replace them with Genuine Hyundai Replacement Parts or their equivalent.
CAUTION: o Do not operate the wipers on dry glass.
This can result in more rapid wear of the wiper blades and may scratch the glass. o Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline etc.
HGK217
The washer fluid reservoir supplies fluid to the windshield washer system. A good quality washer fluid should be used to fill the washer reservoir. The fluid level should be checked more frequently during inclement weather or whenever the washer system is in more frequent use. The capacity of the washer reservoir is 3.0 liters (3.2 U.S. quarts).
CAUTION: o Radiator antifreeze (engine coolant)
should not be used in the washer system because it will damage the car's finish. o The washer should not be operated if the washer reservoir is empty. This can damage the washer fluid pump.
6-10
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
G100A02GK-GAT
CHECKING THE TRANSAXLE OIL (MANUAL)
Filler plug
Drain plug
G110A01E
Transaxle lubricant in the manual transaxle should be checked at those intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5.
Recommended Oil
Use only HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/90 (API GL-4) in the manual transaxle.
Manual Transaxle Oil Capacity 5 speed : 2.15L (2.27 U.S. quarts) 6 speed : 2.2L (2.32 U.S. quarts)
WARNING: It is always better to check the transaxle oil level when the engine is cool or cold. If the engine is hot, you should exercise great caution to avoid burning yourself on hot engine or exhaust parts.
G100B02A-AAT
To Check the Manual Transaxle Fluid Level
SSA6100B
Park the car on level ground with the engine off. 1. Using a wrench of the correct size, loosen
the oil filler plug by turning it counterclockwise and remove it with your fingers. 2. Use your finger or suitable tool to feel inside the hole. The oil level should be at its bottom edge. If it is not, check for leaks before adding oil. To refill the transaxle or bring the oil level up,add oil slowly until it reaches the proper level. Do not overfill. 3. Replace the plug and washer, screw it in with your fingers and then tighten securely with the wrench.
G110A02A-AAT
CHECKING THE TRANSAXLE FLUID (AUTOMATIC) Transaxle fluid in the automatic transaxle should be checked at those intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5.
NOTE: Basically automatic transaxle fluid is red color. As driving distance increases, the fluid color turns darkish red gradually. It is normal condition and you should not use fluid color as a criterion for replacing the transaxle fluid. You must replace the automatic transaxle fluid in accordance with intervals specified in the vehicle maintenances schedule in section 5.
G110B03A-AAT
Recommended Fluid Your Hyundai automatic transaxle is specially designed to operate with DIAMOND ATF SP-III or SK ATF SP-III. Damage caused by a nonspecified fluid is not covered by your new vehicle limited warranty.
6-11
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
G110C02Y-GAT
Transaxle Fluid Capacity The fluid capacity of the automatic transaxle is 7.8 liters (8.2 U.S. quarts).
WARNING: The transaxle fluid level should be checked when the engine is at normal operating temperature. This means that the engine, radiator, exhaust system etc., are very hot. Exercise great care not to burn yourself during this procedure.
G110D02Y-AAT
To Check the Transaxle Fluid Level
HGK174
Park the car on level ground with the parking brake engaged. When the transaxle fluid level is checked, the transaxle fluid should be at normal operating temperature and the engine idling. 6-12
DOHC
V6
HGK212
While the engine is idling, apply the brakes and move the gear selector lever from "P" to each of its other positions -- "R", "N", "D" -- and then return to "N" or "P". With the engine still idling:
1. Open the hood, being careful to keep hands, long hair and clothing clear of any moving parts.
2. Remove the transaxle dipstick, wipe it clean, reinsert the dipstick as far as it will go, then remove it again. Now check the fluid level on the dipstick. It should be in the "HOT" range on the dipstick.
3. If the transaxle fluid level is low, use a funnel to add transaxle fluid through the dipstick tube until the level reaches the "HOT" range. Do not overfill.
Î
Fluid level should be within this range
Î
HGK249
WARNING: The cooling fan is controlled by engine coolant temperature and may sometimes operate even when the engine is not running. Use extreme caution when working near the blades of the cooling fan, so that you are not injured by a rotating fan blade. As the engine coolant temperature decreases, the fan will automatically shut off. This is a normal condition.
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
G120A01A-AAT
CHECKING THE BRAKES CAUTION: Because brakes are essential to the safe operation of the car, it is suggested that they be checked and inspected by your Hyundai dealer. The brakes should be checked and inspected for wear at those intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5.
G120B01A-AAT
Checking the Brake Fluid Level WARNING: Use caution when handling brake fluid. It can damage your vision if it gets into your eyes. It will also damage your vehicle's paint if spilled on it and not removed immediately.
G120D01A-AAT
To Check the Fluid Level The fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir should be checked periodically. The level should be between the "MIN" and "MAX" marks on the side of the reservoir. If the level is at or below the "MIN" mark, carefully add fluid to bring it up to "MAX". Do not overfill.
G120E02A-AAT
Adding Brake Fluid
To add brake fluid, first wipe away any dirt then unscrew the fluid reservoir cap. Slowly pour the recommended fluid into the reservoir. Do not overfill. Carefully replace the cap on the reservoir and tighten.
G130A01S-AAT
CHECKING THE CLUTCH FLUID (Manual Transaxle) To Check the Clutch Fluid
G120C02A-AAT
Recommended Brake Fluid
Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications in your braking system. Follow the instructions printed on the container.
HGK215
WARNING: Handle brake fluid carefully. It can damage your vision if it gets into your eyes. Use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification fluid from a sealed container. Do not allow the fluid can or reservoir to remain open any longer than required. This will avoid entry of dirt and moisture which can damage the brake system and cause improper operation.
HGK216
The clutch fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing other under hood services. The system should be checked for leakage at the same time. Check to make certain that the clutch fluid level is always between the "MAX" and "MIN" level markings on the fluid reservoir. Fill as required. Fluid loss indicates a leak in the clutch system which should be inspected and repaired immediately. Consult your Hyundai dealer.
6-13
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
G130B02A-AAT
To Replace the Fluid Recommended brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification should be used. The reservoir cap must be fully tightened to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture.
NOTE: Do not allow any other liquids to contaminate the brake fluid. Seal damage will result.
WARNING: Use caution when handling brake fluid. It can damage your vision if you get it in your eyes. It will also damage your vehicle's paint if spilled on it and not removed immediately.
G140A01A-AAT
AIR CONDITIONING CARE Keeping the Condenser Clean The air conditioning condenser (and engine radiator) should be checked periodically for accumulation of dirt, dead insects, leaves, etc. These can interfere with maximum cooling efficiency. When removing such accumulations, brush or hose them away carefully to avoid bending the cooling fans.
G140B01A-AAT
Checking the Air Conditioning Operation 1. Start the engine and let it run at fast idle for
several minutes with the air conditioning set at the maximum cold setting. 2. If the air coming out of the in-dash vents is not cold, have the air conditioning system inspected by your Hyundai dealer.
CAUTION: Running the air conditioning system for extended periods of time with a low refrigerant level may damage the compressor.
G140C01A-AAT
Lubrication To lubricate the compressor and the seals in the system, the air conditioning should be run for at least 10 minutes each week. This is particularly important during cool weather when the air conditioning system is not otherwise in use.
G140D01S-GAT
Checking the Compressor Drive Belt
DOHC
V6
Auto tensioner A/C
8mm (0.315 in.)
TENSION PULLEY
CRANK PULLEY
Eng.pulley
COMP
G140D01GK
When the air conditioning is being used regularly, the compressor drive belt tension should be checked at least once a month. To check the drive belt tension, press down on the belt halfway between the engine crankshaft and compressor pulleys. Pressing with your finger, you should not be able to deflect this belt anymore than 8.0 mm. If you have the instruments to check it with a force of 98N (22 lb.), the deflection should be approx. 8.0 mm (0.315 inches). If the belt is too loose, have it adjusted by your Hyundai dealer.
6-14
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
B760B01GK-GAT
Replacement of air conditioner filter (If installed)
G150A01A-GAT
CHECKING STEERING WHEEL FREEPLAY
HGK250
1. Remove the mounting screws on the downside of the glove box.
HGK251
2. Open the glove box and remove the mounting screws on the upside of the glove box.
3. Remove the filter cover.
HGK253
HGK254
4. Replace the air filter with a new one. 5. Installation is the reverse order of disassem-
bly.
CAUTION: Be sure to install the air filter in the direction of the arrow sign. Otherwise, it may cause noise or deterioration.
30 mm (1.18in.)
HGK218
To check the steering wheel freeplay, stop the car with the wheels pointed straight ahead and gently move the steering wheel back and forth. Use very light finger pressure and be sensitive to changes in resistance that mark the limits of the freeplay. If the freeplay is greater than specified, have it inspected by your Hyundai dealer and adjusted or repaired if necessary.
6-15
G160A01A-GAT
CHECKING CLUTCH PEDAL FREE-PLAY
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
G170A01A-GAT
CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL FREE-PLAY
G180A01A-GAT
CHECKING BRAKE PEDAL CLEARANCE
6 ~ 13 mm (0.24 ~ 0.51 in.)
3 ~ 8 mm (0.12 ~ 0.31 in.)
45.1 mm (1.78 in.)
SSA6160A
With the engine off, press lightly on the clutch pedal until you feel a change in resistance. This is the clutch pedal freeplay. The freeplay should be within the limits specified in the illustration. If it is not, have it inspected by your Hyundai dealer and adjusted or repaired if necessary.
SSA6170A
With the engine off, press down on the brake pedal several times to reduce the vacuum in the brake booster. Then, using your hand, press down slowly on the brake pedal until you feel a change in resistance. This is the brake pedal freeplay. The freeplay should be within the limits specified in the illustration. If it is not, have it inspected by your Hyundai dealer and adjusted or repaired if necessary.
SSA6180A
You need a helper to check the brake pedal clearance. With the engine running, have your helper press down on the brake pedal several times and then hold it down with a force of about 490N (50 kg, 110 lbs). The brake pedal clearance is the distance from the top surface of the brake pedal to the asphalt sheeting under the floor mat. If the brake pedal clearance is not within the limits specified in the illustration, have it inspected by your Hyundai dealer and adjusted or repaired if necessary.
6-16
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
G190A01A-GAT
CHECKING DRIVE BELTS
DOHC
Water Pump Pulley 5.1~6 mm (0.2~0.24 in.)
V6
Power steering Auto tensioner
G200A01A-AAT
CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES Replacing a Fusible Link
G200B02A-AAT
Replacing Accessory Fuse
Bad Good
Generator Pulley Generator
COMP
Crankshaft Pulley
Eng.pulley
G190A01GK
Drive belts should be checked periodically for proper tension and adjusted if necessary. At the same time, belts should be examined for cracks, wear, fraying or other evidence of deterioration and replaced if necessary. Belt routing should also be checked to be sure there is no interference between the belts and other parts of the engine. After a belt is replaced, the new belt should be adjusted again after two or three weeks to eliminate slack resulting from initial stretching after use.
AS60310A
A fusible link will melt if the electrical circuits from the battery are ever overloaded, thus preventing damage to the entire wiring harness. (This could be caused by a short in the system drawing too much current.) If this ever happens, have a Hyundai dealer determine the cause, repair the system and replace the fusible link. The fusible links are located in a relay box for easy inspection.
CAUTION: When replacing a fusible link, never use anything but a new fusible link with the same or lower amperage rating. Never use a piece of wire or a higher-rated fusible link. This could result in serious damage and create a fire hazard.
HGK185
The fuse box for the lights and other electrical accessories will be found low on the dashboard on the driver's side. Inside the box you will find a list showing the circuits protected by each fuse. If any of your car's lights or other electrical accessories stop working, a blown fuse could be the reason. If the fuse has burned out, you will see that the metal strip inside the fuse has burned through. If you suspect a blown fuse, follow this procedure:
1. Turn off the ignition and all other switches. 2. Open the fuse box and examine each fuse.
Remove each fuse by pulling it toward you (a small "fuse puller" tool is contained in the fuse box to simplify this operation). 3. Be sure to check all other fuses even if you find one that appears to have burned out.
6-17
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
AXA6201B
4. Replace the blown fuse by pressing a new fuse of the same rating into place. The fuse should be a snug fit. If it is not, have the fuse clip repaired or replaced by a Hyundai dealer. If you do not have a spare fuse, you may be able to borrow a fuse of the same or lower rating from an accessory you can temporarily get along without (the radio or cigarette lighter, for example). Always remember to replace the borrowed fuse.
Good
Burned out
G200B03Y
CAUTION: A burned-out fuse indicates that there is a problem in the electrical circuit. If you replace a fuse and it blows as soon as the accessory is turned on, the problem is serious and should be referred to a Hyundai dealer for diagnosis and repair. Never replace a fuse with anything except a fuse with the same or a lower amperage rating. A higher capacity fuse could cause damage and create a fire hazard.
NOTE: See page 6-23 for the fuse panel descriptions.
G210A01A-AAT
CHECKING THE BATTERY WARNING: Batteries can be dangerous! When working with batteries, carefully observe the following precautions to avoid serious injuries.
The fluid in the battery contains a strong solution of sulfuric acid, which is poisonous and highly corrosive. Be careful not to spill it on yourself or the car. If you do spill battery fluid on yourself, immediately do the following:
o If battery fluid is on your skin, flush the affected areas with water for at least 15 minutes and then seek medical assistance.
o If battery fluid is in your eyes, rinse out your eyes with water and get medical assistance as soon as possible. While you are being driven to get medical assistance, continue to rinse your eyes by using a sponge or soft cloth saturated with water.
o If you swallow battery fluid, drink a large quantity of water or milk followed by milk of magnesia, eat a raw egg or drink vegetable oil. Get medical assistance as soon as possible.
While batteries are being charged (either by a battery charger or by the vehicle's alternator), they produce explosive gases. Always observe these warnings to prevent injuries from occurring:
6-18
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
o Charge batteries only in a well ventilated area.
o Do not permit flames, sparks or smoking in the area.
o Keep children away from the area.
G210B01A-AAT
Checking the Battery Keep the battery clean. Any evidence of corrosion around the battery posts or terminals should be removed using a solution of household baking soda and warm water. After the battery terminals are dry, cover them with a light coating of grease.
G220A01A-AAT
CHECKING ELECTRIC COOLING FANS WARNING: The cooling fan is controlled by engine coolant temperature and may sometimes operate even when the engine is not running. Use extreme caution when working near the blades of the coolant fan, so that you are not injured by a rotating fan blade. As the coolant temperature decreases the fan will automatically shut off. This is a normal condition.
G220B01A-AAT
Checking Engine Cooling Fan The engine coolant fan should come on automatically if the engine coolant temperature is high.
G220C01A-AAT
Checking Condenser Cooling Fan The condenser coolant fan should come on automatically whenever the air conditioning is in operation.
G230A03A-GAT
POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL
HGK214
The power steering fluid level should be checked regularly. To check the power steering fluid level, be sure the ignition is "OFF", then check to make certain that the power steering fluid level is between the "MAX" and "MIN" level markings on the fluid reservoir. NOTE: Grinding noise from the power steering pump may be heard immediately after the engine is started in extremely cold conditions (below - 20°F). If the noise stops dur-
ing warm up, there is no abnormal function in the system. It is due to a power steering fluid characteristic in extremely cold conditions.
Recommended Fluid Use PSF-3 type fluid
NOTE: Do not start the engine when the power steering oil reservoir is empty.
G240A01A-AAT
POWER STEERING HOSES It is suggested that you check the power steering hose connections for fluid leakage daily. The power steering hoses should be replaced if there is severe surface cracking, pulling, scuffing or worn spots. Deterioration of the hose could cause premature failure.
G250A01A-AAT
FOR MORE INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR HYUNDAI If you desire additional information about maintaining and servicing your Hyundai, you may purchase a factory Shop Manual at your Hyundai dealer's parts department. This is the same manual used by dealership technicians and while it is highly technical it can be useful in obtaining a better understanding of your car and how it works.
6-19
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
G260A02A-AAT
REPLACING LIGHT BULBS Before attempting to replace a headlight bulb, be sure the switch is turned to the "OFF" position. The next paragraph shows how to reach headlight bulbs so they may be changed. Be sure to replace the burned-out bulb with one of the same number and wattage rating.
CAUTION: Keep the lamps out of contact with petroleum products such as oil, gasoline etc.
G270A02A-GAT
HEADLIGHT BULB Replacement instructions:
Turn signal Light
Low Beam
High Beam
HGK225
1. Allow the bulb to cool. Wear eye protection. 2. Always grasp the bulb by its plastic base,
avoid touching the glass.
6-20
3. Disconnect the power cord from the bulb base in the back of the headlight.
4. Remove the dust cover. 5. Push the bulb spring for removing the head-
light bulb. 6. Remove the protective cap from the re-
placement bulb and install the new bulb by matching the plastic base with the headlight hole. Install the dust cover after retightening the bulb spring and reconnect the power cord. 7. Use the protective cap and carton to dispose of the old bulb. 8. Check for proper headlight aim.
WARNING: The halogen bulb contains gas under pressure and if impacted could shatter, resulting in flying fragments. Always wear eye protection when servicing the bulb. Protect the bulb against abrasions or scratches and against liquids when lighted. Turn the bulb on only when installed in a headlight. Replace the headlight if damaged or cracked. Keep the bulb out of the reach of children and dispose of the used bulb with care.
G290A02GK-GAT
HEADLIGHT AIMING ADJUSTMENT Low Beam
Horizontal aiming
Vertical aiming High Beam
G290A01GK
Vertical aiming
Horizontal aiming
G290A02GK
Before performing aiming adjustment, make sure of the following.
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
1. Keep all tires inflated to the correct pressure.
2. Place the vehicle on level ground and press the front bumper & rear bumper down several times. Place vehicle at a distance of 3m (118 in.) from the test wall.
3. See that the vehicle is unloaded (except for full levels of coolant, engine oil and fuel, and spare tire, jack, and tools).
4. Clean the head light lenses and turn on the headlights.
5. Open the hood. 6. Draw the vertical line (through the center of
each headlight beam pattern) and the horizontal line (through the center of each headlight beam pattern) on the aiming screen. And then, draw a parallel line at 30 mm (1.18 in.) under the horizontal line.
7. Adjust each cut-off line of the low beam to the parallel line with a phillips screwdriver VERTICAL AIMING.
8. Adjust each cut-off line of the low beam to each vertical line with a phillips screwdriver - HORIZONTAL AIMING.
G290B01GK-GAT
Adjustment After Headlight Assembly Replacement
30 mm ( 1.18 in.)
Horizontal line
W
Vertical line
"P"
Cut-off line
H
Ground line
L H
G290B02Y
If the vehicle has had front body repair and the headlight assembly has been replaced, the headlight aiming should be checked using an aiming screen as shown in the illustration. Turn on the headlight switch. 1. Adjust headlights so that main axis of light is
parallel to center line of the body and is aligned with point "P" shown in the illustration. 2. Dotted lines in the illustration show the center of headlights.
SPECIFICATION: "H" Horizontal center line of headlights from ground: Low Beam: 679mm (26.7 in.) High Beam: 672mm (26.5 in.)
"W" Distance between each headlight center : Low Beam: 1,202mm (47.3 in.) High Beam: 966mm (38.0 in.)
"L" Distance between the headlights and the wall that the lights are tested against : 3,000 mm (118 in.)
6-21
G280A02GK-GAT
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
11 2
(High) (Low)
7
8
3 45
6
9 10 11 12
13
No.
Part Name
1 Head Light (High/Low)
2 Map Light
3 Front Position Light
4 Front Fog Light (If installed)
5 Front Turn Signal Light
6 Front Door Edge Warning Light
7 Luggage Compartment Light
6-22
Wattage 55/55 10 5 51 21 5 5
No.
Part Name
8
High Mounted Without spoiler
Stop LIght
With spoiler
9
Rear
Turn Signal Light
10 Combination Stop/Tail Light
11
Back-up Light
12 License Plate Light
13 Rear Fog Light (If installed)
HGK035A
Wattage 2.4 (LED) 3.5 (LED)
21 21/5 21
5 21
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
G200C01GK-GAT
FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION Engine Compartment
DESCRIPTION BATT BATT COND RAD ECU IGN ABS 1 ABS 2
BLOWER INJ
SNSR DRL F/FOG ECU HORN,A/CON H/LP (H1) H/LP (LO)
FUSE RATING PROTECTED COMPONENTS
120A
Generator
50A
Generator
30A
Condenser Fan
30A
Radiator Fan
30A
Engine Control, ECM. ATM Control
30A
Ignition, Start Relay
30A
ABS
30A
ABS
30A
Blower
15A
Injector
10A
O2 Sensor, ECM
15A
DRL
15A
Front Fog Light
10A
TCM, ECM
15A
Horn. A/Conditioner
15A
Head Light (High)
15A
Head Light (LOW)
If installed
HGK205-E
NOTE: Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.
6-23
G200D01GK-GAT
Inner Panel
6-24
DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE
HGK204-E
DESCRIPTION FUSERATING PROTECTED COMPONENTS
IG COIL
20A
Ignition Coil, ECM
AMP
20A
AMP. Multi Gauge Unit
B/UP LAMP
10A
B/Up Lamp
A/BAG IND
10A
Air Bag Indicator
A/BAG
15A
Air Bag
HTD MIR
10A
Outside Mirror Defroster
HAZARD
10A
Hazard Warning Light
R/WIPER
15A
Rear Window Wiper
TAIL-RH
10A
Tail Light
F/WIPER
20A
Front Window Wiper
A/C SW
10A
A/Conditioner
RR DEFOG
30A
Rear Window Defroster
STOP
15A
Stop Light
TAIL-LH
10A
Tail Light
A/CON
10A
A/Conditioner
ECU
10A
ECM, Multi Gauge Unit, TCM
CLUSTER
10A
Cluster
ROOM LP
10A
Map Light, Clock, Audio
P/WINDOW
30A
Power Window
T/GATE
15A
Tail Gate Open
IGN
10A
A/Con, A.Q.S Sensor
RR FOG
10A
Rear Fog
C/LIGHT
15A
C/Lighter, Outside Mirror
S/ROOF
15A
Sunroof
S/HTR
20A
Seat Warmer
ABS
10A
ABS. TCS
AUDIO
10A
Audio, Clock
7. EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
blow-by gases being emitted from the crankcase. This system supplies fresh air to the crankcase through the air cleaner. Inside the crankcase, the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases, then passes through the PCV valve into the induction system.
H010D01A-AAT
3. Exhaust Emission Control System
The exhaust emission control system is a highly effective system which controls exhaust emissions while maintaining good vehicle performace.
H010A01A-GAT
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS (If Installed) Your Hyundai is equipped with an emission control system to meet all requirements of the Emission prohibition rules of your province. There are three emission control systems which are as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control system (2) Evaporative emission control system (3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function of the emission control systems, it is recommended that you have your car inspected and maintained by an authorized Hyundai dealer in accordance with the maintenance schedule in this manual.
H010B01F-GAT
1. Crankcase Emission Control System
The positive crankcase ventilation system is employed to prevent air pollution caused by
H010C01F-GAT
2. Evaporative Emission Control Sys-
tem (If Installed) The evaporative emission control system is designed to prevent fuel vapors from escaping into the atmosphere.
Canister While the engine is inoperative, fuel vapors generated inside the fuel tank are absorbed and stored in the canister. When the engine is running, the fuel vapors absorbed in the canister are drawn into the induction system through the purge control solenoid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve The purge control solenoid valve is controlled by the ECM; when the engine coolant temperature is low, and during idling, it closes, so that evaporated fuel is not taken into the engine. After engine warm-up, during ordinary driving, it opens so as to introduce evaporated fuel to the engine.
H020A01A-GAT
CATALYTIC CONVERTER (If Installed)
Catalytic Converter
SSA7020A
7
The catalytic converter is part of the exhaust
emission control system. Its purpose is to re-
move certain engine emission products from
the engine's exhaust. It looks something like a
muffler and is located underneath the car in the
exhaust system.
7-1
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
H020B01A-GAT
About the Catalytic Converter
Exhaust gases passing through the catalytic converter cause it to operate at very high temperatures. As a result, the introduction of large amounts of unburned gasoline may cause it to overheat and create a fire hazard. This can be avoided by observing the following:
o Use unleaded fuel only. o Maintain your engine in good condition. Ex-
tremely high converter temperatures can result from improper operation of the electrical, ignition or fuel injection systems. o If your engine stalls, pings, knocks, or is hard to start, take your car to your Hyundai dealer as soon as possible and have the difficulty corrected. o Avoid driving with a very low fuel level. If your run out of gasoline, it could cause the engine to misfire and result in excessive loading of the catalytic converter. o Avoid idling the engine for periods longer than 10 minutes. o Your Hyundai should not be either pushed or pulled to get it started. This can cause the catalytic converter to overload. o Take care not to stop your Hyundai over any combustible material such as grass, paper, leaves or rags. As these materials could come in contact with the catalytic converter and could cause a fire.
o Do not touch the catalytic converter or any other part of the exhaust system while the engine is running as it is very hot and could result in burns.
o Remember that your Hyundai dealer is your best source of assistance.
7-2
8. CONSUMER INFORMATION
I010A01A-GAT
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
CONSUMER INFORMATION
I010B01A-AAT
Engine Number
DOHC
V6
I030A02GK-AAT
RECOMMENDED INFLATION PRESSURES
HGK220
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the number used in registering your car and in all legal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc. It can be found on the identification plate attached to the engine side of the firewall between the engine and passenger compartment.
I010B01GK
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown in the drawing.
I020A01A-AAT
TIRE INFORMATION The tires supplied on your new Hyundai are chosen to provide the best performance for normal driving.
HGK092
The tire label located on the driver side center pillar outer panel gives the tire pressures recommended for your vehicle.
PRESSURE, kPa (PSI)
RIM SIZE
TIRE SIZE
UP TO 2 PERSONS
UP TO MAX. LOAD
FRONT REAR FRONT REAR
6.0Jx15 195/65R15 210(30) 210(30) 210(30) 210(30) 6.5Jx16 205/55R16 210(30) 210(30) 230(33) 230(33)
8
7.0Jx17 215/45R17 220(32) 210(30) 240(35) 230(33)
4Tx16 T125/70R16 420(60) 420(60) 420(60) 420(60)
These pressures were chosen to provide the most satisfactory combination of ride comfort, tire wear and stability under normal conditions. Tire pressures should be checked at least monthly. Proper tire inflation pressures should be maintained for these reasons:
8-1
o Lower-than-recommended tire pressures cause uneven tread wear and poor handling.
o Higher-than-recommended tire pressures increase the chance of damage from impacts and cause uneven tread wear.
CAUTION: Always observe the following:
o Check pressures when the tires are cold. That is, after the car has been parked for at least three hours and hasn't been driven more than 1.6 km or one mile since starting up.
o Check the pressure of your spare tire each time you check the pressure of other tires.
I040A01S-GAT
SNOW TIRES If you equip your car with snow tires, they should be the same size and have the same load capacity as the original tires. Snow tires should be installed on all four wheels; otherwise, poor handling may result. Snow tires should carry 28 kPa (4 psi) more air pressure than the pressure recommended for the standard tires on the tire label on the drive side center pillar outer panel, or up to the maximum pressure shown on the tire sidewall whichever is less. Do not drive faster than 120 km/h (75 mph) when your car is equipped with snow tires.
8-2
CONSUMER INFORMATION
I050A02GK-GAT
TIRE CHAINS
Tire chains, if necessary, should be installed on the front wheels. Be sure that the chains are installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Refer to the following information.
Tire size 195/65 R 15 205/55 R 16 215/45 R 17
Snow Chain Thickness Max. 15 mm Max. 10 mm Max. 10 mm
To minimize tire and chain wear, do not continue to use tire chains when they are no longer needed.
WARNING: o When driving on roads covered with snow
or ice, drive at less than 30 km/h (20 mph). o Use tire chains less than 10mm (0.39 in.) for 16" and 17" tires. o Avoid sudden stop and turns. o Tighten firmly to avoid contact with the verticle body, if you have noise caused by chaws contacting the body, remove the chains for damage protection.
I060A02GK-GAT
TIRE ROTATION
15", 16" Tire
17" Tire
I060A01GK
Tires should be rotated every 10,000 km (6,000 miles). If you notice that tires are wearing unevenly between rotations, have the car checked by a Hyundai dealer so the cause may be corrected. After rotating, adjust the tire pressures and be sure to check wheel nut torque.
WARNING: Do not mix bias-ply and radial-ply tires under any circumstances. This may cause dangerous handling characteristics.
Sidewall
Tire rotation direction
I060A02GK
WARNING: When rotating the 215/45 R17 tires, the tires must be mounted following the "ROTATION" direction marked on the sidewall of the tires. If rotating the tires from the left side to the right side and from the right side to the left side, separate the wheel from the tire and then remount them.
I070A01A-AAT
TIRE BALANCING A tire that is out of balance may affect handling and tire wear. The tires on your Hyundai were balanced before the car was delivered but may need balancing again during the years you own the car. Whenever a tire is dismounted for repair, it should be rebalanced before being reinstalled on the car.
CONSUMER INFORMATION
I080A01A-AAT
TIRE TRACTION Tire traction can be reduced if you drive on worn tires, tires that are improperly inflated or on slippery road surfaces. Tires should be replaced when tread wear indicators appear. To reduce the possibility of losing control, slow down whenever there is rain, snow or ice on the road.
I090A01S-GAT
WHEN TO REPLACE TIRES 1.6 mm (0.06 in.)
Wear indicator
HGK248
The original tires on your car have tread wear indicators. The tread wear indicators appear when the tread depth is 1.6 mm (0.06 in.). The tire should be replaced when these appear as a solid bar across two or more grooves of the tread. Always replace your tires with those of the recommended size. If you change wheels, the new wheel's rim width and offset must meet Hyundai specification.
WARNING: o Driving on worn-out tires is dangerous!
Worn-out tires can cause loss of braking effectiveness, steering control and traction. When replacing tires, never mix radial and bias-ply tires on the same car. If you replace radial tires with bias-ply tires, they must be installed in sets of four. o Using tires and wheels of other than the recommended sizes may cause unusual handling characteristics that may cause death, serious injury or property damage.
I100A01FC-GAT
SPARE TIRE AND TOOLS
HGK189
Your Hyundai is delivered with the following: Spare tire and wheel Wheel nut wrench, Wrench bar, Spanner, Driver Jack
8-3
VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
9. VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
J030A01GK-GAT
TIRE
J010A01GK-GAT
MEASUREMENT
Overall length
Overall width
Overall height (unladen)
Wheel base
Wheel tread
Front Rear
mm (in.)
4395(173) 1760(69.3) 1330(52.4) 2530(99.6) 1490(58.7) 1490(58.7)
Standard Option
J035A01GK-GAT
SPARE TIRE Standard
J040A02GK-GAT
ELECTRICAL
195/65 R15 205/55 R16, 215/45 R17
T125/70 R16 (Temporary)
J020A01GK-GAT
POWER STEERING
Type Wheel free play Rack stroke Oil pump type
Rack and pinion 0 ~ 30 mm (0 ~ 1.18 in.) 132 mm (5.20 in.) Vane type
J060A01F-AAT
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel tank capacity
Liter
US.gal
Imp.gal
55
14.5
12
Item Battery Alternator
1.6L MF 60AH
90A
2.0L MF 68AH
90A
2.7L MF 68AH
95A
J050A01GK-GAT
BRAKE
Type
Dual hydraulic with brake booster
Front brake type
Ventilated disc
Rear brake type
Solid disc
9
Parking brake
Cable
9-1
VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
J070A03GK-GAT
ENGINE
ITEMS
Engine Type
Bore x Stroke
Displacement (cc)
Firing order
Valve clearance
For Intake
(Cold Engine 20 ± 5°C) adjusting Exhaust
For Intake
checking Exhaust
Spark plug
NGK Unleaded
CHAMPION
Leaded
NGK CHAMPION
Spark plug gap
Unleaded Leaded
Idle speed (RPM)
Ignition timing (Base)
1.6 L
76.5 x 87 1,599
1 - 3 - 4 - 2
AUTO LASH
BKR5ES-11 RC10YC4 BKR5ES RC10YC
700 ± 100 BTDC 5° ± 5°
SPECIFICATION 2.0 L
4-Cyl., In-line DOHC 82 x 93.5 1,975 1 - 3 - 4 - 2
0.17 ~ 0.23 mm (0.0067 ~ 0.0091 in.) 0.25 ~ 0.31 mm (0.0098 ~ 0.0122 in.) 0.12 ~ 0.28 mm (0.0047 ~ 0.011 in.)
0.2 ~ 0.38 mm (0.0079 ~ 0.015 in.)
1.0 ~ 1.1 mm (0.039 ~ 0.043 in.) 0.7 ~ 0.8 mm (0.028 ~ 0.032 in.)
700 ± 100 BTDC 8° ± 5°
2.7 L 2.7 6 Cylinder V6 DOHC
86.7 x 75 2,656
1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6
AUTO LASH
PFR5N-11 RC10PYPB4
750 ± 100 BTDC 12° ± 10°
9-2
VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
J080A03GK-GAT
LUBRICATION CHART
Item Engine Oil
Engine Oil Consumption Transaxle Manual
Auto Power Steering Brake Fluid
Oil & Grease Standard
1.6L / 2.7L API SG or SAE 20W-40, 20W-50 (ABOVE -10°C)
ABOVE
SAE 15W-40, 15W-50 (ABOVE -15°C)
SAE 10W-30 (-25°C ~ 40°C)
SAE 10W-40, 10W-50 (ABOVE -25°C)
SAE 5W-20 *1, *2 (BELOW -10°C)
SAE 5W-30 *1 (BELOW 10°C)
SAE 5W-40 *1 (BELOW 20°C)
2.0L
API SH or SAE 15W- 40 (ABOVE -10°C)
ABOVE, SAE 10W-30 (-25°C ~ 40°C)
ILSAC GF-1 SAE 10W-40 (ABOVE -25°C)
or ABOVE SAE 5W-20 (BELOW -10°C) *1, *2
SAE 5W-30 (BELOW 10°C) *1
SAE 5W-40 (BELOW 20°C) *1
*1. Restricted to driving condition and vehicle destination
*2. Not recommended for sustained high speed vehicle operation
Normal driving condition
Severe driving condition
HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/90 (API GL-4)
DIAMOND ATF SP-III or SK ATF SP-III
PSF-3
DOT 3 or DOT 4 equivalent
Coolant
Ethylene glycol base for aluminium radiator
Q'ty (liter) (us.qts., Imp.qts.) Engine Oil: 1.6 L : 3.3 (3.5, 2.9) 2.0 L : 3.85 (4.07, 3.39) 2.7 L : 4.5 (4.76, 4.0)
Oil Pan: 1.6 L : 3.0 (3.17, 2.64) (MAX)
2.0 (2.11, 1.76) (MIN) 2.0 L : 3.55 (3.75, 3.12) (MAX)
2.6 (2.75, 3.3) (MIN) 2.7 L : 4.2 (4.44, 3.7) (MAX)
3.4 (3.59, 3) (MIN)
Oil Filter : 0.3 (0.32, 0.26)
MAX. 1L / 1500 Km MAX. 1L / 1000 Km 5 speed:2.15(2.27, 1.86) 6 speed:2.2(2.32, 1.94) 7.8 (8.2, 6.9) As required As required 1.6L/2.0L : 7.0 (7.4, 6.2) 2.7L : 8.0 (8.5, 7.0)
9-3
INDEX
ZK000A1-G
10. INDEX
A Air bag .................................................................................... 1-20 ~ 1-24 Air cleaner filter ................................................................................. 6-10 Air Conditioning
Care .............................................................................................. 6-14 Operation ...................................................................................... 6-14 Switch ........................................................................................... 1-55 Air filter .............................................................................................. 1-62 Antenna ............................................................................................. 1-87 Ashtray .............................................................................................. 1-37 Audio Fault Code .............................................................................. 1-79 Automatic Transaxle ........................................................................... 2-6
B Battery ...................................................................................... 2-11, 6-18 Brake
Anti-lock system ............................................................................. 2-9 Checking the brakes .................................................................... 6-13 Fluid .............................................................................................. 6-13 Pedal clearance ............................................................................ 6-16 Pedal free play ............................................................................. 6-16 Practices ......................................................................................... 2-8 Breaking-In your new Hyundai ........................................................... 1-1
C Care of Cassette tapes .......................................................... 1-85 ~ 1-86 Care of Disk ...................................................................................... 1-85 Cassette Tape Player Operation (H250) .......................................... 1-68
Catalytic Converter .................................................................... 7-1 ~ 7-2 CD Auto changer (H250, H260) .............................................. 1-70, 1-77 Child Restraint system ........................................................... 1-14 ~ 1-19 Child Seat Restraint Suitability For Seat Position ............................ 1-18 Cigarette Lighter ................................................................................ 1-37 Clock ................................................................................................ 1-36 Clutch
Checking fluid ............................................................................... 6-13 Pedal free play ............................................................................. 6-16 Combination Light Daytime running lights .................................................................. 1-34 Headlight flasher ........................................................................... 1-34 Headlight switch ........................................................................... 1-33 High-beam switch ......................................................................... 1-34 Lane change signal ...................................................................... 1-33 Turn signal operation .................................................................... 1-33 Compact Disk Player Operation (H260) ........................................... 1-75 Cooling Fans ..................................................................................... 6-19 Corrosion Protection Cleaning the interior ....................................................................... 4-3 Protecting your Hyundai from corrosion ......................................... 4-1 Washing and waxing ...................................................................... 4-2 Cruise Control ................................................................................... 1-47
D
Defrosting/Defogging ......................................................................... 1-54 Door
Central door lock ............................................................................ 1-5 Door locks ...................................................................................... 1-3
Locking and unlocking front door with a key ................................. 1-4 10
Drink Holder ...................................................................................... 1-38 Drive Belts ........................................................................................ 6-17
10-1
INDEX
Driving Economical driving ....................................................................... 2-11 Smooth cornering ......................................................................... 2-11 Winter driving ................................................................................ 2-11
E
Emissions Control Systems ................................................................ 7-1 Engine
Before starting the engine .............................................................. 2-2 Changing the oil and filter .............................................................. 6-6 Compartment .................................................................................. 6-1 Coolant ........................................................................................... 6-7 Coolant temperature gauge .......................................................... 1-29 If the engine overheats ................................................................... 3-2 Number ........................................................................................... 8-1 Oil .................................................................................................. 6-4 Oil consumption .............................................................................. 6-6 Starting ........................................................................................... 2-3 Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous ................................................... 2-1
F
Fog Light ........................................................................................... 1-43 Front Seats
Adjustable front seats ..................................................................... 1-8 Adjustable headrests ...................................................................... 1-8 Adjusting seat forward and rearward ............................................. 1-8 Adjusting seatback angle ............................................................... 1-8 Lumbar support control .................................................................. 1-9 Seat cushion height adjustment ..................................................... 1-9 Seat warmer ................................................................................... 1-9 Fuel Capacity .......................................................................................... 9-1 Gauge ........................................................................................... 1-28 Recommendations .......................................................................... 1-1
Fuel Filler Lid Remote release ............................................................................ 1-45
Fuse Panel Description .......................................................... 6-23 ~ 6-24 Fuses ................................................................................................ 6-17
G General Everyday Checks .................................................................. 6-4 Glove box .......................................................................................... 1-41
H Hazard Warning System ................................................................... 1-36 Headlight Bulb ................................................................................... 6-20 Headlight Leveling Device System ................................................... 1-38 Heating and Cooling Control
Rotary type ........................................................................ 1-51 ~ 1-56 Automatic type ................................................................... 1-57 ~ 1-62 High-mounted rear stoplight .............................................................. 1-44 Hood Release ................................................................................... 1-44 Horn ................................................................................................ 1-47
I Ignition Switch ..................................................................................... 2-2 Immobilizer System ............................................................................. 1-2 Infinity Sound System (B260) ........................................................... 1-80
Anti-Theft Device .......................................................................... 1-81 General operation ......................................................................... 1-81 Radio operation ............................................................................ 1-82 CD operation ................................................................................ 1-83 Instrument Cluster and Indicator ....................................................... 1-26 Instrument Panel Light Control (Rheostat) ....................................... 1-37 Instruments and Controls .................................................................. 1-25 Intermittent Wiper .............................................................................. 1-35
10-2
INDEX
J Jump Starting ...................................................................................... 3-1
K Keys .................................................................................................. 1-2
If you lose your keys .................................................................... 3-10 Positions ......................................................................................... 2-2
L Light Bulb Replacement .................................................................... 6-20 Lubrication Chart ................................................................................. 9-3 Luggage Net ...................................................................................... 1-47
M Maintenance Intervals
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ....................... 5-5 ~ 5-7 Maintenance under severe usage conditions ................................. 5-4 Scheduled maintenance ................................................................. 5-2 Service requirements ...................................................................... 5-1 Map Light .......................................................................................... 1-40 Mirros Day-night inside rearview ............................................................. 1-42 Outside rearview folding ............................................................... 1-42 Outsde rearview heating .............................................................. 1-41 Multi gauge ........................................................................................ 1-32
O Odometer .......................................................................................... 1-30
P Parking Brake ................................................................................... 1-43 Power Steering Fluid Level ............................................................... 6-19
R
Rear Seats Before Folding the Rear Seats ..................................................... 1-10 Fold down ..................................................................................... 1-10 Rear seat entry ............................................................................. 1-10 Rear Seat Positions ....................................................................... 1-9
Rear Window Defroster Switch ......................................................... 1-36 Rear Window Wiper and Switch ....................................................... 1-35
S
Seat Belts 3-Point type .................................................................................. 1-13 Adjustable height .......................................................................... 1-13 Adjusting your seat belt ................................................................ 1-13 Care of seat belts ......................................................................... 1-12 Precautions ................................................................................... 1-11 Pre-tentioner Seat Belt ................................................................. 1-18
Spark Plugs ........................................................................................ 6-8 Spectacle Case ................................................................................. 1-40 Speedometer ..................................................................................... 1-30 Starting Procedures ............................................................................ 2-3 Steering Wheel
Free play ...................................................................................... 6-15 Tilt lever ........................................................................................ 1-47 Stereo Radio Operation (H250, H260) .................................... 1-65, 1-72 Stereo Sound System ............................................................ 1-63 ~ 1-64 Sun Visor .......................................................................................... 1-46 Sunroof .............................................................................................. 1-38
T
Tachometer ....................................................................................... 1-30 Tail Gate ........................................................................................... 1-45 TCS (Traction control system) .......................................................... 2-10 Theft Alarm System ............................................................................ 1-5
10-3
INDEX
Tires Balancing ........................................................................................ 8-3 Chains ............................................................................................ 8-2 Changing a flat tire ......................................................................... 3-4 If you have a flat tire ...................................................................... 3-4 Information ...................................................................................... 8-1 Pressure ......................................................................................... 8-1 Replacement ................................................................................... 8-3 Rotation .......................................................................................... 8-2 Snow tires ....................................................................................... 8-2 Spare tire ........................................................................................ 3-3 Traction ........................................................................................... 8-3
Towing Emergency ..................................................................................... 3-9 If your car must be towed .............................................................. 3-8 Trailer or vehicle towing ............................................................... 2-13
Transaxle Automatic ........................................................................................ 2-6 Automatic transaxle fluid checking ............................................... 6-11 Manual ............................................................................................ 2-4 Manual transaxle oil checking ...................................................... 6-11
Trip Computer ................................................................................... 1-31 Trip Odometer ................................................................................... 1-30
V
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................................................... 8-1 Vehicle Specification ........................................................................... 9-1 Ventilation
Center ventilator ........................................................................... 1-50 Side ventilator ............................................................................... 1-50
W
Washer fluid ...................................................................................... 6-10 Warning Lights ....................................................................... 1-28 ~ 1-29 Windows Glass ................................................................................... 1-7 Windshield Wiper and Washer ......................................................... 1-34 Windshield Wiper Blades .................................................................. 6-10
10-4
A100A01L-EAT
GUIDE TO HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS 1.What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?
Hyundai Genuine Parts are the same parts used by Hyundai Motor Company to manufacture vehicles. They are designed and tested for the optimum safety, performance, and reliability to our customers.
2.Why should you use genuine parts? Hyundai Genuine Parts are engineered and built to meet rigid original manufacturing requirements. Using imitation, counterfeit or used salvage parts is not covered under the Hyundai New
Vehicle Limited Warranty or any other Hyundai warranty. In addition, any damage to or failure of Genuine Hyundai Parts caused by the installation or failure of an imitation, counterfeit or used salvage part is not covered by Hyundai Motor Company.
3. How can you tell if you are purchasing Hyundai Genuine Parts?
Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts Logo on the package (see below).
The export specifications are written in English only.
Hyundai Genuine Parts are only sold through authorized Hyundai Dealerships.
A100A03L
A100A01L
A100A02L
A100A04L
SA060A1-E
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1. CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT .......................................................................... 1-1
1
2. DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI ................................................................................. 2-1
2
3. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ................................................................................ 3-1
3
4. APPEARANCE CARE ......................................................................................... 4-1
4
5. VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS .................................................... 5-1
5
6. OWNER MAINTENANCE .................................................................................... 6-1
6
7. EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM ......................................................................... 7-1
7
8. CONSUMER INFORMATION .............................................................................. 8-1
8
9. VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS .............................................................................. 9-1
9
10. INDEX .............................................................................................................. 10-1
10
A090A01A-AAT
SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING
This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE. These titles indicate the following:
WARNING: This indicates that a condition may result in harm or injury to you or other persons if the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.
CAUTION: This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the caution is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.
NOTE: This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.
SA040A1-E
CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO ORIGINAL VEHICLE SPECIFICATION
Modification to the original vehicle specification may invalidate the manufacturers warranty and may adversely affect the safety and durability of the vehicle. Components which are subject to modification or are added to the original vehicle specification without the express approval of the manufacturer and result in consequential loss or damage are not covered by the vehicle manufacturers warranty.
SA050A1-E
TWO WAY RADIO INSTALLATION
This vehicle is fitted with electronically controlled fuel injection or other micro processor controlled equipment. It is possible for incorrectly installed two way radio equipment including mobile telephones to adversely affect these systems. Before radio equipment of this kind is installed, please contact your Hyundai dealer for recommendation regarding the suitability of the particular radio equipment concerned and the recommended method of installation and equipment location. Incorrectly installed or unsuitable equipment which gives rise to incorrect functioning of or damage to electronic vehicle components will not fall within the scope of the vehicle manufacturers warranty.
SA030A1-E
FOREWORD
Hyundai Motor Company wish to take this opportunity to thank you for purchasing a Hyundai product and to welcome you to the ever increasing number of discriminating motorists who drive Hyundai vehicles. The advanced engineering and construction methods employed during both design and production of the Hyundai marque are something of which we are proud, and this commitment to providing a high quality product is supported by a comprehensive after sales and warranty service of which we are equally proud.
This owners manual will introduce the operating and maintenance requirements for the vehicle and it is recommended that it is carefully read to ensure that the maximum performance and durability along with safe and satisfactory operation are obtained. The recommended routine maintenance servicing along with any running repairs that may be required should be entrusted to a franchised Hyundai dealer to ensure that only the latest methods and genuine Hyundai replacement parts are used for the continued reliability, safety and performance of the vehicle.
Should any question or query exist regarding any aspect of your Hyundai please contact the nearest Hyundai dealer who will be only too pleased to assist wherever possible.
Note: This owners manual should be considered as part of the vehicle and should be kept in the vehicle at all times for ease of reference.
In the event of the vehicle being sold please ensure that this manual is left in the vehicle for the reference of the new owner.
CAUTION: Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do not meet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifications listed on Page 9-3 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.
Copyright 2003 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai Motor Company.
A090A01A-AAT
Responsibilty For Maintenance
It is the responsibility of the vehicle owner/driver to ensure that all routine maintenance services are undertaken in line with the recommendations specified in Section 5 of this manual. In addition, in order to ensure continued validity of the new vehicle warranty and safe operation of the vehicle, non scheduled maintenance/running repairs should be undertaken at the earliest available opportunity. Under severe operating conditions, more frequent maintenance is required. Details of the maintenance schedule for such conditions are also given in section 5. It is recommended that all maintenance operations and repairs are entrusted to a franchised Hyundai dealer to ensure that the latest repair methods, specialized tooling and genuine Hyundai parts are used to ensure the continued reliability and safety of the vehicle.
HGK037-D
SA010A1-E
OWNER'S MANUAL Operation Maintenance Specifications
The information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However, the right to amend specifications without notice or obligation to incorporate such amendments into vehicles already produced is reserved.
This manual applies to all markets and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, some of the equipment operating descriptions referred to may not apply to the particular vehicle with which this manual is supplied.
Please refer to the nearest franchised Hyundai dealer for information regarding current standard and optional equipment levels.
A000A01A-EAT
This Owners Manual should be considered a part of the car and remain with it when it is sold for the use of the next owner.
ORIGINAL: ADDRESS:
DATE OF SALE: SUBSEQUENT: ADDRESS:
TRANSFER DATE:
NAME: STREET: TOWN: COUNTY: P.CODE:
OWNER I.D.
NAME: STREET: TOWN: COUNTY: P.CODE:
1. CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
B010A01A-EAT
FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS THIS VEHICLE MUST ONLY BE OPERATED WITH UNLEADED FUEL. SERIOUS DAMAGE WILL RESULT FROM THE USE OF LEADED FUEL.
UNLEADED FUEL ONLY
B010A02GK
Unleaded fuel with a Reasearch Octane Number (RON) of 91 or higher must be used in this vehicle. To prevent accidental charging of the fuel tank with leaded fuel, a small diameter filler neck along with a restrictor flap are fitted to ensure that only unleaded fuel pump nozzles may enter the filler neck. However, care must be exercised when refuelling the vehicle tank from jerry cans or by means of a funnel that the fuel being used is unleaded.
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
The use of leaded fuel in this vehicle will result in irreversible pollution of the catalyst element. Such pollution will prevent correct operation of the catalyst and give rise to increased operating temperatures leading to the catalyst element melting and restricting the exhaust flow along with an increase in exhaust emission levels.
CAUTION: The vehicle warranty will not extend to damage arising from the use of incorrect fuels.
Overseas Operation: When the vehicle is to be operated overseas, the vehicle operator should establish that a suitable fuel for satisfactory operation of the vehicle is available.
B010E01A-EAT
PETROLS FOR CLEANER AIR To help contribute to cleaner air, Hyundai recommends that you use petrols treated with detergent additives, which help to prevent deposit formation in the engine. These petrols will help the engines run cleaner and the Emission Control System performance.
B020A01S-EAT
RUNNING IN
The longevity and performance of the vehicle are
greatly affected by the care exercised during the
first 1,000 miles of motoring. Because of modern
manufacturing techniques, rigid guidelines re-
garding maximum road speeds have become unnecessary. However, certain precautions
1
should be observed in order to obtain the best
possible performance and useful life from the
vehicle.
1) Do not race the engine without a load (i.e
revving the engine in neutral).
2) During the first 500 miles the maximum en-
gine speed should be restricted to 3,000 rpm
and gradually increased thereafter.
3) Avoid prolonged constant speed operation.
The internal components of the engine will
become more quickly run in if the operation
speed is varied during the running in period.
4) Never allow the engine to labour. Use the
gearbox freely and avoid large throttle open-
ings when the engine speed is below 1,500
rpm.
5) Avoid rapid acceleration and maximum
throttle openings.
6) Avoid harsh braking during the first 100
miles of urban motoring or 1,000 miles of
motorway driving to allow the friction facings
of the brake pads and shoes to bed against
the discs and drums properly.
7) No trailer towing should be undertaken dur-
ing the running in period.
1- 1
B880A01A-GAT
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM The immobiliser system is an anti-theft device, designed to deter automobile theft.
B880B03A-GAT
Keys
AX10020A-1
All of the locks fitted to the vehicle are operated by the same key. However, since it is possible to lock the doors without the use of the key, care should be exercised to ensure that the key does not become locked inside the vehicle by mistake. NOTE: If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to cancel the system or start the engine.
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
B880C02A-GAT
Key Numbers
AX10030A-1
The vehicle key number is recorded upon a metal tag attached to the keys when the vehicle is first delivered to you. The key number should be recorded and kept in a safe place in case the need to order further keys arises. New keys are available from any Hyundai dealer by quoting the relevant key number. In the interest of security, the metal tag attached to the keys which bears the key number should be removed from the key ring after you receive your new vehicle. In addition, key numbers cannot be provided by Hyundai for security reasons. If you need additional keys or if you should lose your keys, your authorized Hyundai dealer can make new keys.
B040A02Y-EAT
DOOR LOCKS WARNING: o Unlocked doors can be dangerous. Before
you drive away (especially if there are children in the car), be sure that all the doors are securely closed and locked so that the doors cannot be inadvertently opened from the inside. This helps ensure that doors will not be opened accidentally. Also, when combined with the proper use of seat belts, locking the doors helps keep occupants from being ejected from the car in case of an accident. o Before opening the door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic. o In case of accident the door is unlocked automatically (Not all models).
1- 2
B040B01A-AAT
Locking and unlocking front doors with a key
UNLOCK
LOCK
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
B040C01S-AAT
Locking From the Outside
B040D01S-AAT
Locking From the Inside
UNLOCK
LOCK
HGK101-D
o The door can be locked or unlocked with a key. o Lock the door by turning the key toward the
front of the vehicle and unlock it by turning the key toward the rear.
HGK099-D
The doors can be locked without a key. To lock the doors, first push the inside lock switch to the "LOCK" position so that the red mark on the switch is not visible, then close the door.
NOTE: o When locking the door this way, be careful
not to lock the door with the ignition key left in the vehicle. o To protect against theft, always remove the ignition key, close all windows, and lock all doors when leaving your vehicle unattended.
HGK208-D
To lock the doors from the inside, simply close the door and push the lock switch to the "LOCK" position. When this is done, neither the outside nor the inside door handle can be used.
NOTE: When the door is locked, the red mark on the switch is not visible.
1- 3
B040G01GK-GAT
Central Door Lock
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
B070A01A-AAT
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (Not all models) This system is designed to provide protection from unauthorized entry into the car. This system is operated in three stages: the first is the "Armed" stage, the second is the "Alarm" stage, and the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered, the system provides an audible alarm with blinking of the turn signal light.
3) Once the system is armed, only the hatchback door may be unlocked using the key without disarming the system.
CAUTION: Do not arm the system until all passengers have left the car. If the system is armed while a passenger(s) remains in the car, the alarm may be activated when the remaining passenger(s) leaves the car.
HGK099-D
The central door locking is operated by pushing the driver's door lock switch toward the front or rear of the vehicle. If the passenger door is open when the switch is pushed, the door will remain locked when closed.
NOTE: o When pushing the switch toward the rear,
all doors will unlock. When pushing the switch toward the front, all doors will lock. o When the door is unlocked, the red mark on the switch is visible. o The central door locking is operated by turning the key (driver's door only) toward the front or rear of the vehicle.
1- 4
B070B02GK-EAT
Armed Stage Park the car and stop the engine. Arm the system as described below.
1) Remove the ignition key from the ignition switch.
2) Make sure that the engine bonnet and hatchback door are closed.
3) Lock the doors using the transmitter of the keyless entry system.
After completion of the steps above, the turn signal lamp will blink once to indicate that the system is armed.
NOTE: 1) If any door, hatchback door or engine
bonnet remains open, the system will not be armed. 2) If this happens, rearm the system as described above.
B070C01GK-EAT
Alarm Stage The alarm will be activated if any of the following occur while the car is parked and the system is armed.
1) A front door is unlocked and opened without using the transmitter.
2) The hatchback door is opened without using the key.
3) The engine bonnet is opened.
The siren will sound and the turn signal lamp will blink continuously for 30 seconds. To turn off the system, unlock the door with the transmitter.
CAUTION: Avoid trying to start the engine while the system is armed.
B070D03GK-AAT
Disarmed Stage
HGK102-D
The system will be disarmed when either of the following steps are taken: 1) The driver's or passenger's door is unlocked
by depressing the "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter. 2) In the middle of alarming or after alarming, it disarms after 30 seconds if the key is turned to and kept in the "ON" position. 3) If after disarming the system with the transmitter the doors are not opened within 30 seconds, the system will automatically rearm. After completing one of steps above, the turn signal lamp will blink twice to indicate that the system is disarmed.
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
B070F01A-GAT
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM (If installed) Locking doors 1. Close all doors. 2. Push the "LOCK" button on the transmitter. 3. At the same time all doors lock, the turn signal
lights will blink once to indicate that the system is armed.
Unlocking doors 1. Push the "UNLOCK" button on the transmit-
ter. 2. At the same time the driver's door unlocks,
the turn signal lights will blink twice to indicate that the system is disarmed.
B070E01GK-GAT
Replacing the battery When the transmitter's battery begins to get weak, it may take several pushes on the button to lock or unlock the doors, and the LED will not light. Replace the battery as soon as possible. Battery type : CR2032 Replacement instructions:
Screwdriver
HGK122
1. Carefully seperate the case with a blade screwdriver as shown in the illustration.
1- 5
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
B050A01GK-AAT
DOOR WINDOWS Power window (Not all models)
Battery
HGK121
2. Remove the old battery from the case and note the polarity. Make sure the polarity of the new battery is the same(+side facing down), then insert it in the transmitter.
NOTE: Install a new battery within 30 seconds after remove the old one, if installing a new battery takes more than 30 seconds, take the following steps.
1) Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position.
2) Make sure that the turn signal lights blink once by pushing the "LOCK" or "UNLOCK" button on the transmitter.
(1)
HGK096-D
The power windows operate only when the ignition key is in the "ON" position. The main switches are located on the driver's arm rest and control the front windows on the respective sides of the vehicle. The windows may be opened by depressing the front portion of the switch. To stop at the desired opening, release the switch. The window may be closed by pulling the front portion of the switch. In order to prevent operation of the passenger front window by passenger, a window lock switch (1) is provided on the arm rest of the driver's door. To disable the passenger's power window, push the window lock switch. To revert to normal operation, push in on the window lock switch again.
HGK097-D
CAUTION: Never try to operate the main switch and subswitch in opposing directions at the same time. If this is done, the window will stop and cannot be opened or closed.
Auto-Down Window (Driver's Side) (Not all models) The Auto-Down window is moved to its fully open position by pushing the switch, and to stop at the desired position push in on the switch again.
1- 6
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
SB070A1-E
FRONT SEAT ADJUSTMENT WARNING: Front seat adjustments must not be undertaken whilst the vehicle is in motion. Loss of control of the vehicle may result if seat adjustments are made whilst the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING: To ensure the seat is locked securely, attempt to move the seat forward or rearward without using the lock release lever.
SB070C1-E
Front seat recline adjustment
B050A02GK-D
WARNING: o Be careful that head, hands and body are
not trapped by a closing window. o If passengers remain in the car when you
leave, especially if a child remains alone, always remove the ignition key for their safety.
SB070B2-E
Front seat rake adjustment
HGK054-D
The front seat rake adjustment is performed by raising the lever at the front of the seat base and sliding the seat to the desired position. At this position the lever should be released and the seat rocked to and fro to ensure that the mechanism has locked.
HGK051-D
The front seat back recline angle may be adjusted by leaning forward slightly and raising the recline adjustment lever at the side of the seat. When the seatback is at the desired angle, the lever should be released. Ensure that the seatback is locked before driving the vehicle.
1- 7
SB070D2-E
Head restraint adjustment
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
SB070E1-E
Lumbar support adjustment (Driver's seat only) (Not all models)
FB070F1-F
Seat Cushion Height Adjustment (Driver's seat only) (Not all models)
SOFT
Lock knob
FIRM
HGK049-D
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, push it down whilst pressing the lock knob. For maximum effectiveness in the event of an accident, the restraint must be adjusted so that the restraint is approximately at the level of the seat occupant's ears. The restraint must never be so adjusted that it is centred about the level of the seat occupant's neck.
WARNING: Do not operate the vehicle with the restraints removed. The restraints provide protection against neck injury when installed and correctly adjusted.
HGK052-D
Some models are fitted with adjustable driver seat lumbar support which may be used to increase the amount of lumbar support offered by the seat back. Adjustment is performed by moving the handle at the side of the backrest in a forward direction to increase the support.
HGK050-D
To raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion, turn the knob forward or rearward.
1- 8
B100A01Y-AAT
SEAT WARMER (Not all models)
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
B129A01F-AAT
REAR SEAT POSITIONS
B130A01GK-DAT
REAR SEAT ENTRY (Walk in device) The driver and front passenger's seatback should be tilted to enter the rear seat.
(1)
HGK123
The seat warmer is provided to warm the front seats during cold weather. With the ignition key in the "ON" position, push either of the switches to warm the driver's seat or the passenger's seat. During mild weather or under conditions where the operation of the seat warmer is not needed, keep the switches in the "OFF" position.
B129A01GK
WARNING: This vehicle contains two rear seating positions only and a seat belt for each seating position. Thus, never permit more than two occupants to ride in the rear seat because an unrestrained occupant could be seriously injured or killed in the event of a vehicle crash.
(2)
HGK053-D
By pulling up the walk in device lever (1) at the right-up side of the driver side seatback, the seatback will tilt forward. And then pull the lock release lever (2) up with moving the seat forward.
1- 9
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
B099A01F-AAT
SB480A1-E
BEFORE FOLDING THE REAR SEATS FOLDING REAR SEAT
(1)
HGK240-D
By pulling up the walk in device lever (1) at the left-up side of the passenger side seatback, the seatback will tilt forward. And then push the seat forward to enter the occupants.
Recliner Memory By pulling up the walk in device lever (1) seatback is reclined and return to the memorized original position.
WARNING: Don't drive with reclining of the passenger side seatback. It is dangerous to move it. Be sure the seatback is fix firmly or not before driving.
B099A01GK
In order to prevent the shoulder belt from being damaged, the shoulder belt must be passed through the hanger. And then fold the rear seat downwards.
CAUTION: Seat belt must be removed from the hanger when seat belt is in use.
HGK108
The rear seatbacks may be folded to facilitate the carriage of long items or to increase the luggage capacity of the vehicle.
o To unlock the seatback, release the catch by operating the lock knob, pull the seatback forward and lower to the folded position.
o When the seatback is returned to the upright position, ensure that the latching mechanism has engaged and that the seat may not move unintentionally.
o Luggage which is carried within the passenger compartment must be securely restrained in order to prevent injury in the event of sudden deceleration.
1- 10
WARNING: The folding rear seats are intended to allow the carriage of longer objects than could otherwise be accommodated. Do not allow passengers to sit on top of the folded-down seatback whilst the car is in motion since the folded seat does not provide a suitable sitting facility and no seat belts are available for use. Objects carried on the folded seatback should not extend higher than the top of the front seats and must be securely restrained to prevent injury or damage during sudden deceleration.
SB500A1-E
REAR PARCEL SHELF
B140A01GK
Large or heavy items must not be placed upon the rear parcel shelf to prevent the possibility of injury arising from such items in the event of impact.
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
SB090A1-E
SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS Seat belts should be worn at all times by all occupants front and rear. The possibility of injury or the severity of injuries suffered in the event of an accident will be greatly reduced by the wearing of seat belts. In addition the following recommendations should be observed.
SB090B1-E
Babies/Small Children Babies and small children must be restrained using a restraint system specifically designed for this purpose. Under no circumstances should a child be carried in the vehicle without the use of a suitable restraint which meets the regulations in force in the country where the vehicle is in operation.
SB090C1-E
Larger Children Larger children should occupy the rear seat and be restrained at all times. The restraint may take the form of a special safety belt or the original factory fitted seat belt used in conjunction with an approved booster cushion depending upon the size and weight of the child. Under no circumstances should children be allowed to travel standing, kneeling or lying on the seat. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat.
SB090O1-E
Pregnant Women The use of a seat belt is recommended for pregnant women. The seat belt should be worn as low and snugly as possible across the hips, not across the abdomen. A qualified Medical Practitioner should be consulted for further information.
SB090E1-E
Injured Persons A seat belt should be used when an injured person is being transported. For specific recommendations, the advice of a qualified Medical Practioner should be sought.
SB090F1-E
Seat Belt Occupancy The seat belts are designed to be used by one seat occupant only. The use of a seat belt by more than one person increases the levels of injury which may be sustained in the event of an accident.
SE090G1-E
Do Not Lie Down To ensure that the maximum level of protection may be afforded by the seat belt system, all passengers should be sitting in an upright position throughout the journey. The seat belt will be unable to afford maximum protection if the front seats are at or near the fully reclined position.
1- 11
SB090H1-E
CARE OF SEAT BELTS Seat belt assemblies must never be disassembled or modified in any way. In addition, care should be exercised to ensure that the belt assemblies do not become damaged by being trapped in seat mechanisms, door shuts etc.
SB090I-E
Periodic Inspection It is recommended that all seat belts be inspected periodically for wear or damage of any kind. Parts of the system that are damaged should be replaced as soon as possible. Under no circumstances must any part of the seat belt assemblies be dismantled or repaired.
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
SB090K1-E
Replacement of Seat Belts The entire seat belt assembly or assemblies should be replaced if the vehicle has been involved in an accident even if no damage is evident. Additional questions concerning seat belt operation should be directed to a Hyundai Dealer.
SB090O1-F
FRONT SEATBELT PIVOT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT (Not all models)
attempt to adjust the height of the upper anchorage point while the vehicle is moving. If you are any doubt as to the method of adjustment or the optimum height position for your front seat belt always contact your nearest Hyundai Dealer.
WARNING: o The height adjuster must be in the locked
position when the vehicle is moving. o The misadjustment of height of the shoul-
der belt could reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt in a crash.
SB090J1-E
Keep Belts Clean and Dry Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. If belts become dirty, they can be cleaned using a mild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong detergents or abrasives should not be used since the fabric may become damaged and weakened.
1- 12
HGK109
The location of the upper anchorage point can be set (for greater belt comfort and security) to any one of five preset positions. To adjust the seat belt pivot push the knob upward or downward to the required setting, ensuring that it engages one of the preset positions (on releasing the knob). The height adjuster must always be locked into position while the vehicle is stationary. Do not
SB090P1-E
SEAT BELTS (3-Point Type) To Fasten The Seat Belt
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
nism by allowing a small amount of webbing to be retracted and the belt withdrawn again.
B210A01A-AAT
To Release the Seat Belt
B200A01S-GAT
Adjusting Your seat Belt
FUD1090P
The seat belts are fastened by pulling the belt buckle towards the seat belt stalk and inserting the metal tongue of the buckle into the stalk. The buckle should be firmly pressed into the stalk until locked which will be indicated by an audible "click". The length of the seat belt webbing will be automatically adjusted by the seat belt mechanism to allow the wearer maximum freedom of movement whilst the belt is being worn. However, in the event of rapid deceleration or impact, the belt mechanism will automatically lock. The mechanism will also lock if the seat belt webbing is withdrawn too quickly when the belt is being fastened or if attempts are made to withdraw the webbing whilst the vehicle is not on level ground. Should the seat belt lock under these conditions, it will be possible to release the mecha-
FUD1090Q
You should place the belt as low as possible on your hips, not on your waist. If the belt is located too high on your body, you could slide under it in case of accident or a sudden stop. This could result of death, serious injury or property damage. Both arms should not be under or over the belt. Rather, one should be over and the other under, as shown in the illustration. Never wear the seat belt under the arm nearest the door.
FUD1090R
The seat belt is released by pressing the release button in the locking buckle. When it is released, the belt should automatically draw back into the retractor. If this does not happen, check the belt to be sure it is not twisted, then try again.
1- 13
B230A02GK-EAT
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Children riding in the car should sit in the rear seat and must always be properly restrained to minimize the risk of injury in an accident, sudden stop or sudden maneuver. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats than in the front seat. Larger children not in a child restraint should use one of the seat belts provided. You are required by law to use safety restraints for children. If small children ride in your vehicle you must put them in a child restraint system (safety seat). Children could be injured or killed in a crash if their restraints are not properly secured. For small children and babies, a child seat or infant seat must be used. Before buying a particular child restraint system, make sure it fits your car seat and seat belts, and fits your child. Follow all the instructions provided by the manufacturer when installing the child restraint system.
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
WARNING: o A child restraint system must be placed in
the rear seat. Never install a child or infant seat on the front passenger's seat. Should an accident occur and cause the passenger side airbag to deploy, it could severely injure or kill an infant or child seated in an infant or child seat. Thus, only use a child restraint in the rear seat of your vehicle. o Since a safety belt or child restraint system can become very hot if it is left in a closed vehicle, be sure to check the seat cover and buckles before placing a child there. o When the child restraint system is not in use, store it in the boot or fasten it with a safety belt so that it will not be thrown forward in the case of a sudden stop or an accident. o Children who are too large to be in a child restraint should sit in the rear seat and be restrained with the available lap/shoulder belts. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. o Always make sure that the shoulder belt portion of the outboard lap/shoulder belt is positioned midway over the shoulder, never across the neck or behind the back. Moving the child closer to the center of the vehicle may help provide a good shoulder belt fit. The lap belt portion of the lap/
shoulder belt must always be positioned as low as possible on the child's hips and as snug as possible. o If the seat belt will not properly fit the child, Hyundai recommends the use of an approved booster seat in the rear seat in order to raise the child's seating height so that the seat belt will properly fit the child. o Never allow a child to stand up or kneel on the seat. o Never use an infant carrier or child safety seat that "hooks" over a seatback; it may not provide adequate security in an accident. o Never allow a child to be held in a person's arms while they are in a moving vehicle, as this could result in serious injury to the child in the event of an accident or a sudden stop. Holding a child in a moving vehicle does not provide the child with any means of protection during an accident, even if the person holding the child is wearing a seat belt. o If the child restraint seat is not anchored properly, the risk of a child being seriously injured or killed in a collision greatly increases.
1- 14
B230G01A-GAT
Installation on the Outboard Rear Seats On outboard rear seats
B230G01GK
To install a child restraint system in the outboard rear seats, extend the shoulder/lap belt from its retractor. Install the child restraint system, buckle the seat belt and allow the seat belt to take up any slack. Make sure that the lap portion of the belt is tight around the child restraint system and the shoulder portion of the belt is positioned so that it cannot interfere with the child's head or neck. After installation of the child restraint system, try to move it in all directions to be sure the child restraint system is securely installed. If you need to tighten the belt, pull more webbing toward the retractor. When you unbuckle the seat belt and allow it to retract, the retractor will automatically revert back to its normal seated passenger emergency locking usage condition.
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
NOTE: o Before installing the child restraint sys-
tem, read the instructions supplied by the child restraint system manufacturer. o If the seat belt does not operate as described, have the system checked immediately by your authorized Hyundai dealer.
WARNING: Do not install any child restraint system in the front passenger seat. Should an accident occur and cause the passenger side airbag to deploy, it could severely injure or kill an infant or child seated in an infant or child seat. Therefore, only use a child restraint system in the rear seat of your vehicle.
B230B02GK-GAT
Using a Child Restraint System with "Tether Anchorage" System
Cover, Child Restraint Hook Holder
Bolt, Holder (5/16"-30 mm) Washer, Conical Spring Holder, Child Restraint Hook Spacer, Hook Holder Cover Spacer (10 mm), Child Restraint Hook Holder Retainer Washer
B230B01Y
For small children and babies, the use of a child seat or infant seat is required. This child seat or infant seat should be of appropriate size for the child and should be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. It is further required that the seat be placed in the vehicle's rear seat since this can make an important contribution to safety. Your vehicle is provided with two child restraint hook holders for installing the child seat or infant seat.
1- 15
B230C02GK-GAT
Securing a Child Restraint System with "Tether Anchorage" System
Load Space Cover
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
1. Route the child restraint seat strap over the seatback. For vehicles with adjustable headrests, route the tether strap under the headrest and between the headrest posts, otherwise route the tether strap over the top of the seatback.
2. Remove the load space cover. 3. Connect the tether strap hook to the child
restraint hook holder and tighten to secure the seat.
B230C04A-EAT
Securing a Child Restraint System with "ISOFIX" System and "Tether Anchorage" System
Tether strap hook
Front of Vehicle
Back panel
B230E01GK
Two child restraint hook holders are located on the vertical back panel.
1- 16
B230F01GK
ISOFIX is a standardised method of fitting child seats that eliminates the need to use the standard adult seat belt to secure the seat in the vehicle. This enables a much more secure and positive location with the added benefit of easier and quicker installation.
An ISOFIX-seat can only be installed if it has vehicle-specific approval in accordance with the requirements of ECE-R44. For your Hyundai, the Hyundai ISOFIX GR1 / Hyundai Duo / Römer ISOFIX GR1 and the Römer Duo ISOFIX / Britax Duo ISOFIX is approved according to the requirement ECE-R44. This seat has been tested extensively by Hyundai and is recommended for your Hyundai.
NOTE: At present, this seat is the only one complying with that provision. In case that other manufacturers will furnish proof of a respective certification, Hyundai is going to evaluate this seat carefully and will give a recommendation provided that seat complies to the law. Please ask your Hyundai dealer in this respect.
ISOFIX Anchor
ISOFIX Anchor Position Indicator
B230D02GK
On each side of the rear seat, between the cushion and backrest, are located a pair of ISOFIX anchorage points together with a top tether mounting on the luggage compartment. During the installing, the seat has to be engaged at the anchorage-points in a way you can hear it clicking (check by pulling!) and has to be fixed with the Top Tether-belt on the belonging point in the luggage-compartment. The installing and the use of a child-seat has to be done according to the installing-manual, which is added to the ISOFIXseat.
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
NOTE: An ISOFIX-child-seat can only be installed if the seat has a vehicle-specific approval according to ECE-R44. Before using the ISOFIXchild-seat, which was bought for another car, ask your Hyundai-dealer whether this seattype is approved and recommended for your Hyundai.
To secure the child restraint seat
HGK261
1. To engage the child restraint seat to the ISOFIX anchor, insert the child restraint seat latch into the ISOFIX anchor. Listen for the audible "click" sound.
2. Connect the tether strap hook to the child restraint hook holder and tighten to secure the seat. Refer to "Securing a Child Restraint System with the Tether Anchorage System" on page 1-15.
WARNING: o There is no rear centre seating position. o Do not install a child restraint seat at the
center of the rear seat using the vehicle's ISOFIX anchors. The ISOFIX anchors are only provided for the left and right outboard rear seating positions. Do not misuse the ISOFIX anchors by attempting to attach a child restraint seat in the middle of the rear seat to the ISOFIX anchors. In a crash, the child restraint seat ISOFIX attachments may not be strong enough to secure the child restraint seat properly in the center of the rear seat and may break, causing serious injury or death. o Do not mount more than one child restraint to a child restraint lower anchorage point. The improper increased load may cause the anchorage points or tether anchor to break, causing serious injury or death. o Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible child restraint seat only to the appropriate locations shown in the illustration. o Always follow the installation and use instructions provided by the manufacturer of the child restraint.
1- 17
B230H03GK-EAT
Child Seat Restraint Suitability For Seat
Position Use child safety seats that have been officially approved and are appropriate for your children.
Age Group
Seating Position
1st
Rear Rear
Passenger Outboard Center
0 : Up to 10 kg
(0 ~ 9 months)
X
0+ : Up to 13 kg
(0 ~ 2 years)
X
I : 9kg to 18kg
(9 months ~
X
4 years)
II & III : 15kg to 36kg
(4 ~ 12 years)
X
X
N/A
X
N/A
L1
N/A
X
N/A
U :Suitable for "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group
UF :Suitable for forward-facing "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group
L1 :Suitable for "Römer ISOFIX GR1" approved for use in this mass group (Approval No: E1 R44-03301133)
X :Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group
N/A :No seating position is provided
1- 18
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with thether anchorage and ISOFIX system to supply most suitable safety. we recommend to buy a child restraint system to use thether anchorage and ISOFIX system.
B180B01GK-GAT
Pre-tensioner Seat Belt (Not all models) Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped with driver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts. The purpose of the pre-tensioner is to make sure that the seat belts fit tightly against the occupant's body in certain frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat belts can be activated alone or, where the frontal collision is severe enough, together with the airbags.
B180B01S-D
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if the occupant tries to lean forward too quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock into position. In certain frontal
collisions, the pre-tensioner will activate and pull the seat belt into tighter contact against the occupant's body.
Driver's side airbag Passenger's 1 side airbag
3
2
B180B01GK-D
The seat belt pre-tensioner system consists mainly of the following components.
Their locations are shown in the illustration.
1. SRS airbag warning light 2. Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly 3. SRS control module
WARNING: To obtain maximum benefit from a pretensioner seat belt:
1. The seat belt must be worn correctly. 2. The seat belt must be adjusted to the
correct position.
NOTE: o Both the driver's and front passenger's
pre-tensioner seat belts will be activated in certain frontal collisions. The pretensioner seat belts can be activated alone or, where the frontal collision is severe enough, together with the airbags. o When the pre-tensioner seat belts are activated, a loud noise may be heard and fine dust, which may appear to be smoke, may be visible in the passenger compartment. These are normal operating conditions and are not hazardous. o Although it is harmless, the fine dust may cause skin irritation and should not be breathed for prolonged periods. Wash your hands and face thoroughly after an accident in which the pre-tensioner seat belts were activated.
CAUTION: o The control module that activates the SRS
airbag controls the pre-tensioner seat belt also. o If there is some function in the pretensioner seat belt circuit, the warning light will illuminate even if there is no malfunction in the SRS airbag system. If the SRS airbag warning light does not illuminate or illuminates continuously when the ignition key is turned to "ON", or if it remains illuminated after blinking for approximately 6 seconds, or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being driven,
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
please have an authorized Hyundai dealer inspect the pre-tensioner seat belts and or SRS airbag system as soon as possible.
WARNING: o Pre-tensioners are designed to operate
only one time. After activation, pretensioner seat belts must be replaced. All seat belts, of any type, should always be replaced after they have been worn during a collision. o The pre-tensioner seat belt assembly mechanisms become hot during activation. Do not touch the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies for several minutes after they have been activated. o Do not attempt to inspect or replace the pre-tensioner seat belts yourself. This must be done by an authorized Hyundai dealer. o Do not strike the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies. o Do not attempt to service or repair the pretensioner seat belt system in any manner. o Improper handling of the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies, and failure to heed the warnings to not strike, modify, inspect, replace, service or repair the pretensioner seat belt assemblies may lead to improper operation or inadvertent activation and serious injury. o Always wear seat belts when driving or riding in a motor vehicle.
B240A01GK-GAT
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT (AIRBAG) SYSTEM (SRS) (Not all models) Driver's Airbag
B240A01GK
Your Hyundai is equipped with a Supplemental Restraint (Airbag) System. The indications of the system's presence are the letters "SRS AIR BAG" embossed on the ornament in the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel pad above the glove box.
The Hyundai SRS consists of airbags installed under the pad covers in the center of the steering wheel and the passenger's side front panel above the glove box. The purpose of the SRS is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than that offered by the seat belt system alone, in case of a frontal impact of sufficient severity.
1- 19
NOTE: Be sure to read information about the SRS on the labels provided on the backside of the sun visor and in the glove box.
WARNING: o As its name implies, the SRS is designed
to work with, and be supplemental to, the driver's and the passenger's three point seat belt systems and is not a substitute for them. Therefore your seat belts must be worn at all times while the vehicle is in motion. In addition, the airbags deploy only in certain frontal impact conditions severe enough to cause significant injury to the vehicle occupants. o The SRS is designed to deploy the airbags only when an impact is sufficiently severe and when the impact angle is less than 30° from the forward longitudinal axis of the vehicle and will not deploy in side, rear or rollover impacts. Additionally, the airbags will only deploy once. Thus, seat belts must be worn at all times. o Front airbags are not intended to deploy in light collisions in which protection can be provided by the seat belt alone. o Front airbags are not intended to deploy in side-impact, rear-impact or rollover crashes. In addition, airbags will not deploy in frontal crashes below the deployment threshold speed.
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Rear impact
Side Impact
Rollover
B240A02GK
o The driver should sit back as far as possible while still maintaining control of the vehicle. If you are sitting too close to the airbag, it can cause death or serious injury when it inflates.
o No objects should be placed over or near the airbag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, and the front passenger's panel above the glove box, because any such object could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the airbags to inflate.
o If the airbags inflate, they must be replaced by an authorized Hyundai dealer.
o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring, or other components of the SRS system. Doing so could result in injury, due to accidental firing of the airbags or by rendering the SRS inoperative.
o Do not install a child restraint system in the front passenger seat position. A child restraint system must never be placed in the front seat. The infant or child could be severely injured or killed by an airbag deployment in case of an accident.
o Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. If older children (teenages and older) must ride in the front seat, make sure they are always properly belted and that the seat is moved back as far as possible.
o For maximum safety protection in all types of crashes, all occupants including the driver should always wear their seat belts whether or not an airbag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the airbag while the vehicle is in motion.
o The SRS airbag system must deploy very rapidly to provide protection in a crash. If an occupant is out of position because of not wearing a seat belt, the airbag may forcefully contact the occupant causing serious or fatal injuries.
1- 20
B240B01GK-AAT
SRS Components and Functions
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
A fully inflated airbag in combination with a properly worn seat belt slows the driver's or the passenger's forward motion, thus reducing the risk of head and chest injury. After complete inflation, the airbag immediately starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility.
Passanger's Airbag
B240B01L-D
The SRS consists of the following components:
- Driver's Side Airbag Module - Passenger's Side Airbag Module - SRS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI) - SRS Control Module (SRSCM)
The SRSCM continually monitors all elements while the ignition is "ON" to determine if a frontal or near-frontal impact is severe enough to require airbag deployment.
The SRS service reminder indicator (SRI) on the instrument panel will blink for about 6 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position or after the engine is started, after which the SRI should go out.
B240B02L-D
The airbag modules are located both in the centre of the steering wheel and in the front passenger's panel above the glove box. When the SRSCM detects a considerable impact to the front of the vehicle, it will automatically deploy the airbags.
B240B03L-D
B240B01GK-D
CAUTION: Do not install or place any accessories (drink holder, cassette holder, sticker, etc) on the front passenger's panel above the glove box in the vehicle with passenger's side air bag. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the passenger's side air bag inflates.
Upon deployment, tear seams molded directly into the pad covers will separate under pressure from the expansion of the airbags. Further opening of the covers then allows full inflation of the airbags.
1- 21
FUD1115A
CAUTION: When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside a vehicle, do not place it near the instrument cluster nor on the instrument panel pad surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas (instrument cluster, instrument panel pad or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the air freshener does leak onto these areas, wash them with water immediately.
1- 22
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
WARNING: o When the SRS is activated, there may be a
loud noise and fine dust will be released throughout the vehicle. These conditions are normal and are not hazardous. However, the fine dust generated during airbag deployment may cause skin irritation. Wash your hands and face thoroughly with lukewarm water and a mild soap after an accident in which the airbags were deployed. o The SRS can function only when the ignition key is in the "ON" position. If the SRS SRI does not come on or illuminates continuously when the ignition key is turned to "ON", or continuously remains on after flashing for about 6 seconds when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, or after the engine is started, comes on while driving, the SRS is not working properly. If this occurs, have your vehicle immediately inspected by your Hyundai dealer. o Before you replace a fuse or disconnect a battery terminal, turn the ignition key to the "LOCK" position or remove the ignition key. Never remove or replace the air bag related fuse(s) when the ignition key is in the "ON" position. Failure to heed this warning will cause the SRS SRI to illuminate.
B990B04Y-AAT
Side Airbag (Not all models)
B990B01L.DAG
Your Hyundai is equipped with a side airbag in each front seat. The purpose of the airbag is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection than that offered by the seatbelt alone. The side impact airbags are designed to deploy only during certain side-impact collisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact. The air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact situations. WARNING: o The side impact airbag is supplemental to
the driver's and the passenger's seat belt systems and is not a substitute for them. Therefore your seat belts must be worn at all times while the vehicle is in motion. The airbags deploy only in certain side impact conditions severe enough to cause significant injury to the vehicle occupants.
o For best protection from the side airbag system and to avoid being injured by the deploying side airbag, both front seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fastened. The driver's hands should be placed on the steering wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 o'clock positions. The passenger's arms and hands should be placed on their laps.
o Do not use any accessory seat covers. o Use of seat covers could prevent or re-
duce the effectiveness of the system. o Do not install any accessories on the side
or near the side airbag. o Do not use excessive force on the side of
the seat. o Do not place any objects over the airbag
or between the airbag and yourself. o Do not place any objects (an umbrella,
bag, etc.) between the front door and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the supplemental side air bag inflates. o To prevent unexpected deployment of the side air bag that may result in personal injury,avoid impact to the side airbag sensor when the ignition key is on.
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
FB110C2-F
SRS Care
YT10355A
The SRS is virtually maintenance-free and so there are no parts you can safely service by yourself. The entire SRS system must be inspected by an authorized Hyundai dealer 10 years after the date that the vehicle was manufactured. Any work on the SRS system, such as removing, installing, repairing, or any work on the steering wheel must be performed by a qualified Hyundai technician. Improper handling of the SRS system may result in serious personal injury.
WARNING: o Do not install a child restraint system in
the front passenger seat position. A child restraint system must never be placed in the front seat. The infant or child could be severely injured by an airbag deployment in case of an accident. o Extreme Hazard! Do not use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an airbag in front of it! o ModificationtoSRScomponentsorwir-ing, including the addition of any kind of badges to the pad cover or modifications to the body structure, can adversely affect SRS performance and lead to possible injury. o For cleaning the horn pad, use only a soft, dry cloth or one which has been moistened with plain water. Solvents or cleaners could adversely affect the airbag cover and proper deployment of the system. o No objects should be placed over or near the airbag module on the steering wheel, because any such object could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the airbag to inflate. o If the airbag inflates, it must be replaced by an authorized Hyundai dealer. o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring, or other components of the SRS system. Doing so could result in injury, due to accidental firing of the airbag or by rendering the SRS inoperative.
1- 23
o If components of the airbag system must be discarded, or if the vehicle must be scrapped, certain safety precautions must be observed. Your Hyundai dealer knows these precautions and can give you the necessary information. Failure to follow these precautions and procedures could increase the risk of personal injury.
o If you sell your vehicle, be sure to inform the new owner of these important points and make certain that this manual is transferred to the new owner together with the vehicle.
o If your car was flooded and has soaked carpeting or water on flooring, you shouldn't try to start engine; have car towed to authorized Hyundai dealer.
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
1- 24
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
B250A01GK-EAT
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
1
2 3 4 5 6 78 910
11 121314
15
16 17 1819 20 21 22 23
24 25
HGK001A-D
1. Passenger's side Drink Holder 2. Passenger's Side Air Bag (Not all models) 3. Multi Guage (Not all models) 4. Front Fog Light Switch (Not all models) 5. Rear fog Light Switch 6. Hazard Warning Switch 7. Digital Clock 8. Front Seat warmer (Not all models) 9. Windscreen Wiper/Washer Switch 10. Steering Wheel Tilt Lever (Not all models) 11. Multi-Function Light 12. Panel Brightness Control Knob
(Rheostat Switch) (Not all models) 13. Traction Control System (Not all models) 14. HeadLight Leveling Device 15. Centre Console 16. Glove Box 17. Parking Brake Lever 18. Shift Lever 19. Cigarette Lighter 20. Ashtray 21. Heating and Cooling Controls 22. Horn and Driver Side Airbag 23. Cruise Control Switch (Not all models) 24. Fuse Box Relay 25. Boot Release Lever
CAUTION: When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument cluster nor on the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas (Instrument cluster, instrument panel or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the air freshener does leak onto these areas, wash them with water immediately.
1- 25
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
B260A01GK-EAT
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
1
2 34 5 6 7 2
8
1. Speedometer 2. Turn Signal Indicator Light 3. Odometer/Trip Odometer 4. Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light
(Not all models) 5. Coolant Temperature Gauge 6. Trip Computer 7. Fuel Gauge 8. Tachometer
1- 26
14
9 10
11 12 13 151617 18 1920 21 22 23
9. Traction Control Indicator Light (Not all models)
10. Door Ajar Warning Light 11. Odometer/Trip Odometer Reset Knob 12. Charging System Warning Light 13. SRS (Airbag) Warning Light 14. Seat Belt Warning Light 15. High Beam Indicator Light 16. Oil Pressure Warning Light
HGK026UK
17. Malfuction Indicator Light (Not all models) 18. Low Fuel Warning Light 19. Parking Brake/Brake Fluide Level Warning
Light 20. Trip Computer Reset Knob 21. Cruise Indicator (Not all models) 22. Hatchback door Open Warning Light 23. Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
(Not all models)
B260B01GK-GAT
SRS (AIRBAG) SERVICE
REMINDER INDICATOR (SRI) The SRS service reminder indicator (SRI) comes on and flashes for about 6 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position or after the engine is started, after which it will go out.
This light also comes on when the SRS is not working properly. If the SRI does not come on or illuminates continuously when the ignition key is turned to "ON", or continuously remains on after flashing for about 6 seconds when you turned the ignition key to the "ON" position or started the engine, or if it comes on while driving, have the SRS inspected by an authorized Hyundai Dealer.
260P02Y-EAT
ABS SERVICE REMINDER IN-
DICATOR (Not all models) When the key is turned to the "ON" position, the Anti-Lock Brake System SRI will come on and then go off in a few seconds. If the ABS SRI remains on, comes on while driving, or does not come on when the key is turned to the "ON" position, this indicates that there may be a problem with the ABS. If this occurs, have your vehicle checked by your Hyundai dealer as soon as possible. The normal braking system will still be operational, but without the assistance of the anti-lock brake system.
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
WARNING: If the both ABS SRI and Parking Brake/Brake fluid level warning lights remain "ON" or come on while driving, there may be a problem with E.B.D (Electronic brake force distribution). If this occurs, avoid sudden stops and have your vehicle checked by your Hyundai dealer as soon as possible.
SB210G1-E
TURN SIGNAL INDICATOR LAMPS Operation of a turn signal is indicated by the warning lamp located in the instrument cluster. If the lamp fails to illuminate or does not flash, a malfunction within the turn signal system is indicated.
SB210J1-E
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR LAMP The high beam indicator lamp will illuminate whenever the headlamps are switched to high beam of flash position.
SB210K1-E
OIL PRESSURE WARNING
LAMP
CAUTION: If the oil pressure lamp illuminates when the engine is running, an insufficient oil pressure level for continued safe operation of the engine exists. Continued operation of the engine in this condition may result in serious engine damage.
Under normal circumstances, the lamp will illuminate when the ignition is turned "on" and will be extinguished when the engine is started. If the oil pressure warning lamp illuminates whilst the engine is running, stop the engine immediately and check the engine oil level. If the level is insufficient, add the required amount of oil as indicated by the engine oil dipstick. If the lamp fails to extinguish when the engine is restarted, do not continue to operate the vehicle. If the oil pressure lamp illuminates during normal operation and the cause is not an insufficient oil level, or the lamp fails to illuminate when the ignition is turned "on", contact the nearest Hyundai dealer before further operating the vehicle.
1- 27
B260H01GK-EAT
PARKING BRAKE/BRAKE FLUID LEVEL WARNING LAMP CAUTION: In the event of problems being suspected with the braking system, the advice of the nearest Hyundai dealer must be sought before the vehicle is driven. Driving the vehicle with either an electrical or hydraulic braking system defect may be dangerous, resulting in accident or personal injury.
Warning lamp operation The parking brake/brake fluid level warning lamp will be illuminated whenever the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" or "START" position when the parking brake is applied and must be extinguished in a three seconds after the engine starts. If the warning lamp fails to extinguish or illuminates at any other time, the vehicle must be brought to rest in a safe location and the level of brake fluid in the reservoir checked. If the fluid level is incorrect, fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications should be added. If, after correcting the brake fluid level, the warning lamp continues to be illuminated, the advice of the nearest Hyundai dealer must be sought before the vehicle is driven again. The Hyundai Coupe is equipped with a diagonally split dual braking system which will ensure that in the event of one of the brake circuits
1- 28
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
becoming defective, approximately fifty per cent of the normal braking performance will be available. If failure of one of the circuits occurs, the required amount of pedal effort, pedal travel and stopping distance will be increased. Use of the gearbox is recommended to assist in bringing the vehicle to rest. The vehicle must not be driven once brake failure has occurred until the system has been repaired and is functioning normally. The braking system employs a vacuum servo in order that the pedal efforts are reduced. Power for the servo is derived from the engine and therefore, in the event of the engine stopping or the vehicle being towed, pedal efforts will be substantially increased.
SB210M1-E
CHARGING SYSTEM
WARNING LAMP The charging system warning lamp should illuminate when the ignition switch is turned to the "ON" position and should be extinguished when the engine is started. If the lamp fails to illuminate when the ignition is turned "ON" or fails to extinguish after starting the engine, the nearest Hyundai dealer should be contacted. If the lamp illuminates whilst the vehicle is being driven, stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and check the condition of the generator drive belt. If the belt is in place and the tension is satisfactory, the advice of a Hyundai dealer should be sought.
CAUTION: If the drive belt (generator belt) is loose, broken, or missing while the vehicle is driving, there may be a serious malfunction, engine could overheat because this belt also drives the water pump.
SB210N2-E
HATCHBACK DOOR OPEN WARNING LAMP The hatchback door warning lamp indicates when the hatchback door is open or is not fully closed. Ensure that the lamp has extinguished prior to driving the vehicle.
SB2100I-E
DOOR AJAR WARNING LAMP The door ajar warning lamp indicates that a door is not correctly closed. Ensure that the lamp is extinguished prior to driving the vehicle.
SB210P1-E
LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING LAMP The low fuel warning lamp serves to warn the driver that the remaining fuel quantity is approximately 9 litres and that the vehicle should be refuelled. If the vehicle is driven for an extended period with the low fuel warning lamp illuminated there exists a possibility that misfiring due to fuel
shortage may occur. This situation must be avoided to prevent damage to the catalyst occurring.
B265C01O-AAT
Traction Control Indicator Lights (If installed) The traction control indicators change operation according to the ignition switch position and whether the system is in operation or not. They will illuminate when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, but should go out after three seconds. If the TCS or TCS-OFF indicator stays on, take your car to your authorized Hyundai dealer and have the system checked. See section 2 for more information about the TCS.
B260N01GK-EAT
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP This lamp illuminates when there is a malfunction of an exhaust gas related component, and the system is not functioning properly so that the exhaust gas regulation values are not satisfied. This lamp will also illuminate when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, and will go out after engine starting. If it illuminates while driving, or does not illuminate when the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position, take your car to your nearest authorized Hyundai dealer and have the system checked.
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
B260E01HP-GAT
SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT (Not all models) The seat belt warning light blinks for about 6 seconds when the ignition key is turned from the "OFF" position to "ON" or "START".
B260Q01E-GAT
CRUISE INDICATOR (Not all models) The cruise indicator light in the instrument cluster is illuminated when the cruise control main switch on the end of the barrel is pushed. The indicator light does not illuminate when the cruise control main switch is pushed a second time. Information about the use of cruise control is beginning on page 1-48.
SB210S1-E
BRAKE PAD WEAR INDICATOR The front brake disc pads are fitted with an audible wear indicator which will cause a high pitched noise to be emitted when the remaining amount of friction lining is below the specified value. When the wear indicator is heard, the brake pads should be replaced without delay to avoid damage occurring to the brake discs and a severe reduction in braking efficiency.
SB215A1-E
FUEL GAUGE
HGK133
The fuel gauge indicates the quantity of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. NOTE: The fuel gauge is not intended to give other than an approximate indication of the fuel level and is unsuitable for the purposes of calculating fuel consumption figures.
1- 29
SB215B1-E
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE
HGK132
The engine coolant temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature and will, under normal circumstances, give an indication in the "Normal" or centre portion of the scale. Should the indication move into the upper or "Hot" portion of the scale, engine overheating is indicated. Under these circumstances, the vehicle should be brought to rest as soon as is safe to do so and the engine turned off. Once the engine has cooled somewhat, the coolant level and the condition of the generator/water pump drive belt should be checked. If the cause of the overheating cannot be readily established, the assistance of a Hyundai dealer should be sought.
WARNING: The engine cooling system is pressurized and removal of the radiator cap when the 1- 30
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
engine is hot may cause hot water and steam to be ejected from the radiator resulting in burns and scalding. The radiator cap must only be removed when the engine has cooled. Do not add cold water to a hot engine to avoid the possibility of engine damage. The use of plain water in the cooling system is not recommended since the aluminium components of the cooling system require the use of a corrosion inhibitor found in the recommended Ethylene Glycol type anti freeze solutions.
SB215C1-E
SPEEDOMETER
HGK130B
The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed in both miles and kilometres per hour.
SB215F1-E
TACHOMETER
HGK131A
The tachometer registers the speed of the engine in revolutions per minute (R.P.M.). CAUTION: The maximum safe engine operating speed is indicated by the white zone of the tachometer scale. The engine should not be operated beyond the beginning of this zone or serious engine damage may result.
B310B01GK-EAT
ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER
HGK028C
Function of digital odometer/trip odometer Pushing in the reset switch on the right side of speedometer when the ignition switch is turned "ON" will display the following sequence:
1
2
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
1. Odometer The odometer records the total driving distance in miles, and is useful for keeping a record for maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Any alteration of the odometer may void your warranty coverage.
2,3 Trip odometer Records the distance of 2 trips in miles. TRIP A: First distance you have traveled from your origination point to a first destination. TRIP B: Second distance from the first destination to the final destination.
To shift from TRIP A to TRIP B, press the reset switch. When pressed for 1 second, it will reset to 0.
B400B01GK-EAT
TRIP COMPUTER
A Type
B Type
HGK095B
The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information system that displays information related to driving, such as distance to empty, average speed and drive time on the LCD. RESET SWITCH o The reset switch is used to zero the multi-
functional display mode. o Pushing in the reset switch on the left side of
tacometer changes the display as follows;
3
HGK055B
1- 31
DISTANCE TO EMPTY AVERAGE SPEED DRIVE TIME
1. DISTANCE TO EMPTY A Type
B Type
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
o When the battery has been reinstalled after being discharged or disconnected, drive more than 20 miles for an accurate distance to empty.
NOTE: o If the distance to empty is indicated "- -",
have the trip computer system checked by your authorized Hyundai dealer. o The distance to empty can differ from the actual tripmeter according to driving conditions. o The distance to empty can vary according to the driving conditions, driving pattern or vehicle speed.
2. AVERAGE SPEED
A Type
3. DRIVE TIME A Type
B Type
HGK058
o This mode indicates the drive time travelled since the last drive time reset.
o Pressing the reset switch for more than 1 second, when the drive time is being displayed, clears the drive time to zero.
HGK056
o This mode provides the estimated distance to empty from the current fuel level in the fuel tank.
o The trip computer may not register additional fuel if less than 6 liters of fuel are added to the vehicle.
1- 32
B Type
HGK057B
o This mode indicates the average speed travelled since the last average speed reset.
o Pressing the reset switch for more than 1 second, when the average speed is being displayed, clears the average speed to zero.
B330C01GK-GAT
MULTI GAUGE (Not all models) Multi gauge is consists of torque gauge, instantaneous fuel consumption gauge and volt gauge.
HGK229A
Torque gauge It shows instantaneous change of the torque by rpm.
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Instantaneous Fuel Consumption gauge It shows instantaneous fuel consumption according to the driving condition. The more indicated figure is low, the more it indicates efficient driving situation.
HGK231
Volt gauge It shows moment volt change and makes for diver correspond to low volt situation.
SB220A1-E
MULTI FUNCTION SWITCH
Turn Signal Operation To signal an intention to turn right, the switch lever should be pressed down. To signal an intention to turn left, the switch lever should be pushed upwards. In both instances, the turn signal lamps on one side of the car will flash and the warning lamp located in the instrument cluster will flash in sympathy. Upon completion of the manoeuvre, the lever will, under normal circumstances, return to the "Off" position. However, if the manoeuvre involved only a small movement of the steering wheel, the signal may need to be cancelled manually. If either turn signal indicator flashes more rapidly than normal or refuses to flash at all, a malfunction of the turn signal system may exist.
SB220B1-E
Lane Change Signal
HGK230A
HGK038-D
1- 33
To indicate an intention to change lanes, moving the lever slightly towards the direction of the relevant turn signal will cause the turn signal lamps to flash. When the lever is released, it will return to the "off" position.
SB220C3-E
LIGHTING SWITCH
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
NOTE: The ignition must be in the "ON" position to turn on the headlights.
Parking light auto cut If you do not turn the parking lights "OFF" after driving, the parking lights will automatically shut "OFF" when the driver's door is opened. To turn them "ON" again you must simply turn the ignition key to the "ON" position.
To operate the automatic light feature, turn the barrel on the end of the multi-function switch. If you set the multi-function switch to "AUTO", the tail lights and headlights will be turned automatically on or off according to external illumination.
SB220E1-E
HEADLIGHT FLASH
HGK039-D
The vehicle sidelamps and headlamps are operated by rotating the end of the turn signal switch barrel. To operate the sidelight, rotating the switch to the first detent with ignition switch at the "OFF" position will cause the lamps to illuminate. To operate the headlamps, the turn signal switch barrel should be rotated to the second detent. The headlamps will only operate when the ignition switch is at the "On" position. If the ignition switch is turned to the "Off" position, only the sidelight will function.
1- 34
SB220D1-E
HIGH AND LOW BEAM To turn on the headlight high beams, push the lever forward (away from you). For low beams, pull the lever back (toward you). The appropriate headlight beam indicator light will come on at the same time.
B340G01L-GAT
Auto Light (Not all models)
HGK041-D
HGK233-D
The headlight may be flashed by pulling the turn signal switch lever towards the steering wheel. The headlight will be extinguished when the switch is released.
B350A01GK-EAT
WINDSCREEN WIPER/WASHER SWITCH
(1)
(2)
(3)
HGK042-D
The windscreen wiper switch, dependent upon model, has three operating positions. 1. Intermittent wiper operation. (Not all models) 2. Low speed operation. 3. High speed operation.
NOTE: To prevent damage to the wiper system, do not attempt to wipe away heavy accumulations of snow or ice. Accumulated snow and ice should be removed manually. If there is only a light layer of snow or ice, operate the heater in the defrost mode to melt the snow or ice before using the wiper.
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Mist Wiper Operation
HGK045-D
If a single wipe is desired in mist, move the windscreen wiper and washer control lever up.
SB230B1-E
VARIABLE INTERMITTENT WIPE FACILITY (Not all models)
HGK043-D
The variable intermittent wipe facility is operated by moving the windscreen wiper switch to the first position. The time period between wipes is adjusted by moving the rotary control on the windscreen wiper switch barrel.
B350B01O-EAT
WINDSCREEN WASHER OPERATION
HGK044-D
To use the windscreen washer, pull the wiper/ washer lever toward the steering wheel. When the washers are operated, the wipers automatically make two passes across the windscreen. The washers continue to operate until the lever is held at the washer position. NOTE: o Do not operate the washers for more than
15 seconds continuously or when the fluid reservoir is empty.
1- 35
o In icy or snowy weather, ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen to the glass prior to operating the wipers.
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
SB240A1-E
HAZARD WARNING SYSTEM
SB250A1-E
HEATED REAR WINDOW
A Type
B350A01O-EAT
Hatchback door Wiper And Washer Switch
B Type
HGK046-D
1. :The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the rear window and the wiper operates while the rear window wiper barrel is placed in this position.
2.OFF 3.INT :To use the intermittent wiper feature,
place the rear window wiper barrel in the "INT" position. 4.ON :When the point indicates the "ON", the rear window wiper operates continuously.
1- 36
HGK140
The hazard warning system should be used whenever it becomes necessary to stop the car in a hazardous location. The hazard warning system is operated by depressing the switch at which time all turn signal lamps will flash simultaneously and the turn signal warning lamps located within the instrument cluster will flash simultaneously. The hazard warning system may be turned off by depressing the switch again.
B380A01GK
To operate the heated rear window depress the switch shown. The heated rear window will automatically turn off after 15 minutes or when the ignition is turned off. The system may be turned off manually by depressing the switch again.
CAUTION: The inside of the rear windscreen should never be cleaned with a hard or sharp implement since damage to the heating element may occur. The glass should only be cleaned with a soft cloth or chamois leather with the use only of a mild detergent or proprietary glass cleaner where necessary. Only horizontal movement of the cloth should be made when cleaning the glass and care should be exercised to ensure that the heating elements are not damaged by rings or jewellery whilst the glass is being cleaned.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated rear window to operate.
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
SB280A1-E
INSTRUMENT PANEL ILLUMINATION CONTROL
SB290A1-F
CIGAR LIGHTER
ZB190A1-A
DIGITAL CLOCK
HGK143A
There are three control buttons for the digital clock. Their functions are:
HOUR - Push "H" to advance the hour indicated. MIN - Push "M" to advance the minute indicated. RESET - Push "R" to reset minutes to ":00" to facilitate resetting the clock to the correct time. When this is done:
Pressing "R" between 10 : 30 and 11 : 29 changes the readout to 11 : 00 Pressing "R" between 11 : 30 and 12 : 29 changes the readout to 12 : 00.
HGK134-D
The level of illumination intensity of the instrument panel may be varied by turning the control shown. The instrument panel will be illuminated when the side or head lamps are in operation.
HGK144-D
For the cigar lighter to work, the key must be in the "ACC" or the "ON" position. To use the cigar lighter, push the lighter all the way into its socket. When the element is heated, the lighter will pop out into the "ready" position. Do not hold the cigar lighter at the depressed position which may result in damage to the vehicle wiring or an electrical fire. If it is necessary to replace the cigarette lighter, use only a genuine Hyundai replacement part.
NOTE: Do not use electric accessories or equipment other than the Hyundai genuine parts in the socket.
1- 37
B430A01GK-AAT
FRONT ASHTRAY
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
B450A01GK-GAT
DRINK HOLDER (Not all models)
Driver's
Passenger's
SB320A2-F
HEADLIGHT LEVELING DEVICE SYSTEM
HGK146-D
The front ashtray may be opened by pushing and releasing the ashtray door at its top edge. To remove the ashtray in order to clean it, the metal ash receptacle should be lifted out from the ashtray door. Do not attempt to remove the entire ashtray door assembly or damage will result. To reinstall it, place it in the proper position and press it down in the ashtray door. The ashtray lamp will only illuminate when the exterior body lights are switched on.
HGK149-D
The drink holder is used for holding cups or cans. To use the passenger's drink holder, push the drink holder.
WARNING: Do not place objects other than cups or cans in the drink holder. Such objects can be thrown out in the event of a sudden stop or an accident, possibly injuring the passengers in the vehicle.
HGK157-D
To adjust the headlight beam level according to the number of the passengers and the loading weight in the luggage area, turn the beam leveling switch. The higher the number of the switch position, the lower the headlight beam level. Always keep the headlight beam at the proper leveling position, or headlights may dazzle other road users. Listed below are the examples of recommended switch settings. For loading conditions other than those listed below, adjust the switch position so that the beam level may be the nearest as the condition obtained according to the list.
1- 38
Loading condition Driver only
Switch position 0
Driver + front passenger
0
Full passengers (including driver)
1
Full passengers (including driver) + full boot loading (or light trailer
2
loading)
Driver + full boot loading
3
(or maximum trailer loading)
FB330A1-E
SUNROOF (Not all models)
The electrically operated sunroof may be used only whilst the ignition switch is at the "ON" position. When the sunroof is opened, the wind deflector will automatically rise to the upper position and will automatically retract when the sunroof is closed.
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
B460A01Y-AAT
Sun shade
HGK029
Your HYUNDAI is equipped with a sliding sunshade which you can manually adjust to let in light with the sunroof closed, or to block sunlight. WARNING: Never adjust the sunshade while driving.
B460B01GK-GAT
Opening the Sunroof System
HGK030
The sunroof can be electrically opened or closed with the ignition key in the "ON" position. The sunroof is moved to its fully open position by pushing the "OPEN" switch, and to stop at the desired position, push in any switches (Open, Close, Up, Down). To close, press and hold the "CLOSE" button. Release the button when the sunroof reaches the desired position. WARNING: o Do not close a sunroof if anyone's hands,
arms or body are between the sliding glass and the sunroof sash, as this could result in injury. o Do not place your head or arms out of the sunroof opening at any time.
1- 39
CAUTION: o Do not open the sunroof in severely cold
temperature or when it is covered with ice or snow. o Periodically remove any dirt that may have accumulated on the guide rails.
B460C01GK-GAT
Tilting the Sunroof System
HGK031
The sunroof is moved to its fully tilt up position by pushing the "UP" switch, and to stop at the desired position, push in any switches (Open, Close, Up, Down). To tilt down, press and hold the "DOWN" button. Release the button when the sunroof reaches the desired position. NOTE: After washing the car or after there is rain, be sure to wipe off any water that is on the sunroof before operating it. 1- 40
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
B460D03GK-AAT
Manual Operation of Sunroof If the sunroof does not electrically operate:
HGK032
1. Remove the cap located in the rear roof panel by using a coin or driver.
HGK033
2. Insert the hexagonal head wrench provided with the vehicle into the socket. This wrench can be found in the vehicle's boot or glove box.
3. Push and turn the wrench counterclockwise to open or clockwise to close the sunroof.
B460E02GK-GAT
Resetting the Sunroof System If the battery has been recharged, disconnected or if the sunroof is operated with the hexagonal head wrench manually, you may need to reset the sunroof.
To do this; 1. Turn the ignition switch "OFF". 2. With pressing "open" "up" button at the same
time, turn the ignition switch "ON".
The resetting is failed when the ignition key to the "OFF" within 1.5 seconds.
3. If the sunroof is set like this, the sunroof is reset with tilting up/down automatically once for all.
CAUTION: If the sunroof is not reset, it may not be operated properly.
B480A01GK-GAT
MAP LIGHT
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
FB340B1-F
SPECTACLE CASE (Not all models)
B500A01A-EAT
GLOVE BOX
(1) (2) (3)
HGK034
(1) Push in the map light switch to turn the driver side light.
(2) In the "DOOR" position, the interior courtesy light comes on when any door is opened regardless of the ignition key position. The light goes out gradually 6 seconds after the door is closed.
(3) Push in the map light switch to turn the passenger side light.
HGK036
The spectacle case is located on the front overhead console. Push the end of cover to open or close the spectacle case.
WARNING: Do not open the spectacle case while the vehicle is moving. The rear view mirror of the vehicle can be blocked.
HGK147-D
WARNING: To avoid the possibility of injury, the glove box lid must be kept closed whilst the vehicle is in motion.
o To open the glove box, pull the glove box release lever.
1- 41
YB270B2-A
EXTERIOR REAR VIEW MIRROR Electric Type
HGK128-D
The outside rear view mirror can be adjusted in any direction to give the maximum rear view vision. The remote control out side rear view mirror switch controls the adjustments for both right and left door mirror. To adjust the position of either mirror: 1. Move the selecting switch to the right or left
to activate the adjustable mechanism for the corresponding door mirror. 2. Now, adjust mirror angle by depressing the appropriate perimeter switch as illustrated.
1- 42
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
CAUTION: o Do not operate the switch continuously
for an unnecessary length of time. o Scraping ice from the mirror face could
cause permanent damage. To remove any ice, use a sponge, soft cloth or approved de-icer.
WARNING: Be careful when judging the size or distance of any object seen in the passenger side rear view mirror. It is a convex mirror with a curved surface. Any objects seen in this mirror are closer than they appear.
B510D01Y-EAT
OUTSIDE REARVIEW HEATER (Not all models)
A Type
MIRROR
B Type
B380A01GK
The outside rearview mirror heater is actuated in connection with the rear window defroster. To heat the outside rearview mirror glass, push in
the switch for the rear window defroster. The rearview mirror glass will be heated for defrosting or defogging and will give you improved rear vision in inclement weather conditions. Push the switch again to turn the heater off. The outside rearview mirror heater automatically turns itself off after 15 minutes.
SB360C1-F
FOLDING THE OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRRORS
B510C01GK
To fold the outside rear view mirrors, push them towards the rear. The outside rear view mirrors can be folded rearward for parking in restricted areas. WARNING: Do not adjust or fold the outside rear view mirrors while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of control, and an accident causing death, serious injury or property damage.
SB370A1-E
INTERIOR REAR VIEW MIRROR
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
B520B01O-GAT
DAY/NIGHT REAR VIEW MIRROR (Electric type) (Not all models)
SB380A1-E
PARKING BRAKE
Sensor
B520A01GK
The interior mirror is of the day/night type to enable the glare of headlamps from following vehicles to be eliminated during night time driving. The tab located at the bottom of the mirror should be set to the position nearest the windscreen for normal day time driving, and flipped towards the rear of the vehicle to eliminate glare during night time driving. To adjust the field of vision, the mirror may be moved by hand upon the mounting.
NOTE: The mirror should always be adjusted prior to setting the vehicle in motion.
B520B01GK
The electric type day/night inside rearview mirror automatically controls the glare of headlights of the car behind you. Adjust the rearview mirror to the desired position.
HGK178
The parking brake must always be set when the vehicle is to be left unattended. When the parking brake is applied, and the ignition key is at the "ON" position, the parking brake warning lamp will be illuminated. Before driving the vehicle, the parking brake must be fully released and the warning lamp extinguished.
o To set the parking brake, apply the foot brake and pull the parking brake lever up with the button depressed. Release the button when the brake is fully applied.
o To release the parking brake, apply the foot brake and pull up the parking brake lever slightly. Depress the button and lower the lever.
1- 43
YB800A2-A
FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH (Not all models)
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
B360B01GK-GAT
REAR FOG LIGHT SWITCH (Not all models)
B550A02S-DAT
HIGH-MOUNTED REAR STOPLIGHT
A Type
B Type
C Type
HGK142
To turn on the front fog lights, push the switch. They will come on when the headlights are turned on.
HGK183
To turn on the rear fog lights, push the switch. They will come on when the headlights are turned on.
B550A01GK
In addition to the lower-mounted rear stoplights on either side of the car, the high mounted rear stoplight in the centre of the rear window or inserted in the rear spoiler also comes on when the brakes are applied.
1- 44
SB410A1-E
FRONT DOOR EDGE WARNING LAMP
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
B570A01GK-EAT
BONNET RELEASE
WARNING: o Always double check to be sure that the
bonnet is firmly latched before driving away. If it is not latched, the bonnet could fly open while the vehicle is being driven, causing a total loss of visibility, which might result in an accident. o Do not move the vehicle with the bonnet in the raised position, as vision is obstructed and the bonnet could fall or be damaged.
B620A01GK-D
The red door edge warning lamp which serves to indicate an open door to following traffic in conditions of darkness illuminates whenever the door is open.
Bonnet Release Lever
HGK106-D
1. Pull the release knob to unlatch the bonnet.
HGK098
2. Press the safety hook lever up and lift the bonnet.
3. Raise the bonnet by hand.
When closing the bonnet, slowly close the bonnet and make sure it locks into place.
1- 45
SB440A1-E
REMOTE FUEL FILLER LID RELEASE (Not all models)
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
SB450A2-E
HATCHBACK DOOR Remote Hatchback door Release
HGK105-D
The fuel filler lid may be opened from inside the vehicle by pulling up on the fuel filler lid release.
NOTE: If the fuel filler lid will not open because ice has formed around it, tap lightly or push on the lid to break the ice and release the lid. Do not lever the lid. If necessary, spray around the lid with an approved de-icer fluid (do not use radiator anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt.
HGK124
WARNING: Fuel vapours are dangerous. Before refuelling, turn off the engine and never allow sparks, lit cigarettes or open flames near the filler area. When releasing the filler cap, a small amount of residual pressure may generate a slight hissing sound which is not indicative of an abnormality. In the event of the fuel filler cap requiring replacement, only a Genuine Hyundai replacement part should be used to prevent fuel leakage.
HGK103-D
The hatchback door may be opened by pulling the lever to release the lock. The hatchback door should be closed by depressing the lid firmly until the latch engages. Ensure that hatchback door is securely latched before setting the vehicle in motion.
WARNING: The hatchback door should always be closed whilst the vehicle is in motion to prevent exhaust gases from being drawn into the passenger compartment.
1- 46
SB450C2-E
To Unlock Using the Key
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
B540D01GK-GAT
When you close the hatchback door
SB510A1-E
SUNVISOR
B540C01GK
To open the hatchback door using the ignition key, insert the key into the lock barrel and turn clockwise to release the latch. The hatchback door compartment lamp will illuminate whenever the hatchback door is opened.
HGK226
HGK227
WARNING: Do not close an open hatchback door while a person(s) is sitting upright on the rear seat. The hatchback door or hatchback door glass may contact the head of a person sitting upright on the rear seat. Closing the hatchback door onto a person's head may cause serious injuries, including death.
Vanity mirror
HGK145-D
Sun visors are fitted to both the driver and passenger side of the vehicle. Certain derivatives are equipped with a vanity mirror which is located on the back of the passenger visor. The visor may be lowered to reduce the amount of glare from directly ahead, or may be moved towards the side window to reduce glare from the side of the vehicle, once the inner pivot has been unclipped from the bracket.
WARNING: Do not place the sunvisor in such a manner that it obscures visibility of the roadway, traffic or the objects.
1- 47
B600A01HP-AAT
STEERING WHEEL TILT LEVER (Not all models)
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
SB530B1-F
HORN
Working Zone
B540D02HP-DAT
LUGGAGE NET (Not all models) A Type
B Type
HGK127-D
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever toward you and hold it to unlock. 2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to the
desired position. 3. After adjustment, release the lever.
WARNING: Do not attempt to adjust the steering wheel while driving as this may result in loss of control of the vehicle and serious injury or death.
HGK141
Press the pad on the steering wheel to sound the horn.
HGK241
Some objects can be kept in the net at the luggage compartment. Use the luggage net on the floor (Not all models) or at the back of the luggage compartment to prevent the objects from slipping.
CAUTION: To prevent damage to the goods or the vehicle, care should be taken when carrying fragile or bulky objects in the luggage compartment.
WARNING: Avoid eye injury. DO NOT overstretch. ALWAYS keep face and body out of recoil path. DO NOT use when strap has visible signs of wear or damage.
1- 48
SB700A1-E
CRUISE CONTROL (Not all models)
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
B660B01E-AAT
To Set the Cruise Speed
WARNING: To avoid accidental cruise control engagement, keep the cruise control main switch off when not using the cruise control.
B660C01E-AAT
To Cancel the Cruise Speed
Main switch
B660A01GK
The cruise control system provides automatic speed control for your comfort when driving on freeways, tollroads, or other noncongested highways. This is designed to function above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
B660B01GK
1. Push in the cruise control main switch on the end of the barrel. The "CRUISE" indicator light in the instrument cluster will be illuminated. This turns the system on.
2. Acceleratetothedesiredcruisingspeedabove 25 mph (40 km/h).
3. Push the control switch downward to "SET (COAST)" and release it.
4. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal and the desired speed will automatically be maintained.
5. To increase speed, depress the accelerator pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed the preset speed. When you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal, the vehicle will return to the speed you have set.
B660C01GK
Do one of the followings:
o Pull the control switch toward steering wheel to "CANCEL" position.
o Depress the brake pedal. o Depress the clutch pedal (Manual transaxle). o Shift the selector lever in "N" position (Auto-
matic transaxle). o Decrease the vehicle speed lower than mem-
orized speed by 12 mph (20 km/h). o Decrease the vehicle speed approximately to
less than 25 mph (40 km/h). o Release the main switch.
1- 49
B660D01E-AAT
To Resume the Preset Speed
B660D01GK
The vehicle will automatically resume the speed set prior to cancellation when you push the control switch upward to "RESUME (ACCEL)" position and release it to return providing the vehicle speed is above 25 mph (40 km/h).
B660E01E-AAT
To Reset at a Faster Speed 1. Push the control switch upward to "RESUME
(ACCEL)" position and hold it. 2. Accelerate to desired speed and release the
control switch. While the control switch is held, the vehicle will gradually gain speed.
1- 50
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
B660F01E-AAT
To Reset at a Slower Speed
B660B01GK
1. Push the control switch downward to "SET (COAST)" position and hold it. The vehicle will decelerate.
2. When the desired speed is obtained, release the control switch. While the control switch is pushed, the vehicle speed will gradually decrease.
WARNING: o Keep the main switch off when not using
the cruise control. o Do not use the cruise control when it may
not be safe to keep the car at a constant speed, for instance, driving in heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or snow-covered) or winding roads or over 6% up-hill or down-hill roads. o Pay particular attention to the driving conditions whenever using the cruise control system.
o During cruise-control driving with a manual transaxle vehicle, do not shift into neutral without depressing the clutch pedal, or the engine will be overrevved. If this happens, depress the clutch pedal or release the main switch.
o With the cruise control engaged, when the brake pedal is applied, it is normal to hear the cruise control system deactivate. This is an indication of normal system operation.
o During normal cruise control operation, when the "SET(COAST)" is activated or reactivated after applying the brakes, the cruise control will energize after approximately 3 seconds. This delay is normal.
B710A01GK-EAT
HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL
21 4
3
1. Side defrost nozzle 2. Side Ventilator 3. Centre Ventilator 4. WindScreen Defrost Ventilator
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
21
HGK001A-D
B710A01S-AAT
VENTILATION To operate the ventilation system:
o Set the air intake control on "Fresh" mode
(
).
o To direct all intake air to the dashboard vents,
set the airflow control to "Face".
o Adjust the fan speed control to the desired
speed.
o Set the temperature control between "Cool"
and "Warm".
B710B01S-DAT
CENTRE VENTILATOR
The centre ventilators are located in the middle of the dashboard. The direction of air flow from the vents in the centre of the dashboard is adjustable. To control the direction of the air flow, move the knob in the centre of the vent up-and-down and side-to-side.
B710C01S-AAT
SIDE VENTILATOR
The side ventilators are located on each side of dashboard. To change the direction of the air flow, move the knob in the center of the vent upand-down and side-to-side. The side vent knobs control the amount of outside air entering the vehicle through the side vents. The vents are opened when the vent knob is moved to the up position. The vents are closed when the vent knob is moved to the down position. Keep these vents clear of any obstructions.
1- 51
B670A01GK-GAT
ROTARY TYPE (Not all models)
1 23
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
B670B01A-AAT
Fan Speed Control (Blower Control)
B670E02A-AAT
Temperature Control
4
5
1. Air Conditioning switch 2. Air intake control switch 3. Rear window defroster switch 4. Air flow control switch 5. Fan speed control switch 6. Temperature control switch
6 HGK002
HGK006
This is used to turn the blower fan on or off and to select the fan speed. This blower fan speed, and therefore the volume of air delivered from the system, may be controlled manually by setting the blower control between the "1" and "4" positions.
Cool
Warm HGK007
This control is used to adjust the degree of heating or cooling desired.
1- 52
B670C01FC-EAT
Air Intake Control
HGK016
This is used to select fresh outside air or recirculating inside air. To change the air intake control mode, (Fresh mode, Recirculation mode) push the control button.
FRESH MODE (
) : The indicator light on
the button goes off when the air intake control is
fresh mode.
RECIRCULATION MODE ( ): The indicator light on the button is illuminated when the air intake control is recirculation mode.
With the "Fresh" mode selected, air enters the vehicle from the outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
With the "Recirculation" mode selected, air from within the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.
NOTE: o It should be noted that prolonged opera-
tion of the heating in "Recirculation" mode will give rise to fogging of the windscreen and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment will become stale. In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the "Recirculation" mode selected may result in the air within the passenger compartment becoming excessively dry. o When the ignition switch is turned "ON" the air intake control will change to "Recirculation" mode (regardless of switch position). It is normal operation.
B670D01GK-EAT
Air Flow Control
HGK005
This is used to direct the flow of air. Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or windscreen. Five symbols are used to represent Face, Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost air position.
1- 53
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
If the "Floor-Defrost" mode is selected, the A/C will be on automatically and it will be changed to "Fresh" mode.
HGK021-D
Face-Level Selecting the "Face" mode will cause air to be discharged through the face level vents.
HGK023-D
Floor-Level Air is discharged through the floor vents, windscreen defroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle, side ventilator.
HGK025-D
Defrost-Level Air is discharged through the windscreen defrost nozzle, side defroster nozzle, side ventilator. If the "Defrost" mode is selected, the A/C will be on automatically and it will be changed to "Fresh" mode.
HGK022-D
Bi-Level Air is discharged through the face vents and the floor vents. This makes it possible to have cooler air from the dashboard vents and warmer air from the floor outlets at the same time.
1- 54
HGK024-D
Floor-Defrost Level Air is discharged through the windscreen defrost nozzle, the floor vents, side defroster nozzle, side ventilator.
B690A01S-AAT
HEATING CONTROLS For normal heating operation, set the air intake control to the "Fresh" position and the air flow control to "Floor".
For faster heating, the air intake control should be in the "Recirculation" position.
If the windows fog up, move the air flow control to the "Def" (defroster) position. (The A/C will be on automatically and it will be changed to "Fresh" mode.)
For maximum heat, move the temperature control to "Warm".
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
B720A01FC-EAT
DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING
HGK002
Use the heating/ventilation system to defrost or defog the windscreen: To remove the interior fog on the windscreen; o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( )
position. (The A/C will be on automatically and it will be changed to "Fresh" mode.) o Set the temperature control at the desired position. o Set the fan speed control between "1" and "4" position. To remove the frost or exterior fog on the windscreen; o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position. (The A/C will be on automatically and it will be changed to "Fresh" mode.) o Set the temperature control to the warm. o Set the fan speed control to position "3" or "4".
NOTE: When the A/C is operated continuously on the floor-defrost level ( ) or defrost level ( ), it may cause fog to form on the exterior windscreen by the temperature differential. At this time set the air flow control to the face level position ( )and fan speed control to the low position.
B730A01FC-EAT
Operation Tips o To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from enter-
ing the car through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air intake control at "Recirculation". Be sure to return the control to "Fresh" when the irritation has passed to keep fresh air in the vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comfortable. o Air for the heating/cooling system is drawn in through the grilles just ahead of the windscreen. Care should be taken that these are not blocked by leaves, snow, ice or other obstructions. o To prevent interior fog on the windscreen, set the air intake control to the fresh air ( ) position and fan speed to the desi-red position.
1- 55
B740A01S-AAT
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM (Not all models) Air Conditioning Switch
HGK018
The air conditioning is turned on or off by pushing the A/C button on the heating/air conditioning control panel.
1- 56
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
B740B01S-AAT
Air Conditioning Operation Cooling
HGK002
To use the air conditioning to cool the interior:
o Set the side vent control to "OFF", to shut off
outside air entry.
o Turn on the fan control switch.
o Turnontheairconditioningswitchbypushingin
on the switch. The air conditioning indicator light
should come on at the same time.
o Set the air intake control to "Fresh" mode
(
).
o Set the temperature control to "Cool". ("Cool"
provides maximum cooling. The temperature
may be moderated by moving the control
toward "Warm".)
o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed.
For greater cooling, turn the fan control to
one of the higher speeds or temporarily
select the "Recirculation" position on the air
intake control.
B740C01S-AAT
Dehumidified Heating For dehumidified heating:
o Turn on the fan control switch. o Turn on the air conditioning switch. The air
conditioning indicator light should come on at the same time. o Set the air intake control to "Fresh" mode ( ). o Set the air flow control to "Face". o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed. o For more rapid action, set the fan at one of the higher speeds. o Adjust the temperature control to provide the desired amount of warmth.
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
B970A01Y-EAT
AUTOMATIC HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL SYSTEM (Not all models) Your Hyundai is equipped with an automatic heating and cooling control system controlled by simply setting the desired temperature.
B970B01GK-EAT
Heating and Cooling Controls TYPE A (Without Air Quality System)
TYPE B (With Air Quality System)
1
23 4
5
6
1
2 34
5
6
78
9
10
11
1. Temperature Control Button 2. Defroster Switch 3. Display Window 4. Air Conditioning Switch 5. Rear Window Defroster Switch 6. Fan Speed Control Switch
HGK003
78
9 10 12 11
7. Air Flow Control Switch 8. AUTO (Automatic Control)Switch 9. OFF Switch 10. Air lntake Control Switch 11. Ambient Switch 12. Air Quality System Switch (Not all models)
HGK004
1- 57
B970C02E-AAT
Automatic Operation
HGK020
The FATC (Full Automatic Temperature Control) system automatically controls heating and cooling as follows: 1. Push the "AUTO" switch. The indicator light
will come on confirming that the Face, Floor and/or Bi-Level modes as well as the blower speed and, air conditioner will be controlled automatically.
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
HGK014
2. Push the "TEMP" button to set the desired temperature. The temperature will increase to the maximum 90°F(32°C) by pushing on the button. Each push of the button will cause the temperature to increase by 1°F(0.5°C). The temperature will decrease to the minimum 62°F(17°C) by pushing on the button. Each push of the button will cause the temperature to decrease by 1°F(0.5°C).
NOTE:
If the battery has been discharged or discon-
nected, the temperature mode will reset as
centigrade degrees.
This is a normal condition and you can change
the temperature mode from centigrade to
farenheit as follows;
Press the TEMP button down 3 seconds or
more
with
the
OUTSIDE TEMP
button
held
down.
The
display shows that the unit of temperature is
adjusted to contigrade or fahrenheit.
(°C °F or °F °C)
Photo sensor
G280A01GK-D
NOTE: Never place anything over the sensor which is located on the instrument panel to ensure better control of the heating and cooling system.
1- 58
B995A01Y-GAT
AMBIENT SWITCH
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
B980B01Y-AAT
Fan Speed Control Switch
B670C01GK-EAT
Air Intake Control Switch (Without A.Q.S)
HGK009
Pressing the
OUTSIDE TEMP
button displays the amb-
ient temperature on the display.
B980A01Y-AAT
MANUAL OPERATION
The heating and cooling system can be controlled manually as well by pushing buttons other than the "AUTO" button. In this state, the system sequentially works according to the order of buttons selected. The function of the buttons which are not selected will be controlled automatically. Press the "AUTO" button in order to convert to automatic control of the system.
HGK015
The fan speed can be set to the desired speed by pressing the appropriate fan speed control button. The higher the fan speed is, the more air is delivered. Pressing the "OFF" button turns off the fan.
HGK008-1
This is used to select fresh outside air or recirculation inside air. To change the air intake control mode, (Fresh mode, Recirculation mode) push the control button.
FRESH MODE ( ) : The indicator light on the button goes on when the air intake control is fresh mode.
RECIRCULATION MODE ( ) : The indicator light on the button is illuminated when the air intake control is recirculation mode.
With the "Fresh" mode selected, air enters the vehicle from the outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.
1- 59
With the "Recirculation" mode selected, and air from within the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.
NOTE: o It should be noted that prolonged opera-
tion of the heating system in "recirculation" mode will give rise to fogging of the windscreen and side windows and the air within the passenger compartment will become stale. In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the "Recirculation" mode selected may result in the air within the passenger compartment becoming excessively dry. o When the ignition switch is turned "ON" the air intake control will change to " " mode (regardless of switch position). It is normal operation. The air intake control is operated in "AUTO" mode when turning the ignition to the ON position if the "AUTO" mode was used before shutting off the engine.
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
B980C01GK-EAT
Air Intake Control Switch (With A.Q.S) (Not all models)
HGK010-1
This is used to select fresh outside air or recirculate inside air automatically.
: OFF : ON
Fresh mode : Air enters the vehicle from the outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected.
Recirculation mode : Air from within the passenger compartment will be drawn through the heating system and heated or cooled according to the function selected.
Exhaust gas cutoff mode :
Air enters the vehicle from the outside.
But if exhaust gas enters the vehicle from the
outside, the exhaust gas cutoff mode ( ) is
automatically converted to the
mode, to
prevent exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.
NOTE:
o It should be noted that prolonged opera-
tion of the heating system in recirculation
mode (
) will give rise to mis-ting of
the windscreen and side windows and the
air within the passenger compartment will
become stale. In addition, prolonged use
of the air conditioning with the recircula-
tion mode (
) selected may result in
the air within the passenger compartment
becoming excessively dry.
o When the ignition switch is turned "ON"
the air intake control will change to "Fresh"
mode (regardless of switch position). It is
normal operation. The air intake control is
operated in "AUTO" mode when turning
the ignition to the ON position if the
"AUTO" mode was used before shutting
off the engine.
CAUTION: If the windows fog up with the Recirculation or A.Q.S mode selected, set the air intake control to the Fresh air position or A.Q.S control to "OFF".
1- 60
B980D01Y-AAT
Heating and Cooling System Off Press the "OFF" button to stop the operation of the heating and cooling system.
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
makes it possible to have cooler air from the dashboard vents and warmer air from the floor outlets at the same time.
B980E01GK-EAT
Air Flow Control
HGK019
This is used to direct the flow of air. Air can be directed to the floor, dashboard outlets, or windscreen. Four symbols are used to represent Face, Bi-Level, Floor and Floor-Defrost air position.
HGK021-D
Face-Level When selecting the "Face" mode, the indicator light will come on, causing air to be discharged through the face level vents.
HGK023-D
Floor-Level When selecting the "Floor-Level" mode, the indicator light will come on and the air will be discharged through the floor vents, windscreen defroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle, side ventilator.
HGK022-D
Bi-Level When selecting the "Bi-Level" mode, the indicator light will come on and the air will be discharged through the face vents and the floor vents. This
HGK024-D
1- 61
Floor-Defrost Level When selecting the "Floor-Defrost" mode, the indicator light will come on and the air will be discharged through the windscreen defrost nozzle, the floor vents, side defroster nozzle, side ventilator.
B980F01E-EAT
Defrost Switch
HGK012
When the "Defrost" button is pressed, the " " mode will be automatically selected and the air will be discharged through the windscreen defrost vents. To assist in defrosting, the air conditioning will operate if ambient temperature is higher than 38.3°F(3.5°C) and automatically turns off if the ambient temperature drops below 38.3°F(3.5°C).
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
B740D01A-AAT
Operation Tips o If the interior of the car is hot when you first
get in, open the windows for a few minutes to expel the hot air. o When you are using the air conditioning system, keep all windows closed to keep hot air out. o When moving slowly, as in heavy traffic, shift to a lower gear. This increases engine speed, which in turn increases the speed of the air conditioning compressor. o On steep grades, turn the air conditioner off to avoid the possibility of the engine overheating. o During winter months or in periods when the air conditioner is not used regularly, run the air conditioner once every month for a few minutes. This will help circulate the lubricants and keep your system in peak operating condition.
B760A03GK-EAT
AIR CONDITIONER FILTER (IN FRONT OF BLOWER UNIT)
Outside air
Inside air
Filter
Inside air
Blower fan Evaporator core
Heater core
B760A01E
The air conditioner filter is located in front of the blower uniit behind the glove box. It operates to decrease pollutants from entering the car and to filter the air.
CAUTION: o Replace the filter every 20,000 km (12,000
miles) or once a year. If the car is being driven in severe conditions such as dusty, rough roads, more frequent air filter inspections and changes are required. o When the air flow rate is decreased, it must be checked at an authorized dealer.
1- 62
B750A02A-AAT
STEREO SOUND SYSTEM How Car Audio Works
FM reception
Ionosphere
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
AM reception
Ionosphere
FM radio station
Mountains
Unobstructed area
SSAR010A
AM and FM radio signals are broadcast from transmitter towers located around your city. They are intercepted by the radio antenna on your car. This signal is then received by the radio and sent to your car speakers. When a strong radio signal has reached your vehicle, the precise engineering of your audio system ensures the best possible quality reproduction. However, in some cases the signal coming to your vehicle may not be strong and clear. This can be due to factors such as the distance from the radio station, closeness of other strong radio stations or the presence of buildings, bridges or other large obstructions in the area.
SSAR011A
AM broadcasts can be received at greater distances than FM broadcasts. This is because AM radio waves are transmitted at low frequencies. These long, low frequency radio waves can follow the curvature of the earth rather than travelling straight out into the atmosphere. In addition, they curve around obstructions so that they can provide better signal coverage.
Buildings
Obstructed area
Iron bridges
SSAR012A
FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequencies and do not bend to follow the earth's surface. Because of this, FM broadcasts generally begin to fade at short distances from the station. Also, FM signals are easily affected by buildings, mountains, or other obstructions. These can result in certain listening conditions which might lead you to believe a problem exists with your radio. The following conditions are normal and do not indicate radio trouble:
1- 63
SSAR013A
o Fading - As your car moves away from the radio station, the signal will weaken and sound will begin to fade. When this occurs, we suggest that you select another stronger station.
o Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or large obstructions between the transmitter and your radio can disturb the signal causing static or fluttering noises to occur. Reducing the treble level may lessen this effect until the disturbance clears.
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
SSAR014A
o Station Swapping - As an FM signal weakens, another more powerful signal near the same frequency may begin to play. This is because your radio is designed to lock onto the clearest signal. If this occurs, select another station with a stronger signal.
o Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals being received from several directions can cause distortion or fluttering. This can be caused by a direct and reflected signal from the same station, or by signals from two stations with close frequencies. If this occurs, select another station until the condition has passed.
B750B02Y-AAT
Using a cellular phone or a two-way
radio When a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle, noise may be produced from the audio equipment. This does not mean that something is wrong with the audio equipment. In such a case, use the cellular phone at a place as far as possible from the audio equipment.
CAUTION: When using a communication system such a cellular phone or a radio set inside the vehicle, a separate external antenna must be fitted. When a cellular phone or a radio set is used with an internal antenna alone, it may interfere with the vehicle's electrical system and adversely affect safe operation of the vehicle.
WARNING: Don't use a cellular phone when you are driving. Stop at a safe place to use a cellular phone.
1- 64
JB580B2-A
CARE OF DISC Proper Handling
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Do not grip or pull out the disc with your hand while the disc is being pulled into the unit by the Self Loading mechanism.
Keep Your Discs Clean
SR040B1-F
Care of Cassette Tapes
B850A01L
Handle your disc as shown. Do not drop the disc. Hold the disc so you will not leave fingerprints on the surface. If the surface is scratched, it may cause the pickup to skip signal tracks. Do not affix tape, paper, or gummed labels on the disc. Do not write on the disc.
Damaged Disc Do not attempt to play damaged, warped or cracked discs. It could severely damage the playback mechanism.
Storage When not in use, place your discs in their individual case and store them in a cool place away from the sun, heat, and dust.
B850A02L
Fingerprints, dust, or soil on the surface could cause the pickup to skip signal tracks. Wipe the surface clean with a clean soft cloth. If the surface is heavily soiled, dampen a clean soft cloth in a solution of mild neutral detergent to wipe it clean.
B860A01L
Proper care of your cassette tapes will extend the tape life and increase your listening enjoyment. Always protect your tapes and cassette cases from direct sunlight, severe cold and dusty conditions. When not in use, cassettes should always be stored in the protective cassette case in which they were originally supplied. When the vehicle is very hot or cold, allow the interior temperature to become more comfortable before listening to your cassettes.
o Never leave a cassette inserted in the player when not being played. This could damage the tape player unit and the cassette tape.
o We strongly recommend against the use of tapes longer than C-60 (60 minutes total). Tapes such as C-120 or C-180 are very thin and do not perform as well in the automotive environment.
1- 65
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Head
HGK062-D
o Be sure that the cassette label is not loose or peeling off or tape ejection may be difficult.
o Never touch or soil the actual audio tape surfaces.
o Keep all magnetized objects, such as electric motors, speakers or transformers away from your cassette tapes and tape player unit.
o Store cassettes in a cool, dry place with the open side facing down to prevent dust from setting in the cassette body.
o Avoid repeated fast reverse usage to replay one given tune or tape section. This can cause poor tape winding to occur, and eventually cause excessive internal drag and poor audio quality in the cassette. If this occurs, it can sometimes be corrected by fast winding the tape from end to end several times. If this does not correct the problem, do not continue to use the tape in your vehicle.
Cotton applicator
SSAR042B
o The playback head, capstan and pinch rollers will develop a coating of tape residue that can result in deterioration of sound quality, such as a wavering sound. They should be cleaned monthly using a commercially available head cleaning tape or special solution available from audio specialty shops. Follow the supplier's directions carefully and never oil any part of the tape player unit.
o Always be sure that the tape is tightly wound on its reel before inserting in the player. Rotate a pencil in the drive sprockets to wind up any slack.
B860A04A
NOTE: Look at a tape before you insert it. If the tape is loose, tighten it by turning one of the hubs with a pencil or your finger. If the label is peeling off, do not put it in the player. It may cause the tape jam in the drive mechanism when you try to eject it. Do not leave tape sitting where they are exposed to hot warm or, high humidity, such as on top of the dashboard or in the player. If a tape is exposed to excessively hot or cold, let it reach a moderate temperature before putting it in the player.
1- 66
B870A01A-GAT
ANTENNA Fixed Rod Antenna
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
B870A01F
Your car uses a fixed rod antenna to receive both AM and FM broadcast signals. This antenna is a removable type. To remove the antenna, turn the antenna counterclockwise. To install the antenna, turn the antenna clockwise.
CAUTION: Be sure to remove the antenna before washing the car in an automatic car wash or the antenna may be damaged.
1- 67
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
SC000A1-E
2. DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
C010A01O-EAT
WARNING: ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!
Engine exhaust gases are potentially lethal. If at any time engine exhaust gas is detected within the passenger compartment, move the vehicle to an open area and open all windows.
o Never inhale exhaust gas. Exhaust gases contain Carbon Monoxide which is colourless and odourless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.
o Exhaust System Maintenance.
Ensure that the exhaust system is maintained in good condition and is free from excessive corrosion and damage which may result in leakage. If the vehicle is driven over an object which strikes the exhaust system, ensure that the exhaust system is inspected at the first available opportunity to ensure that no leakage exists.
o Confined Areas. Do not run the engine in confined spaces, allowing the engine to idle in a garage, even when the doors are open is dangerous practice. Only start the engine immediately prior to moving the vehicle out of the garage.
o Prolonged Idling. If it is necessary to allow the vehicle to idle for prolonged periods, ensure that the heating system air intake control is set to the "Fresh" position, the blower is set to high speed operation and that the vehicle is standing in an open area.
o Load Carrying.
If it is necessary to carry long objects which do not permit the hatchback door to be fully closed, the side windows must remain closed and the heating air intake control set to the "Fresh" position with the blower running at the highest speed setting.
To ensure correct operation of the heater system, the air intake grilles at the base of the windscreen must not be obstructed by snow leaves etc..
2
2- 1
SC030A1-E
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE Before you start the engine, you should always: 1. Look around the vehicle to be sure there are
no flat tires, puddles of oil or water or other indications of possible trouble. 2. After entering the car, check to be sure the parking brake is engaged. 3. Check that all windows, and lights are clean. 4. Check that the interior and exterior mirrors are clean and in position. 5. Check your seat, seatback and head restraint to be sure they are in their proper positions. 6. Close all the doors. 7. Fasten your seat belt and be sure that all other occupants have fastened theirs. 8. Turn off all lights and accessories that are not needed. 9. When you turn the ignition switch to "ON' check that all appropriate warning lights are operating and that you have sufficient fuel. 10.Check the operation of warning lights and all bulbs when key is in the "ON" position.
SC040A1-F
COMBINATION IGNITION SWITCH AND STEERING LOCK
To Start the Engine o If your Hyundai is equipped with a manual
transaxle, place the shift lever in neutral and depress the clutch pedal fully. o If your Hyundai has an automatic transaxle, place the shift lever in "P" (park).
2- 2
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
o To start the engine, insert the ignition key and turn it to the "START" position. Release it as soon as the engine starts. Do not hold the key in the "START" position for more that 15 seconds.
NOTE: For safety, the engine will not start if the shift lever is not in "P" or "N" Position (Auto T/A).
SC050A2-E
KEY POSITIONS
WARNING: The engine must never be turned off and the key removed from the ignition key cylinder whilst the vehicle is in motion since the steering lock will operate and control of the vehicle will be lost.
ACC
LOCK
ON
START
C040A01E
"START" The engine is started in this position. It will crank until you release the key.
NOTE: Do not hold the key in the "START" position for more than 15 seconds.
"ON" When the key is at the "ON" position, the ignition and all accessories are available for use. If the engine is not running, the key should not be left at this position since the battery will become discharged and damage to the ignition system may also result. For information regarding engine starting, refer to "STARTING THE ENGINE".
"ACC" When the ignition key is at the "ACC" position, the radio and other accessories may be used.
"LOCK" The ignition key may only be inserted or removed at this position.
SB050B1-E
STEERING WHEEL LOCK
When the key is removed, the steering column lock will be activated and will engage when the steering wheel is turned to the appropriate position. It is not necessary to turn the wheel until locked each time the key is removed since in the event of any unauthorized attempt at removal, the lock will become effective as soon as the steering wheel is turned. To unlock the steering, insert the key and turn to the "ACC" position. If the steering is locked, it may be necessary to rock the steering wheel slightly to facilitate turning the key. Under no circumstances should the key be forced since breakage of the key will occur.
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
SC090D1-F
To Remove the Ignition Key
ACC
LOCK
ON
START
C070C01E
1. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position. 2. Simultaneously push and turn the ignition
key counterclockwise from the "ACC" position to the "LOCK" position. 3. The key can be removed in the "LOCK" position.
SC060A1-E
STARTING THE ENGINE
LOCK
ON
START
C050A01E
1. Ensure that the transaxle is in neutral and that the clutch pedal is held depressed (manual transaxle) or the transaxle selector is at the "P" position (automatic transaxle vehicle).
2. Turn the ignition key to and hold at the "Start" position until the engine starts. When the engine has started, release the key.
2- 3
NOTE: Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds continuously or continue to operate the starter after the engine has started to avoid damaging the starter motor. If the engine makes a false start, allow it and the starter motor to come to rest before attempting to start the engine again. Never attempt to start the engine with the transaxle in gear. Do not depress the accelerator pedal whilst starting the engine. Allow the engine to idle for 20 seconds or so before driving the vehicle.
CAUTION: Do not leave the vehicle unattended whilst idling. Never allow the vehicle to idle or warm up in a confined space (ie garage) longer than is necessary to move the vehicle into an open area.
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
SC060B1-E
FUEL ECONOMY The following suggestions are made to assist in achieving the greatest degree of fuel economy.
o Maintaining a constant check on fuel consumption will enable the most economical use pattern and driving style to be adopted.
o Avoid using the vehicle for very short journeys if possible, particularly when a cold start is involved.
o Ensure that tyre pressures are maintained at the correct level.
o Use only the recommended grade of fuel. o Avoid carrying unnecessary weight, and if a
roof rack is in use, remove it as soon as possible after use. o Anticipate the road and conditions ahead to enable adjustments in speed to be made smoothly. Avoid heavy acceleration and sharp braking. o Avoid cruising at unnecessary high speeds. o Always ensure that the periodic maintenance services are performed by a Hyundai dealer at the time and/or mileage intervals specified. o Use the air conditioning only when necessary.
C070A01GK-EAT
MANUAL TRANSAXLE
A Type
B Type
HGK181
The five speed fully synchronized transaxle is controlled by a floor mounted shift lever upon which the shift pattern is indicated. It is important that when changing gear, the clutch pedal is fully depressed to avoid transaxle damage.
B Type
Mis-shift prevention tab
HGK242
2- 4
When shifting into reverse gear, pull the missshift prevention tab and shift into reverse gear position. (B Type : 6 speed type)
CAUTION: o Do not attempt to engage reverse gear
when the car is in motion. o To avoid damaging the selector mecha-
nism, do not use the gear shift lever as a hand rest. Release the lever immediately the shift is completed. o To avoid premature clutch wear, do not use the clutch pedal as a foot rest, and do not hold the vehicle on a gradient using the clutch. o Ensure that the engine is not over-revved by upshifting before the tachometer needle enters the red zone. o Do not coast with the shift lever at the neutral position. o When descending long gradients, make use of the engine braking to assist the footbrake to avoid brake fade or overheating. o When slippery conditions are encountered, increased caution should be exercised when gear changing, braking or accelerating. Abrupt changes in speed may cause a loss of traction or control of the vehicle.
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
NOTE: o During cold weather, shifting may be dif-
ficult until the transaxle lubricant has warmed up. This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle. o If you 've come to a complete stop and it's hard to shift into 1st or R(Reverse), put the shift lever in N(Neutral) position and let up on the clutch. Press the clutch pedal back down, and then shift into 1st or R(Reverse) gear position. o Do not use the shift lever as a handrest during driving, as this can result in premature wear of the transaxle shift forks.
SC090B1-F
Using the Clutch The clutch should be pressed all the way to the floor before shifting, then released slowly. Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving. This can cause unnecessary wear. Do not partially engage the clutch to hold the car on an incline. This causes unnecessary wear. Use the parking brake to hold the car on an incline. Do not operate the clutch pedal rapidly and repeatedly.
C070E02GK-AAT
RECOMMENDED SHIFT POINTS
The shift points as shown below are recommended for optimum fuel economy and performance.
A Type (5 speed)
Shift from-to
1-2 2-3 3-4 4-5
Recommended
15 mph (20 km/h) 25 mph (40 km/h) 35 mph (55 km/h) 45 mph (75 km/h)
B Type (6 speed)
Shift from-to
1-2 2-3 3-4 4-5 5-6
Recommended
10 mph (15 km/h) 20 mph (35 km/h) 30 mph (50 km/h) 45 mph (70 km/h) 60 mph (95 km/h)
2- 5
C090A04Y-GAT
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
HGK174-D
The highly efficient Hyundai automatic transaxle has four forwards speeds and one reverse speed. The individual speeds are selected automatically, depending on the position of the speed selector lever. The selector lever has 2 gates; the main gate and the manual gate. NOTE: For information on manual gate operation, refer to "Sports Mode". In the main gate, the selector lever has 4 positions, and is equipped with a button to avoid inadvertent wrong selection. NOTE:
Depress the brake pedal and push the button when shifting. Push the button when shifting. The selector lever can be shifted freely. 2- 6
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
The first few shifts on a new vehicle, or if the battery has been disconnected, may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and the shifting sequence will adjust after shifts are cycled a few times by the T.C.M (Transaxle Control Module). CAUTION: Never shift into "R" or "P" position while the vehicle is moving.
C090A02L-D
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster indicate the selector lever position when the ignition is switched "ON". During "D" or sports mode operation, the gear currently in use displays in the numeral indicator.
C090B01A-AAT
The function of each position is as follows:
o P (Park): Use to hold the vehicle in place when parked or while starting the engine. Whenever parking the car, apply the parking brake and shift the selector lever to the "P" (Park) position.
CAUTION: Never place the selector lever in the "P" (Park) position unless the vehicle is fully stopped. Failure to observe this caution will cause severe damage to the transaxle.
C090C01A-AAT
o R(Reverse): Use for backing up the vehicle. Bring the car to a complete stop before shifting the selector lever to "R" position.
C090D02O-AAT
o N (Neutral): In the "N" position, the transaxle is in neutral, which means that no gears are engaged. The engine can be started with the shift lever in "N" position, although this is not recommended except if the engine stalls while the car is moving.
C090E01O-AAT
o D(Drive): Use for normal driving. The transaxle will automatically shift through a four gear sequence.
C090F02GK-GAT
Sports Mode
HGK175-D
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion, sports mode is selected by pushing the selector lever from the "D" position into the manual gate. To return to "D" range operation, push the selector lever back into the main gate. In sports mode, moving the selector lever backwards and forwards can make rapid gearshifts simple. In contrast to a manual transaxle, the sports mode allows gearshifts with the accelerator pedal depressed. UP (+) : Push the lever forward once to shift up one gear. DOWN (-) : Pull the lever backwards once to shift down one gear.
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
CAUTION: o In sports mode, the driver must execute
shifts in accordance with prevailing road conditions, taking care to keep the engine speed below the red zone. o For engine protection, upward shifts are made automatically when the engine rpm reaches the red zone. o By rapidly moving the selector lever backwards (-) twice it is possible to skip one gear by using the sports mode. Since sudden engine braking and/or rapid acceleration can cause a loss of traction, however, downshifts must be made carefully in accordance with the vehicle's speed.
NOTE: o In sports mode, only the four forward
gears can be selected. To reverse or park the vehicle, move the selector lever to the "R" or "P" position as required. o In sports mode, downward shifts are made automatically when the vehicle slows down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear is automatically selected. o To maintain the required levels of vehicle performance and safety, the system may not execute certain gearshifts when the selector lever is operated.
o Before driving away from a stop on a slippery road, push the selector lever forward into the +(UP) position. This causes the transaxle to shift into 2nd gear which is better for smooth driving away on a slippery road. Push the selector lever to the -(DOWN) side to shift back to 1st gear.
C090H01L-GAT
NOTE: o For smooth and safe operation, depress
the brake pedal when shifting from "Neutral" position or "Park" position to a forward or reverse gear. o The ignition key must be in the "ON" position and the brake pedal fully depressed in order to move the shift lever from the "P" (Park) position to any of the other positions. o It is always possible to shift from "R", "N", "D" position to "P" position. The vehicle must be fully stopped to avoid transaxle damage.
2- 7
C090I01L-GAT
CAUTION: o Shift into "R" and "P" position only when
the vehicle has completely stopped. o Do not accelerate the engine in reverse
or any of the forward positions with the brakes applied. o Always apply the footbrake when shifting from "P" or "N", to "R", "D"position. o Do not use the "P" (Park) position in place of the parking brake. Always set the parking brake, shift the transaxle into "P" (Park) position and turn off the ignition when you leave the vehicle, even momentarily. Never leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running. o Check the automatic transaxle fluid level regularly, and add fluid as necessary.
C090N02O-AAT
Good Driving Practices o Never move the gear selector lever from "P"
or "N" to any other position with the accelerator pedal depressed. o Never move the gear selector lever into "P" when the vehicle is in motion. o Be sure the car is completely stopped before you attempt to shift into "R". o Never take the car out of gear and coast down a hill. This may be extremely hazardous. Always leave the car in gear when moving. o Do not "ride" the brakes. This can cause them to overheat and malfunction. Instead,
2- 8
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
when you are driving down a long hill, slow down and shift to a lower gear. When you do this, engine braking will help slow the car. o Slow down before shifting to a lower gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may not be engaged. o Always use the parking brake. Do not depend on placing the transaxle in "P" to keep the car from moving. o Exercise extreme caution when driving on a slippery surface. Be especially careful when braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a slippery surface, an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle to go out of control.
WARNING: o Avoid high cornering speeds. o Do not make quick steering wheel move-
ments, such as sharp lane changes or fast, sharp turns. o Always wear your seat belts. In a collision crash, un unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seatbelt. o The risk of rollover is greatly increased if you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds. o Loss of control often occurs if two or more wheels drop off the roadway and the driver oversteers to reenter the roadway.
o In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes.
o Never exceed posted speed limits.
SC140A1-E
EFFECTIVE BRAKING Braking system performance and friction material life are greatly affected by the driving style adopted. The following suggestions are made to assist in achieving the best results from the braking system.
o Anticipate the road and conditions ahead in order that heavy braking may be avoided.
o When descending long gradients, use the engine to assist in retarding the vehicle to minimize the possibility of brake fade occurring.
o When trailer towing, ensure that the trailer brakes function correctly and use engine braking to assist the vehicle braking system.
o Use only genuine Hyundai replacement brake pads and shoes to ensure consistent friction characteristics and wear rates.
o After driving through deep water (e.g. fording), the brakes may become wet and performance reduced. Always check brake efficiency after emerging from the water and dry the brakes by lightly depressing the brake pedal several times whilst driving slowly.
o Apply the parking brake only when the vehicle is at rest.
o Since the power assistance provided by the brake servo is derived from the engine, coasting with the engine turned off or towing of the vehicle with the engine turned off will result in greatly increased pedal pressures being required to stop the vehicle.
o Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade with the accelerator pedal. This can cause the transaxle to overheat. Always use the brake pedal or parking brake.
SC140B1-E
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
(Not all models) The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designed to prevent wheel lock-up during sudden braking or on hazardous road surfaces. The ABS control module monitors the wheel speed and controls the pressure applied to each brake. Thus, in emergency situations or on slick roads, ABS will increase vehicle control during braking.
NOTE: During ABS operation, a slight pulsation may be felt in the brake pedal when the brakes are applied. Also, a noise may be heard in the engine compartment while braking. These conditions are normal and indicate that the anti-lock brake system is functioning properly.
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
WARNING: ABS will not prevent accidents due to improper or dangerous driving manoeuvres. Even though vehicle control is improved during emergency braking, always maintain a safe distance between you and objects ahead. Vehicle speeds should always be reduced during extreme road conditions. The braking distance for cars equipped with an anti-lock braking system may be longer than for those without it in the following road conditions.
o Rough, gravel or snow-covered roads. o With tire chains installed. o On roads where the road surface is pit-
ted or has different surface height.
These roads should be driven at reduced speeds. The safety features of an ABS equipped vehicle should not be tested by high speed driving or cornering. This could endanger the safety of yourself or others.
C300A03Y-EAT
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM (TCS) (Not all models)
HGK156A-D
On slippery road surfaces, the traction control system (TCS) limits the drive wheels from spinning excessively, thus helping the car to accelerate. It also provides sufficient driving force and steering performance as the car turns at accelerated speeds.
SLIP Control Limits the drive wheels from spinning excessively during starting or while making accelerated turns on slippery roads to avoid losing the driving force of the front wheels.
Driving hints TCS does not actively apply brakes. Be sure to decelerate the car sufficiently before entering curves.
2- 9
CAUTION: When the TCS indicator blinks, SLIP control has been activated. It also means that the road is slippery or your car is accelerating excessively. In this situation, gently release foot pressure from the accelerator pedal and maintain moderate speed.
WARNING: Traction control is only a driving aid; all normal precautions for driving in inclement weather and on slippery road surfaces should be observed.
C310B01O-AAT
TCS ON/OFF Mode When the TCS is running, the TCS indicator light in the instrument cluster will blink. If you turn the system off by pressing the TCS switch, the TCS-OFF indicator light will come on and stay on. In the TCS-OFF mode, the SLIP control will be deactivated. Adjust you driving accordingly. To turn the system back on, press the switch again. The TCS-OFF indicator light should go off.
NOTE: 1) The TCS mode will automatically be
turned ON after the engine is turned off and restarted. 2) When the traction control system is operating properly, you can feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle. This is only the
2- 10
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
effect of brake control and indicates nothing unusual. 3) When the engine starts, a click is heard from the engine compartment; however, this is only the sound of traction control being checked. 4) When moving out of the mud or fresh snow, pressing the accelerator pedal may not cause the engine speed to increase due to TCS operation.
C310D01O-AAT
Indicators and Warning The indicators should illuminate when the ignition key is turned to ON or START but should go out after three seconds. If the indicators do not illuminate, or the TCS or TCS-OFF indicator does not go out after 3 seconds, have it checked by an authorized dealer.
Should there be any unusual conditions in the device while driving, TCS-OFF indicator illuminates as a warning. If TCS-OFF indicator illuminates, pull your car to a safe place and stop the engine. Then, start the engine again to check if the TCS-OFF indicator goes out.
If the indicator remains lit even after the engine has been started, have your car checked by an authorized Hyundai dealer.
NOTE: 1) When the TCS-OFF indicator illuminates,
traction control is automatically deactivated for safety. 2) This warning function is not provided when the driver selects the TCS-OFF mode.
SC150A1-F
DRIVING FOR ECONOMY You can save fuel and get more miles from your car if you follow these suggestions:
o Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moderate rate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts or fullthrottle shifts and maintain a steady cruising speed. Don't race between stoplights. Try to adjust your speed to that of the other traffic so you don't have to change speeds unnecessarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever possible. Always maintain a safe distance from other vehicles so you can avoid unnecessary braking. This also reduces brake wear.
o Drive at a moderate speed. The faster you drive, the more fuel your car uses. Driving at a moderate speed, especially on the highway, is one of the most effective ways to reduce fuel consumption.
o Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal. This can increase fuel consumption and also increase wear on these components. In addition, driving with your foot resting on the brake pedal may cause the brakes to over-
heat, which reduces their effectiveness and may lead to more serious consequences. o Take care of your tires. Keep them inflated to the recommended pressure. Incorrect inflation, either too much or too little, results in unnecessary tire wear. Check the tire pressures at least once a month. o Be sure that the wheels are aligned correctly. Improper alignment can result from hitting curbs or driving too fast over irregular surfaces. Poor alignment causes faster tire wear and may also result in other problems as well as greater fuel consumption. o Keep your car in good condition. For better fuel economy and reduced maintenance costs, maintain your car in accordance with the maintenance schedule in Section 5. If you drive your car in severe conditions, more frequent maintenance is required (see Section 5 for details). o Keep your car clean. For maximum service, your car should be kept clean and free of corrosive materials. It is especially important that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate on the underside of the car. This extra weight can result in increased fuel consumption and also contribute to corrosion. o Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessary weight in your car. Weight is an enemy of good fuel economy. o Don't let the engine idle longer than necessary. If you are waiting (and not in traffic), turn off your engine and restart only when you're ready to go.
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
o Remember, your car does not require extended warm-up. As soon as the engine is running smoothly, you can drive away. In very cold weather, however, give your engine a slightly longer warm-up period.
o Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine. Lugging is driving too slowly in too high a gear resulting in the engine bucking. If this happens to you, shift to a lower gear. Over-revving is racing the engine beyond its safe limit. This can be avoided by shifting at the recommended speeds.
o Use your air conditioning sparingly. The air conditioning system is operated by the engine power so your fuel economy is reduced when you use it.
SC160A1-F
SMOOTH CORNERING Avoid braking or gear changing in corners, especially when roads are wet. Ideally, corners should always be taken under gentle acceleration. If you follow these suggestions, tire wear will be held to a minimum.
SC170A1-E
WINTER MOTORING The onset of winter conditions subject motor vehicles to greater operating demands. Therefore, the following suggestions will assist in maintaining peak performance and reliability during these periods:
ZC170B1-E
Electrical System Winter conditions impose severe demands upon vehicle electrical systems, particularly the charging circuit. The battery condition and performance along with the alternator performance and drive belt condition should be checked prior to the onset of winter.
ZC170C1-E
Anti-freeze/Corrosion inhibitor The cooling system must always contain an Ethylene-Glycol based anti-freeze solution. The system is filled during manufacture with solution of the correct strength which should be checked before the onset of winter and adjusted or changed as required.
NOTE: The anti-freeze solution contains a corrosion inhibitor to prevent degradation of the aluminum castings contained within the engine. Therefore, never, drain the system and refill with water only.
In addition, anti-freeze solution must ALWAYS be used in vehicles fitted with air conditioning, to prevent the heater matrix from freezing and subsequently bursting with the refrigeration system in use.
2- 11
ZC170D1-E
Door Locks Should the door lock mechanism become frozen, a proprietary lock de-icer should be used. Alternatively, warming the door key may thaw the door lock. However, the key should be handled carefully to avoid burning the fingers. Never attempt to thaw a frozen door lock using hot water, since the water will eventually freeze and compound the problem.
NOTE: The proper temperature for using the immobilizer key is from -40°F (-40°C) to 176°F (80°C). If you heat the immobilizer key over 176°F (80°C) to open the frozen lock, it may cause damage to the transponder in its head.
SC170E1-E
Windscreen Washers and Wipers The windscreen washer bottle should be filled with a solution of water and a proprietary winter screen wash additive. The windscreen wipers should not be used if the blades are frozen to the windscreen or if they are covered with snow, before this is removed.
NOTE: Never allow undiluted screen washer fluid additive to spill upon the paintwork or use engine coolant anti-freeze since damage to the paintwork may result.
2- 12
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
o When driving in extreme conditions, the windscreen wiper blades may fail to clear the screen properly due to the formation of ice upon the blade edge. It will therefore be necessary to periodically remove such ice to restore their efficiency.
o If the power operated door mirrors become frozen, attempts to adjust these may damage the mechanism.
o The formation of snow or ice built up inside the wheel arches may interfere with the road wheels or steering mechanism. In such instances, unusual noises or an increase in steering effort may result. Therefore, ensure that the wheel arches are checked periodically and any accumulated snow or ice removed.
o It is advisable to carry emergency equipment including, torch, shovel, tow rope, blankets etc., if a journey is to be undertaken into areas of severe road conditions.
SC200A1-E
TRAILER AND CARAVAN TOWING
Nose weight
Total trailer weight
SSA2200B
WARNING:
It is not recommended that the vehicle be used for towing until the first 1000 miles of Running In has been completed. All Hyundai coupe models are suited to towing trailers and caravans up to the limits indicated on page 2-14. Coupe models fitted with automatic transaxle have a transaxle oil cooler and further transaxle cooling should not be required.
C190E01GK-EAT
TOWING ATTACHMENTS It is strongly recommended that only an Hyundai Approved towing attachment is used to ensure that the loads placed upon the body structure are correctly distributed. The use of a non approved attachment will result in the invalidation of the vehicle warranty. Hyundai towing attachments are designed and constructed to ensure maximum towing performance and ease of fitment. A range of accessories including electrical kits and mirrors are available through the Hyundai dealer network.
It is of the utmost importance that those areas of the vehicle which are subjected to greater stress during towing are maintained in accordance with the recommendations given at the end of this book. In addition, the daily operating checks relating to engine oil, transaxle oil and tyres must be performed at each refuelling to ensure maximum reliability and safety. The use of a proprietary stabiliser will assist in achieving an inherently stable outfit but whilst the use of such equipment will improve the characteristics of a balanced outfit, it will not compensate for a badly loaded and therefore unstable outfit.
The tyres and braking equipment fitted to the trailer or caravan must be maintained in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. Special attention should be paid to tyres which deteriorate through time and expo-
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
sure rather than as a result of the distances towed. The inside walls of the tyres should be inspected along with the outside walls for cracking and damage. The trailer wheel nut torque must be checked on a regular basis, preferably before each towing session.
The trailer towbar hitch and the safety catch mechanism must be maintained in good working order. The trailer break away cable or cable should be inspected for damage and should be attached to the vehicle towing attachment each and every time the trailer is hitched to the vehicle.
Whilst towing, the performance of the vehicle will be reduced in terms of acceleration, braking and handling due to the increased loads placed upon the vehicle. The driver should anticipate the change in characteristics and adjust the driving style in keeping with these changes. Care should be exercised when cornering and braking to prevent the outfit becoming uncontrollable by reducing cornering speeds and allowing increased braking distances.
The driver should exercise care to ensure that when pulling away from rest particularly on uphill gradients the clutch unit is not subjected to excessive slippage which will reduce the useful life of this component. Use of the "Overdrive Off" "2" and "L" positions when driving vehicles with automatic transaxle will assist with braking performance when long down hill
gradients are encountered. Improved acceleration performance will be available by selecting "Overdrive Off","2", or "1" depending upon road speed if it is found that the transaxle unit makes an undesirable upshift whilst hill climbing or overtaking. The transaxle unit should be operated in "D" with the Overdrive "On" under normal circumstances to enhance fuel economy and reduce noise and engine wear.
Gross Axle Weight Gross Vehicle Weight
SSA2200D
CAUTION: The use of a badly loaded or overloaded trailer may result in instability. This following specifications are recommended when towing a trailer. The loaded trailer weight or the Gross Train Weight must not exceed the values in the chart below.
2- 13
Lbs.(kg)
Without Brake Type
With Brake
1.6 L
Type
2.0/2.7 L
Maximum Towable Weight
Trailer 1,212(550) 2,645(1,200) 3,086(1,400)
NOTE: o The total gross vehicle weight with trailer
must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) shown on the vehicle identification plate (see page 8-1). The total gross vehicle weight is the combined weight of the vehicle, driver, all passengers and their luggage, cargo, hitch, trailer nose weight and other optional equipment. o The front or rear axle weight must not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) shown on the vehicle identification plate (see page 8-1). it is possible that your towing package does not exceed the GVWR but exceeds the GAWR. Improper trailer loading and/or too much luggage in the boot can overload the rear axle. Redistribute the load and check the axle weight again.
2- 14
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
o The maximum permissible static vertical load on the coupling device : Lbs.(kg)
1.6 L 2.0/2.7 L
110(50) 132(60)
o The maximum permissible overhang of the coupling point : 38.98 in.(990 mm)
View from below the vehicle Coupling point
HGK260
YC200E1-E
Trailer or Vehicle Towing Tips
1. Before towing, check towbar hitch and safety cable connections as well as proper operation of the trailer running lights, brake lights, and turn signals.
2. Always drive your vehicle at a moderate speed (Less than 60mph).
3. Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal conditions.
4. To maintain engine braking efficiency, do not tow a trailer with the transaxle engaged in an overdrive gear.
5. Always secure items in the trailer to prevent load shift while driving.
6. Check the condition and air pressure of all tires on the trailer and your car. Low tire pressure can seriously affect the handling. Also check the spare tire.
7. The vehicle/trailer combination is more affected by crosswind and buffeting. When being passed by a large vehicle, keep a constant speed and steer straight ahead. If there is too much wind buffeting, slow down to get out of the other vehicle's air turbulence.
8. When parking your car and trailer, especially on a hill, be sure to follow all the normal precautions. Turn your front wheel into the curb, set the parking brake firmly, and put the transaxle in 1st or Reverse (manual) or Park (automatic). In addition, place wheel chocks at each of the trailer's tires.
9. If the trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving, and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your electrical connection at the same time.
10.During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the load is secure, and that the lights and any trailer brakes are still working.
11.Avoid jerky starts, sudden acceleration or sudden stops.
12.Avoid sharp turns and rapid lane changes. 13.Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long
or too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced braking efficiency. 14.When going down a hill, shift into a lower gear and use the engine braking effect. When ascending a long grade, downshift the transaxle to a lower gear and reduce speed to reduce chances of engine overloading and/or overheating. 15.If you have to stop while going uphill, do not hold the vehicle in place by pressing on the accelerator. This can cause the automatic transaxle to overheat. Use the parking brake or footbrake.
DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI
NOTE: When towing check transaxle fluid more frequently.
CAUTION: If overheating should occur when towing, (temperature gauge reads near red zone), taking the following action may reduce or eliminate the problem.
1. Turn off the air conditioner. 2. Reduce highway speed. 3. Select a lower gear when going uphill. 4. While in stop and go traffic, place the
gear selection in park or neutral and idle the engine at a higher speed.
2- 15
SD000A1-E
3. IN CASE OF EMER-
GENCY
SD020A1-E
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START Seek assistance from the nearest Hyundai dealer with regard to the method of ignition and fuel system diagnosis.
WARNING: If the engine refuses to start, no attempt should be made to push or tow start the vehicle. Vehicles with automatic transaxle or fuel injection will not be able to be started in this manner since no drive is transmitted through the automatic transaxle whilst the engine is not running, and in the case of fuel injected derivatives, the fuel pump will not operate under tow start conditions. In addition, if the vehicle is equipped with an exhaust catalyst, damage to the catalyst may result if the vehicle is tow started.
SD020B1-E
IF THE ENGINE CANNOT BE CRANKED 1. If the vehicle is fitted with manual transaxle,
ensure that the clutch pedal is depressed whilst cranking the engine. If the vehicle is fitted with automatic transaxle, ensure that
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
the transaxle selector is at the "P" or"N" position. 2. Check the battery terminals and connections to ensure that these are clean and also tight. 3. If the ignition warning lamps dim when the engine is cranked and the battery terminals have been checked, a discharged battery is indicated. 4. Do not attempt to push or tow start the vehicle, refer to "Jump Starting" for information regarding engine starting when the battery is discharged.
D010C01A-AAT
If Engine Turns Over Normally but Does Not Start 1. Check fuel Level. 2. With the key in the off position, check all
connectors at ignition coils and spark plugs. Reconnect any that may be disconnected or loose. 3. Check the fuel line in the engine room. 4. If engine still refuses to start, call a Hyundai dealer or seek other qualified assistance.
D010D01A-AAT
If Engine Stalls While Driving 1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a
straight line. Move cautionsly off the road to a safe place. 2. Turn on your emergency flashers. 3. Try to start the engine again. If your vehicle will not start, contact a Hyundai dealer or seek other qualified assistance.
SD030A1-E
JUMP STARTING DOHC
3
Battery HGK184 V6
Battery HGK184A CAUTION: Personal injury and damage to the vehicle may occur if jump starting is not performed correctly. If any doubt exists as to how this operation should be performed, seek assistance from qualified personnel.
3-1
WARNING: Motor vehicle batteries contain sulphuric acid and emit hydrogen gas. Protective clothing should be worn and care exercised to prevent the acid from coming into contact with skin or clothing and the vehicle. Naked lights should not be permitted in the vicinity of the battery. Care should be exercised to prevent sparks occurring during connection. If acid accidentally comes into contact with skin or eyes, the affected area should immediately be flushed with copious amounts of water and medical assistance sought.
1. Ensure that the booster battery is 12 volt type. If the booster battery is installed in another vehicle, ensure that the two vehicles are not touching.
2. Turn off all unnecessary electrical equipment in both vehicles.
3. Ensure that the engine of the vehicle providing the jump start is running prior to connection of the jump cables.
4. Connect the red jump cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery and the other end to the positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery.
5. Attach the black jump cable to the negative (-) terminal of the booster battery, and the other end to a ground point within the engine compartment of the vehicle with the flat battery. Do not connect to the negative battery terminal of the flat battery since sparks may be generated with the subsequent risk of explosion.
3-2
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Raise the booster vehicle engine speed to 2,000 r.p.m. and start the engine of the vehicle with the flat battery.
7. Remove jump cables in the reverse order of installation (black cable first).
CAUTION: If the jump cable is incorrectly installed, damage to the vehicle electrical system may occur, in particular the electronic components such as the Fuel Injection system computer and the Automatic Transaxle computer. The battery must never be disconnected whilst the engine is running.
SD040A1-E
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS If the temperature gauge indicates overheating:
1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
2. Place the gear selector lever in "P" (automatic), or neutral (manual transaxle) and set the parking brake. If the air conditioning is on, turn it off.
3. If coolant is running out under the car or steam is coming out from under the bonnet stop the engine. Do not open the bonnet until the coolant has stopped running or the steaming has stopped. If there is no visible loss of coolant and no steam, leave the engine running and check to be sure the engine cooling fan is operating. If the fan is not running, turn the engine off.
4. Check to see if the water pump drive belt is missing. If it is not missing, check to see that it is tight. If the drive belt seems to be satisfactory, check for coolant leaking from the radiator, hoses or under the car. (If the air conditioning had been in use, it is normal for cold water to be draining from it).
WARNING: Whilst the engine is running, keep hands and clothing away from moving parts such as the fan and drive belts to prevent injury.
5. If the water pump drive belt is broken or coolant is leaking out, stop the engine immediately and call the nearest Hyundai dealer for assistance.
WARNING: Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot since steam and boiling water may be ejected from the radiator resulting in burns or scalding.
6. If the cause of the overheating cannot be found, wait until the engine temperature has returned to normal. Then, if coolant has been lost, carefully remove the radiator cap and add water to bring the fluid level in the reservoir up to the base of the radiator fill opening. Fill the coolant expansion tank to the halfway mark.
7. Proceed with caution until it is established that the engine is operating normally. If the engine overheats repeatedly, the advice of a Hyundai dealer should be sought.
CAUTION: Serious loss of coolant indicates there is a leak in the cooling system and this should be checked as soon as possible by a Hyundai dealer.
D040A01GK-EAT
TEMPORARY SPARE TYRE The following instructions for the temporary spare tyre should be observed:
1. Check inflation pressure as soon as practical after installing the spare tyre, and adjust to the specified pressure. The tyre pressure should be periodically checked and maintained at the specified pressure while the tyre is stored.
2. The spare tyre should only be used temporari-
Spare Tyre Pressure
Type Size Inflation Pressure
T125/70 R16 420 kPa (60 psi)
ly and should be returned to the luggage compartment as soon as the original tyre can be repaired or replaced. 3. Continuous use at speeds of over 50 mph (80 km/h) is not recommended.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. As the temporary spare tyre is specifically designed for your car, it should not be used on any other vehicle.
5. The temporary spare tyre should not be used on any other wheels, nor should standard tyre, snow tyre, wheel covers or trim rings be used with the temporary spare wheel. If such use is attempted, damage to these items or other car components may occur.
6. The temporary spare tyre pressure should be checked once a month while the tyre is stored.
CAUTION: o Do not use snow chains with your tempo-
rary spare tyre. o Do not use more than one temporary spare
tyre at a time.
SD060A1-E
IN THE EVENT OF A PUNCTURE If a puncture occurs whilst driving the vehicle: 1. Bring the car to rest as soon as it is safe to
do so and with the minimum amount of braking required which will assist in maintaining the maximum amount of control. The vehicle should be parked wherever possible upon firm level ground to facilitate wheel changing. 2. If the vehicle is creating a hazard and the road conditions do not permit the wheel to be changed safely, assistance should be sought. 3. Passengers must not be allowed to remain inside the vehicle during wheel changing. If a puncture occurs whilst the vehicle is on a
motorway, the passengers should take refuge on the motorway embankment to avoid the possibility of injury occurring should the vehicle be struck by other motorway traffic. 4. Wheel changing should be performed according to the following instructions.
SD070A1-E
CHANGING A FLAT TYRE
D060A01GK
It is of the utmost importance that care is exercised when changing road wheels. Ensure that the parking brake is set and that the gear shift lever is in reverse (P, if the vehicle has automatic transaxle).
3-3
D060K01FC-EAT
Wheel Cap (Not all models)
Groove
HGK224
1. Wrap a piece of cloth around the tip of the driver to avoid scratching.
2. Insert a driver into the groove of the wheel cap and pry gently to remove the wheel cap.
3. Change the flat tyre. Groove
Boss
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
4. Reinstall the wheel cap by fitting the boss of the wheel cap in the groove of the wheel, hitting the centre of the wheel cap with hand.
D060A01GK-EAT
1. Obtain Spare Tyre and Tool
HGK189
Remove the spare wheel, jack and tool bag from the boot.
The jack is located in the right side of luggage trim. Remove the jack cover with screwing the bolts. Turn the jack at the end counterclockwise to low the jack height by using driver or wrench bar and take out it from the bracket.
SD070D1-E
2. Block the Wheel Flat tyre
HGK192
Block the wheel that is diagonally opposite from the flat tyre to prevent the vehicle from rolling when the car is raised on the jack.
HGK196
3-4
HGK191
SD070E1-E
3. Loosen Wheel Nuts
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SD070F1-F
4. Put the Jack in Place
D060F02E-EAT
5. Raising the Car
Wrench bar
HGK193
The wheel nuts should be loosened slightly before raising the car. To loosen the nuts, turn the wheel brace counterclockwise. Ensure that the wheel brace socket is seated properly on the nut and that it cannot slip. Do not remove the nuts at this stage.
HGK186
The base of the jack should be placed on firm, level ground. The jack should be positioned as shown in the drawing.
Wheel nut wrench
HFC4022
After inserting a bar into the wheel nut wrench, install the bar into the jack as shown in the drawing. To raise the vehicle, turn the wheel nut wrench clockwise. As the jack begins to raise the vehicle, double check that it is properly positioned and will not slip. If the jack is on soft ground or sand, place a board, brick, flat stone or other object under the base of the jack to keep it from sinking. Raise the car high enough so that the fully inflated spare tire can be installed. To do this, you will need more ground clearance than is required to remove the flat tyre.
WARNING: Do not get under the car when it is supported by the jack! This is very dangerous as the jack could fall and cause serious injury or death. No one should stay in the car while the jack is being used.
3-5
D060G02Y-EAT
6. Changing Wheels
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
D060H02Y-EAT
7. Reinstall Wheel Nuts
HGK232
Loosen the wheel nuts and remove them with your fingers. Slide the wheel off the studs and lay it flat so it cannot roll away. To put the wheel on the hub, pick up the spare tyre, line up the holes with the studs and slide the wheel onto them. If this is difficult, tip the wheel slightly and get the top hole in the wheel lined up with the top stud. Then jiggle the wheel back and forth until the wheel can be slid over the other studs.
STA3071H
WARNING: Wheels and wheel cover may have sharp edges. Handle them carefully to avoid possible severe injury.
Before putting the wheel into place, be sure that there is nothing on the hub or wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel, etc.) that interferes with the wheel from fitting solidly against the hub. If there is, remove it. If there is not good contact on the mounting surface between the wheel and hub, the wheel nuts could come loose and cause the loss of a wheel. Loss of a wheel may result in loss of control of the vehicle. This may cause serious injury or death.
D060H01GK
To reinstall the wheel hold it on the studs put the wheel nuts on the studs and tighten them finger tight. The nuts should be installed with their small diameter ends directed inward. Jiggle the tyre to be sure it is completely seated, then tighten the nuts as much as possible with your fingers again.
3-6
SD070J1-E
8. Lower Vehicle and Tighten Nuts
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SD070K1-E
AFTER CHANGING WHEELS
SD080A1-E
VEHICLE TOWING OR RECOVERY
HGK194
Lower the car to the ground turning the wheel nut wrench counterclockwise. When the vehicle is firmly on the ground, remove the jack and tighten the wheel nuts securely. At the first available opportunity, the wheel nut torque should be checked with a suitable torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel: 90-110 Nm. (65-80 lb.ft)
HGK195
The pressure of the spare tyre should be checked at the first available opportunity. If any doubt exists as to the tyre pressure, the vehicle should be driven slowly to the nearest service station and the tyre pressure checked and adjusted as required. If the valve cap is lost from any of the valves, a replacement should be obtained and fitted at the first available opportunity. The valve cap prevents the ingress of dirt which may cause the valve to stick and therefore leak and is part of the valve sealing function.
Ensure that the spare wheel, jack and wheel nut wrench as well tools are correctly located in the boot of the vehicle to prevent damage and noise.
D080A01GK
o OK FOR AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL TRANSAXLE EQUIPPED VEHICLE
CAUTION: An incorrect tow or recovery could result in serious damage to the vehicle. If any damage to the suspension, steering or transaxle is apparent or suspected, a towing dolly must be used.
3-7
SD090A1-E
Manual Transaxle Vehicle
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
since the steering lock is not designed to withstand the force required to hold the front wheels straight during the tow. o The vehicle must not be towed with the front wheels on the ground for more than thirty miles.
HGK199
o OK FOR AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL TRANSAXLE EQUIPPED VEHICLE WITH NO DAMAGE
The vehicle may be towed by the conventional method using the towing eye at the front of the vehicle as an attachment point. In addition, a suspended tow with or without an towing dolly may be used with either the front or the rear wheels being suspended, provided the above caution is observed.
In addition, the following points must be noted: o If towing by conventional means, the ignition
key must be at the "ACC" position, otherwise the steering lock will be activated. o Because the brake system and steering system power assistance is derived from the engine, the amount of effort required to stop or steer the vehicle will be greater than normal. o If a suspended tow is being given to the rear, the ignition key must be at the "ACC" position
3-8
SD100A2-E
Automatic Transaxle Vehicle
HGK200
o NOT OK FOR AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE QUIPPED VEHICLE
o OK FOR MANUAL TRANSAXLE The vehicle may be towed by the conventional method using the towing eye at the front of the vehicle as an attachment point. In addition, a suspended tow may be given to the front of the vehicle without an towing dolly. In the event of a suspended tow being given to the rear of the vehicle, the use of an towing dolly is imperative.
D080C01GK
o OK FOR AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL TRANSAXLE EQUIPPED VEHICLE
CAUTION: The following restriction must be observed in order to avoid serious damage to the transaxle. The vehicle must never be towed from the rear with the front wheels on the ground. The vehicle must not be towed until transaxle fluid has been added to bring the level up to the "HOT" marking on the dipstick. (The level will need to be reduced again after towing). The vehicle must not be towed at speeds faster than 25 mph. or distances greater than fifty miles. The general points regarding the steering lock etc. described in the preceding section (Manual transaxle vehicle) should be observed.
D120A01A-EAT
IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS Information about the key of immobilizer system will be found on page 1-2.
SE000A1-E
4. APPEARANCE
CARE
SE020A1-E
PROTECTING YOUR HYUNDAI
FROM CORROSION By using the most advanced design and construction practices, every Hyundai is built to retain the original factory finish for many years. However, long term durability is also greatly dependant upon maintaining the various protection systems and coatings used in manufacture since constant, exposure to the elements will result in a breakdown and loss of effectiveness. The following suggestions are made to assist in the maintenance of the vehicle bodywork.
SE030A1-E
UNDERBODY COATINGS Every Hyundai passenger car receives a full underbody and cavity injection treatment during production. In order that this treatment may retain maximum effectiveness it is recommended that the underbody receives a power wash and a thorough inspection after each winter season. In doing so any accumulations of mud, which act as moisture traps and combine with road salts to accelerate corrosion will be removed. In order to maintain the Anti Perforation Warranty, the requirements regarding the
APPEARANCE CARE
retreatment programme must be observed in accordance with the Terms and Conditions outlined in the separate Anti Perforation Warranty Booklet.
NOTE: The underbody should never be steam cleaned since the underbody coating may be removed by this process. During the interim period between power washing the underbody, the more vulnerable areas such as wheel arches should be hosed off particularly during the winter season to prevent prolonged contact with road salts. Ensure that the various drain points located at the bottom of the door panels and sills are kept clear to prevent water from becoming trapped within the cavities. Wherever possible, the parking of the vehicle in a confined, poorly ventilated location (a garage for example) should be avoided when the vehicle is wet or is covered with snow or ice. Under these conditions, the internal cavities of the vehicle will remain damp for prolonged periods of time which will encourage corrosion. Parking the vehicle where good ventilation exists (outside for example) is preferable.
E030A01GK-AAT
VALETING Regular cleaning of the exterior paintwork serves two important functions. Firstly, the removal of
abrasive dirt and contaminants will maintain the
lustre of the paintwork and will prevent
discolouration and dulling due to prolonged con-
tact.
Secondly, the presence of damage through im-
pact or abrasion will be apparent allowing early
rectification to be made thus preventing corro-
sion from becoming established and spreading
beneath the paint film. To avoid "water spotting"
the vehicle should not be washed in direct sun-
light particularly in the case of vehicles having
dark body colours. The heat from the sun rays is
absorbed by the paint film increasing the surface
temperature. This action causes water used for
washing to evaporate quickly leaving behind the deposits from the water and the shampoo used.
4
Use only a shampoo intended for the purpose
and ensure that the body work is thoroughly
wetted to soften the dirt film prior to attempting to
remove this.
After removing the dirt film with a soft sponge, the
body work should be thoroughly rinsed and then
dried with a good quality chamois leather to
prevent streaking or spotting of the paint work.
Household detergents, solvents and abrasive
cleaning materials should not be used in order to
avoid damaging the paint film.
High pressure car washes may cause water to
enter your vehicle.
Plastic wheel covers should be cleaned using a
sponge and water. Cast alloy wheels should be
cleaned using a mild soap or neutral detergent.
Abrasive compounds must not be used since in
the event of these damaging the lacquer coating,
4-1
oxidization of the aluminium wheel will occur, spoiling the appearance. The use of an a toothbrush will facilitate cleaning between the wheel "spokes".
SE040B1-E
STAIN/SPOT REMOVAL Should tree sap, dead insects or tar prove to be difficult to remove from the paint film, turpentine or a proprietary paint cutting compound may be used. Ensure that the area to be cleaned is not rubbed intensively to prevent breaking through the colour coat and exposing the under coat.
SE040C1-E
POLISHING The exterior paint work should be polished with a proprietary wax polish when water no longer collects in bead form on the paint work. The instructions of the product manufacturer should be adhered to.
SE040E1-E
BUMPER MAINTENANCE The special material from which the bumpers are manufactured warrants special attention to preserve the appearance of the bumpers. Avoid contact with battery electrolyte or brake fluid and ensure that accidental spillages are immediately flushed with water. Do not use abrasive cleaning materials which may damage the bumpers.
4-2
APPEARANCE CARE
Avoid subjecting the bumpers to high temperatures such as may be encountered in high bake paint ovens.
SE040F1-E
ACCIDENT REPAIRS In the event of the body work sustaining damage, the following points should be noted prior to repairs being undertaken. If body panels are replaced or repaired, anti corrosion treatment must be applied to the repair area. The product used must be compatible with those used in manufacture. It is recommended that repairs are entrusted to a Hyundai dealer to ensure that replacement parts used are of the same high quality as those used in manufacture of the vehicle and that the correct repair methods and materials will ensure adequate levels of corrosion protection and the continued validity of the Anti Perforation Warranty.
SE050A1-E
INTERIOR During the winter period, it is possible that the passenger compartment flooring may become wet from damp footwear or quantities of snow adhering to footwear. The carpet should not be allowed to remain in this condition since the carpet may begin to create musty smells and will promote corrosion of the floor pan in addition to the carpet and under felt beginning to rot.
SE050C1-E
INTERIOR VALETING The soft trim and carpets should be maintained with the regular use of a vacuum cleaner. Heavy soiling should be removed with a dry cleaning agent recommended for this purpose following the instructions of the product manufacturer. Paint thinner, solvents or other such cleaning materials should not be used since damage to the upholstery may result.
SE050D1-E
SEAT BELTS Seat belts should be cleaned only with a mild soap solution. Strong detergents, solvens or bleaches may damage the belt webbing and therefore reduce the effectiveness of the belt. Belts which display signs of fraying, wear of cut should be replaced.
SE050E1-E
WINDOWS A proprietary glass cleaner should be used to clean the inside of the windows. However, the rear heated windscreen must only be cleaned using a light horizontal cleaning action. Care should be exercised to avoid the use of abrasive cleaners or contact with items of jewellery which may damage the heating elements.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
SF000A1-E
5. VEHICLE MAINTE-
NANCE REQUIRE-
MENTS
SF020A1-E
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING REQUIREMENTS To ensure the continued reliability and safety of the vehicle, certain routine maintenance operations are required at specific mileage or time intervals. It is the responsibility of the vehicle owner to ensure that the maintenance schedules shown in both this Owners Manual and the Warranty and Service Passport are adhered to. The new vehicle warranty may be invalidated if the routine maintenance operations are not performed in line with the recommendations outlined and the safety and durability of the vehicle adversely affected. It is recommended that all maintenance operations with the exception of the daily operating checks are entrusted to a Hyundai dealer to ensure that the latest repair and maintenance procedures and specialized servicing tools are employed. In addition, the use of genuine Hyundai replacement parts will ensure that the vehicle safety and performance will not be compromised.
NOTE: The inspection and testing of certain electronic fuel injection/engine management and automatic transmission control systems require specialised electronic equipment specifically designed for Hyundai vehicles. The use of general purpose electrical test equipment may result in damage to the control unit microprocessors.
SF020C1-E
Specified Scheduled Procedures The Specified scheduled procedures are listed in the maintenance charts beginning at page 52. The operations specified must be performed at the time or mileage intervals shown irrespective of whether the mileage interval has been reached before the specified time interval. Certain lubricants and components degrade with both time and mileage (e.g. engine oil and brake fluid) and therefore it is not permissable to base the maintenance schedule upon mileage alone. It is strongly recommended that the maintenance operations are performed by the factory-trained or distributor-trained technicians at your Hyundai dealer because of the need for specialized knowledge and tooling and to ensure that no possibility of invalidating the manufacturers warranty exists. The maintenance schedules relate to vehicles operated under normal conditions, vehicles
which are operated under adverse conditions will require more frequent maintenance which is described at page 5-4.
SF030B1-E
SERVICE HISTORY It is important that all scheduled maintenance services are recorded in the warranty and service passport to ensure that proof of maintenance is available when warranty service is required.
5
5-1
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
SF040A3-E
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
In order to ensure the continued safety, reliability and longevity of the vehicle, the following maintenance service operations should be performed at the time or mileage intervals specified. It is recommended that all routine maintenance services are entrusted to a
Hyundai dealer to ensure that the manufacturers recommended procedures are employed and that only genuine Hyundai replacement parts are used. Incorrect maintenance techniques or the use of non genuine replacement parts may invalidate the vehicle warranty.
F030B01GK-EAT
R : REPLACE I : INSPECT AND, AFTER INSPECTION, CLEAN, ADJUST, REPAIR OR REPLACE IF NECESSARY
NO.
DESCRIPTION
MILES X 1000 MONTHS
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
1 ENGINE OIL & FILTER(SG OR ABOVE)
See Note (1)
2 DRIVE BELT
2.0 DOHC CVVT (ALT, W/PUMP, P/STR'G)
1.6 DOHC / 2.7 V6 (AUTO-TENSIONER, ALT, P/STR'G, A/CON)
3 FUEL FILTER(MPI TYPE)
4 FLUID LEAKS
5 TIMING BELT
6 VENTILATION HOSE
7 AIR CLEANER FILTER
8 SPARK PLUG(1.6/2.0L)
SPARK PLUGS(2.7L)
9 VALVE CLEARENCE (2.0 DOHC CVVT)
Note : (1) SF OR LOWER: EVERY 6,000 MILES OR 6 MONTHS: "R"
FOR 2.0 L DOHC VVT : SH (API), GF-1 (ILSAC) ABOVE (2) FOR EVERY 60,000 MILES OR 48 MONTHS, WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST : "I" 5- 2
10 20 30 40 50 60 12 24 36 48 60 72
RRRRRR
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
R
I
R
I
R
R
R
R
R
See Note (2)
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
F030C02GK-EAT
R : REPLACE I : INSPECT AND, AFTER INSPECTION, CLEAN, ADJUST, REPAIR OR REPLACE IF NECESSARY
NO.
DESCRIPTION
GENERAL MAINTENANCE 1 COOLING SYSTEM 2 COOLANT 3 COOLANT SPECIFIC GRAVITY 4 MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL 5 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID 6 BRAKE PIPES, HOSES, AND CONNECTIONS 7 BRAKE FLUID 8 CLUTCH FLUID 9 REAR BRAKE LININGS AND CYLINDERS 10 BRAKE PADS 11 SUSPENSION AND STEERING SYSTEM 12 FRONT SUSPENSION BALL JOINTS 13 POLLEN FILTER (For Blower unit) 14 REAR WHEEL BEARINGS 15 TYRE CONDITION AND PRESSURE (incl. Spare) 16 LUBRICATE LOCKS AND HINGES 17 CHECK ALL ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 18 ROAD TEST 19 CHECK ALL SYSTEMS WITH HI-SCAN 20 CHECK 4 GAS 21 DRIVE SHAFT & BOOT
MILES X 1000 MONTHS
10 20 30 40 50 60 12 24 36 48 60 72
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
R
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
I
R
I
R
I
R
I
R
I
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
RR RRRR
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5-3
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
F040A02GK-EAT
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE ITEM
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER
1.6 DOHC / 2.7 V6
2.0 DOHC CVVT
AIR CLEANER FILTER
SPARK PLUGS
TIMING BELT
BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS
REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE
STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/
LOWER ARM BALL JOINT
DRIVESHAFTS & BOOTS
MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID
POLLEN FILTER(FOR BLOWER UNIT)
MAINTENANCE OPERATION
R
R R R I I
I
I R R R
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
EVERY 4,500MILES OR 6 MONTHS EVERY 3,000MILES OR 6 MONTHS MORE FREQUENTLY MORE FREQUENTLY EVERY 37,000MILES OR 48MONTHS MORE FREQUENTLY MORE FREQUENTLY
MORE FREQUENTLY
EVERY 9,000MILES OR 12 MONTHS EVERY 60,000MILES EVERY 27,000MILES MORE FREQUENTLY
DRIVING CONDITION
A, B, C, F, H
C, E B, H D, E, F, G C, D, G, H C, D, G, H
C,D,E,F
C, D, E, F, G A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J A, C, E, F, G, H, I C, E
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS A - Repeated short distance driving B - Extensive idling C - Driving in dusty, rough roads D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials
or in very cold weather E - Driving in sandy areas
5- 4
F - More than 50% driving in heavy city traffic during hot weather above 90°F (32°C)
G - Driving in mountainous areas H - Towing a trailer I - Driving as a rental car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towing J - Continuous driving over 100 MPH
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
6ZF060A1-A
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
6ZF060M1-A
o Engine oil and filter The engine oil and filter should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. If the car is being driven in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter changes are required.
6ZF060B2-A
o Drive belts Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. Drive belts should be checked periodically for proper tension and adjusted as necessary.
6ZF060C1-A
o Fuel filter A clogged filter can limit the speed at which the vehicle may be driven, damage the emission system and cause hard starting. If an excessive amount of foreign matter accumulates in the fuel tank, the filter may require replacement more frequently. After installing a new filter, run the engine for several minutes, and check for leaks at the connections.
6ZF060D1-A
o Fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Replace any damaged or leaking parts immediately.
6ZF060E1-A
o Timing belt Inspect all parts related to the timing belt for damage and deformation. Replace any damaged parts immediately.
6ZF060G1-A
o Vapour hose and fuel filler cap The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should be inspected at those intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. Make sure that a new vapour hose or fuel filler cap is correctly replaced.
6ZF060F1-A
o Vacuum, crankcase ventilation hoses
Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence of heat and/or mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration. Particular attention should be paid to examining those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect the hose routing to assure that the hoses
do not come in contact with any heat source, sharp edges or moving component which might cause heat damage or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose connections, such as clamps and couplings, to make sure they are secure, and that no leaks are present. Hoses should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of deterioration or damage.
6ZF060H1-A
o Air cleaner filter A Genuine Hyundai air cleaner filter is recommended when the filter is replaced.
6ZF060J1-A
o Spark plugs Make sure to install new spark plugs of the correct heat range.
F060N02E-EAT
o Valve Clearance Inspect excessive valve noise and/or engine vibration and adjust if necessary. A qualified technician should perform the operation.
5-5
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
6ZF070B1-A
o Cooling system Check the cooling system part, such as radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Replace any damaged parts.
6ZF070C1-A
o Coolant The coolant should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule.
6ZF070D1-A
o Manual transaxle oil Inspect the manual transaxle oil according to the maintenance schedule.
NOTE: If the oil level is low, check for possible leaks before adding oil. Do not overfill.
F070E03A-AAT
o Automatic transaxle fluid The fluid level should be in the "HOT" range of the dipstick, after engine and transaxle are at normal operating temperature. Check the Automatic Transaxle Fluid level with the engine running and the transaxle in neutral, with the parking brake properly applied. Use DIAMOND ATF SP-III, SK ATF SP- III when adding or changing fluid.
6ZF070F1-A
o Brake hoses and lines Visually check for proper installation, chafing, cracks, deterioration and any leakage. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.
6ZF070G2-A
o Brake fluid Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir. The level should be between "MIN" and "MAX" marks on the side of the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4.
6ZF070H1-A
o Rear brake drums and linings/ parking brake
Check the rear brake drums and linings for scoring, burning, leaking fluid, broken parts, and excessive wear. Inspect the parking brake system including the parking brake lever and cables. For detailed service procedures, refer to the Shop Manual.
6ZF070J1-A
o Brake pads, calipers and rotors Check the pads for excessive wear, discs for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage.
6ZF070K1-A
o Exhaust pipe and muffler Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and hangers for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Start the engine and listen carefully for any exhaust gas leakage. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.
6ZF070L1-A
o Suspension mounting bolts Check the suspension connections for looseness or damage. Retighten to the specified torque.
6ZF070M1-A
o Steering gear box, linkage & boots/ lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine off, check for excessive freeplay in the steering wheel. Check the linkage for bends or damage. Check the dust boots and ball joints for deterioration, cracks, or damage. Replace any damaged parts.
6ZF070N1-A
o Power steering pump, belt and hoses
Check the power steering pump and hoses for leakage and damage. Replace any damaged or leaking parts immediately. Inspect the power steering belt for evidence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear, oiliness and proper tension. Replace or adjust it if necessary.
5- 6
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
6ZF070P1-A
o Driveshafts and boots Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Replace any damaged parts and, if necessary, repack the grease.
6ZF070Q1-A
o Air conditioning refrigerant Check the air conditioning lines and connections for leakage and damage. Check air conditioning performance according to the relevant shop manual if necessary.
5-7
OWNER MAINTENANCE
SG000A1-E
6. OWNER MAINTENANCE
G010A01GK-EAT
ENGINE COMPARTMENT (1.6 DOHC)
1
2
34
5
CAUTION: When inspecting or servicing the engine, you should handle tools and other heavy objects carefully so that the plastic rocker cover of the engine is not damaged.
6
67
8
9
10
1. Clutch fluid reservoir (Not all models) 2. Engine oil filler cap 3. Brake Booster 4. Brake fluid reservoir 5. Relay box
11
12 13
6. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir cap 7. Power steering fluid reservoir 8. Engine coolant reservoir 9. Engine oil level dipstick 10. Radiator cap
HGK238-D
11. Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick (Not all models)
12. Air cleaner 13. Battery
6-1
OWNER MAINTENANCE
G010A01GK-EAT
ENGINE COMPARTMENT (2.0 DOHC CVVT)
12
34
5
CAUTION: When inspecting or servicing the engine, you should handle tools and other heavy objects carefully so that the plastic rocker cover of the engine is not damaged.
67
8
9
10
1. Clutch fluid reservoir (Not all models) 2. Engine oil filler cap 3. Brake Booster 4. Brake fluid reservoir 5. Relay box
6-2
11
12 13
6. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir cap 7. Power steering fluid reservoir 8. Engine coolant reservoir 9. Engine oil level dipstick 10. Radiator cap
HGK059-D
11. Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick (Not all models)
12. Air cleaner 13. Battery
G010B01GK-EAT
ENGINE COMPARTMENT (2.7 V6)
1
2
OWNER MAINTENANCE
34
5
6
CAUTION: When inspecting or servicing the engine, you should handle tools and other heavy objects carefully so that the plastic rocker cover of the engine is not damaged.
7
89
10
11
12
13
1. Power steering fluid reservoir 2. Clutch fluid reservoir (Not all models) 3. Brake Booster 4. Brake fluid reservoir 5. Air filter element
6. Relay box 7. Windscreen washer fluid reservoir cap 8. Engine coolant reservoir 9. Engine oil level dipstick 10. Radiator cap
HGK209-D
11. Engine oil filler cap 12. Automatic transaxle fluid level dipstick
(Not all medels) 13. Battery
6-3
SG020B1-E
DAILY OPERATING CHECKS The following items should be checked on a daily basis or whenever the vehicle is refuelled, whichever occurs sooner.
o Engine oil level. o Engine coolant level. o Power steering fluid level. o Brake fluid level. o Windscreen washer fluid level. o Battery condition. o Tyre condition and pressures. o Operation and cleanliness of all lighting equip-
ment. o Windscreen wiper and washer operation. o Horn operation. o Warning lamp operation. o Adjustment and cleanliness of mirrors. o Seat and seat belt adjustment and operation. o Fluid leakage.
The vehicle must not be driven if the daily operating checks indicate that any item of equipment related to the safety or roadworthiness of the vehicle is not functioning correctly.
OWNER MAINTENANCE
SG030A1-E
ENGINE OIL The correct engine oil level is of paramount importance. An excessively high or low oil level may result in irreparable damage being sustained by the engine. The engine oil level must be checked on a daily basis or whenever the vehicle is refuelled, whichever occurs sooner. In addition, it is imperative that only an approved grade and specification of oil is used to avoid the possibility of serious engine damage and premature wear. The use of "budget price" oil is a false economy that must be avoided if the maximum reliability and useful life is to be obtained from the vehicle.
SG030B02GK-E
Recommended Oil
1.6 DOHC 2.7 L V6
20W-40 20W-50
15W-40 15W-50
10W-30 10W-40 10W-50
5W-40 5W-30
5W-20
°C -25 -15 -10 0 °F -13 5 -14 32
10 20 50 68
40 104 SSA6030B
A multi grade oil having a specification which meets A.P.I. specification of SH, SG or above is recommended. The oil viscosity should be selected according to the operating environment of the engine by means of the table shown below. The engine oil recommendations are complete in themselves and the use of additives is neither required nor recommended. The use of engine oil additives may result in invalidation of the vehicle warranty.
6-4
2.0 L DOHC CVVT
OWNER MAINTENANCE
SG030C1-E
Engine Oil Level
DOHC
V6
SG030D1-E
ENGINE OIL REPLENISHMENT
DOHC
V6
HGK259
See the lubrication chart on the page 9-3.
NOTE: o The use of a 5W-20 multi grade oil is not
recommended for sustained high speed use. o When replacing or adding the oil, below SAE 10W-30 is recommended. Using a high viscosity oil of SAE 15W-40 and over makes malfunction of CVVT engine when the engine is cool.
HGK210
The engine oil level should be checked with the engine at normal operating temperature and the vehicle parked upon level ground. Prior to checking the level, the vehicle should be allowed to stand for several minutes after the engine has been switched off to allow the oil to drain back to the sump. Withdraw the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag. Replace the dipstick fully and withdraw again when the oil level may be read from the stick. Normal oil level is indicated when the oil is present between the two marks on the stick. It is not necessary to add oil if the level is above the lower mark and in any case, oil must not be added to the degree that the level exceeds the upper mark. Replace the dipstick fully after checking the level.
HGK211
If the indicated oil level is at or below the lower mark of the dipstick, oil should be added until the level is at or below the upper mark. To add oil to the engine, remove the filler cap by rotating in an counterclockwise direction and pour engine oil into the engine. Before checking the level again, allow several minutes for the oil to drain into the sump. Replace the oil filler cap rotating it in a clockwise direction until tight. The quantity of oil required to raise the level from the minimum to maximum level is approximately 1 litre.
6-5
G350A01A-GAT
ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION Function of engine oil Engine oil has the primary function of lubricating and cooling the inside of the engine.
Engine oil consumption It is normal that an engine should consume some engine oil while normal driving. The cause of oil consumption in a normal engine are as follows; o Engine oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston
rings and cylinders. A thin film of oil is left on the cylinder wall when a piston moves downwards in the cylinder. High negative pressure generated during engine operation sucks some of the oil into the combustion chamber. This oil with some oil of the cylinder wall is burned by the high temperature combustion gases during the combustion process. o The engine oil consumption is strongly effected by the viscosity and quality of oil, engine rpm and driving condition etc. More engine oil may be consumed under severe driving conditions such as high speeds, frequent acceleration and deceleration, compared to normal driving.
6-6
OWNER MAINTENANCE
G040A02GK-EAT
ENGINE OIL AND FILTER REPLACEMENT
DOHC
V6
G040A01GK
The engine oil and filter must be changed at the time or mileage interval specified in the maintenance schedule. If the vehicle is operated under severe or adverse conditions, the oil and filter must be replaced more frequently. To replace the oil and filter, proceed as follows:
1. Ensure that the engine is at normal operating temperature and park the vehicle on level ground with the parking brake securely applied and the engine turned off.
2. Open the bonnet and remove the oil filler cap. 3. Prepare a suitable receptacle to collect the
displaced oil and remove the drain plug from the sump.
WARNING: The oil being drained from the engine will be hot. Care should be exercised to prevent scalding.
4. When the oil has drained from the sump, replace the drain plug using a new washer ensuring that the plug is not over tightened.
Tightening torque: 4.5 ~ 4.0 kgf.m (1.6/2.0L) 4.5 ~ 3.5 kgf.m (2.7L)
5. Remove the oil filter by rotating counterclockwise, using a proprietary oil filter removal tool if necessary. Note that the oil filter will contain approximately 0.5 litres of oil and this should be collected in a suitable receptacle.
6. Install a new oil filter having smeared the sealing ring with clean oil and rotating clockwise until the filter contacts the mounting and then a further one half turn. Do not overtighten.
Tightening torque: 1.2 ~ 1.6 kgf.m.
7. Pour the specified quantity of the recommended oil into the engine and replace the filler cap. Start the engine and ensure that no oil leaks exist. Turn off the engine and after a couple minutes, recheck the oil level.
WARNING: Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oils may result in serious skin disorders including dermatitis and cancer. Avoid contact with skin as far as possible and al-
ways wash thoroughly after any contact. Keep used oils out of reach of children. It is illegal to pollute drains, water courses and soil. Use only authorized waste collection facilities including civic amenity sites and garages for the disposal of used oil and oil filters. If in doubt, contact the local authority for disposal instructions.
SG050A1-E
ENGINE COOLANT CHECKING AND REPLACING WARNING: Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot, since the system is pressurized and coolant may be ejected from the radiator resulting in scalding.
SG050B1-E
Coolant recommendations
HGK187
OWNER MAINTENANCE
Only ethylene glycol based coolant with a corrosion inhibitor suited to aluminium alloy engine components should be used in the cooling system. No further additives or inhibitors should be used. The coolant specific gravity should be checked as prescribed in the maintenance schedule to ensure adequate frost and corrosion protection. In addition, the engine coolant must be replaced at the specified interval since the corrosion inhibitor properties deteriorate with time. It is important to note that whilst an increase in the concentration of anti freeze gives an increase in the level of frost protection, a solution which is in excess of 65% anti freeze will result in reduced frost protection and engine overheating. Therefore the recommended concentration of 50% should not be exceeded for general use. The use of methanol based anti freeze compounds may result in engine overheating and will invalidate the vehicle warranty.
NOTE: It is imperative that vehicles fitted with an air conditioning system have a coolant concentration of the recommended strength at all times. The use of the air conditioning system when the cooling system is filled with water only will result in the heater matrix freezing and subsequently bursting.
SG050C1-E
Engine Coolant Level The engine coolant level may be observed through the side of the plastic coolant reservoir (expansion tank) when the engine is cold. If the level is below the "LOW" mark, add coolant of the correct concentration until the level is between the "LOW" and "Full" marks. If the level falls below the "LOW" mark on a regular basis despite being topped up, consult a Hyundai dealer.
SG050D1-E
To Change the Engine Coolant The engine coolant should be changed at those intervals specified in the vehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5.
NOTE: Care should be taken to ensure that coolant is not allowed to spill onto the paintwork since the finish may become damaged. If coolant spillage occurs, the affected area should be rinsed thoroughly with water.
1. Park the vehicle on level ground and ensure that the parking brake is firmly applied, and the engine allowed to cool. DO NOT ATTEMPT THIS OPERATION WHILST THE ENGINE IS HOT SINCE BURN-ING OR SCALDING MAY RESULT.
2. Prepare a suitable receptacle to collect the displaced coolant and position this under the radiator drain tap.
6-7
3. With the heater temperature control set to the "HOT" position, remove the radiator cap and open the radiator drain tap.
4. When the engine coolant has drained completely, close the drain tap ensuring that this is not over tightened.
5. Prepare a suitable quantity of new engine coolant (refer to section 9) and pour this into the radiator.
6. Start the engine with the radiator cap still removed and continue to add coolant as the level decreases as air is expelled from the system. When the level remains constant, replace the radiator cap and replenish the coolant reservoir.
7. When the engine is hot, check to ensure that no coolant leaks are present.
WARNING: The cooling fan is controlled by engine coolant temperature and may sometimes operate even when the engine is not running. Use extreme caution when working near the blades of the cooling fan so that you are not injured by a rotating fan blade. As the engine coolant temperature decreases, the fan will automatically shut off. This is a normal condition.
6-8
OWNER MAINTENANCE
G060B02GK-EAT
SPARKING PLUG REPLACEMENT
DOHC
V6
0.039 ~ 0.043 in. (1.0 ~ 1.1 mm) 0.039 ~ 0.043 in. (1.0 ~ 1.1 mm)
YN60100A
This operation should only be performed when the engine is cold.
1. Remove the engine rocker cover.
NOTE: It is recommended that the spark plug for Engine 2.7L should be changed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.
2. Remove plug lead from the sparking plug to be replaced, pulling the lead by the rubber cap. (Pulling the lead may damage the carbon conductor).
3. Clean around the base of the plug to be removed, and install the plug socket ensuring that the ceramic insulator does not become damaged. Turn the socket counterclockwise to remove the plug.
HGK256
CAUTION: Sparking plugs must only be cleaned using purpose designed equipment. Wire brushing may damage the centre electrode insulator causing mis-firing to occur. Only the correct grade of sparking plug should be used. Use of an incorrect grade may result in serious engine damage.
OWNER MAINTENANCE
SG070A1-E
AIR CLEANER ELEMENT REPLACEMENT
HGK257
Prior to installing a sparking plug, the gap between the centre and outer electrodes must be checked and adjusted as necessary. Adjustment is facilitated by bending the outer electrode towards or away from the centre electrode. Under no circumstances should attempts be made to adjust the position of the centre electrode.
4. Insert the sparking plug into the cylinder head and using a suitable plug socket, slowly ratate the sparking plug, until the plug contacts the seating area. Tighten the plug with the plug socket by a further 1/2 to 3/4 of a turn only.
HGK258
5. Replace the plug lead ensuring that the cap is pushed firmly into place. Confirm that the cap is correctly seated by lightly pulling upon it.
Recommended Spark Plugs
RC10YC4(CHAMPION) BKR5ES-11(NGK)
RC10PYPB4(CHAMPION) PFR5N-11(NGK)
1.6/2.0L 2.7L*
* Platinum coated.
NOTE: When replacing the spark plugs, genuine Hyundai replacement parts are recommended.
HGK213
To replace the air cleaner element, remove the air intake ducting from the air flow sensor body and unfasten the spring clips holding the air flow sensor top to the body. Lift out the air flow sensor followed by the air cleaner element. Replacement of the element is the reverse of the above.
CAUTION: o The air flow sensor is a precision engi-
neered electronic measuring device and therefore care should be exercised that the air flow sensor is not damaged during replacement of the element. o When removing the air cleaner element, be careful that dust or dirt does not enter the air intake. These may result in damage to the air cleaner element.
6-9
To ensure maximum filtration performance and continued engine performance, only genuine Hyundai replacements should be used.
SG080A2-E
WINDSCREEN WIPER BLADES
HEF119
The wiper blades should be carefully inspected from time to time and cleaned to remove accumulations of road film or other debris. To clean the wiper blades and arms, use a clean sponge or cloth with a mild soap or detergent and water. If the wipers continue to streak or smear the glass, replace them with genuine Hyundai replacement. CAUTION: o Do not operate the wipers on dry glass
since rapid wear and damage to the windscreen glass may result. o Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil, petrol etc. 6-10
OWNER MAINTENANCE
SG090A1-E
WINDSCREEN WASHER RESERVOIR REPLENISHMENT
HGK217
The level of windscreen washer fluid available should be checked on a daily basis. The level of fluid will be visible through the side of the reservoir. When the fluid is to be replenished, only a proprietary screen wash additive should be used and in the concentration recommended by the manufacturer. The windscreen washer reservoir has a total capacity of 3 litres.
CAUTION: Engine coolant anti freeze must not be used in the windscreen washer system since damage to the paintwork may result. Undiluted windscreen washer additive must not be allowed to come into contact with the paintwork. If spillage occurs, flush the affected area immediately with water. Do not operate the windscreen washer for more than
15 seconds continuously or when the reservoir is empty since damage to the washer pump will result.
SG100A1-E
MANUAL TRANSAXLE LUBRICANT The manual transaxle lubricant must be checked and/or changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. Only those lubricants specified should be used in order to prevent gear shifting difficulties or transaxle damage.
WARNING: The transaxle lubricant level should only be checked when the engine is cold to preclude the possibility of personal injury by contact with hot components.
Recommended Oil
Filler plug
Drain plug
G110A01E
Use only the approved transaxle lubricant. The recommended lubricants are complete in themselves and the use of additives is neither required nor recommended. The use of additives may invalidate the vehicle warranty. Transaxle Lubricant Level Checking
SSA6100B
Ensure that the vehicle is parked on level ground with the parking brake firmly applied and the engine cool. Remove the level plug from the transaxle when lubricant should begin to drip from the level hole. If the level is low and no lubricant is seen to drip, add the required quantity of lubricant and replace the plug.
SG110A2-E
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID The automatic transaxle fluid level should be checked and changed at those intervals pre-
OWNER MAINTENANCE
scribed in the maintenance schedule. It is of paramount importance that only the specified fluid is used when replenishing or changing the fluid. The use of other fluids may irreparably damage the transaxle and invalidate the manufacturers warranty. In addition the ingress of dirt or lint may prevent correct functioning of the transaxle and care must be exercised to prevent the ingress of such matter.
NOTE: Basically automatic transaxle fluid is red color. As driving distance increases, the fluid color turns darkish red gradually. It is normal condition and you should not use fluid color as a criterion for replacing the transaxle fluid. You must replace the automatic transaxle fluid in accordance with intervals specified in the vehicle maintenances schedule in section 5.
CAUTION: The transaxle fluid level must be checked with the engine running and at normal operating temperature and therefore care must be exercised to prevent injury occurring through contact with rotating or hot parts of the engine.
G110B03A-AAT
Recommended Fluid Your Hyundai automatic transaxle is specially designed to operate with DIAMOND ATF SP-III, SK ATF SP- III. Damage caused by a nonspecified fluid is not covered by your new vehicle limited warranty.
G110D02GK-EAT
Transaxle fluid level checking
DOHC
V6
HGK212
The vehicle must be parked on level ground with the parking brake firmly applied and the engine at normal operating temperature. (Normal operating temperature will only be achieved when the vehicle has been driven for 6 miles or more). With the engine idling and the footbrake applied, the transaxle selector should be moved from the "P" position through to the "L" position and back to the "N" or "P" position. Open the bonnet and remove the transaxle dipstick, remembering that care must be exercised to prevent injury occurring through contact with hot or rotating parts of the engine. Wipe the dipstick, replace it fully and promptly remove it again. The fluid level should be between the upper and lower marks. Fluid need only be added if the level is at or below the lower mark and must never be increased above the
6-11
higher mark. If additional fluid is required, this should be poured into the transaxle through the dipstick tube with the aid of a suitable funnel.
HGK174-D
WARNING: The cooling fan is controlled by engine coolant temperature and may sometimes operate even when the engine is not running. Use extreme caution when working near the blades of the cooling fan so that you are not injured by a rotating fan blade. As the engine coolant temperature decreases, the fan will automatically shut off. This is a normal condition.
Î
OWNER MAINTENANCE
Fluid level should be within this range
Î
HGK249
CAUTION: The automatic transaxle unit is a precision engineered assembly and correct operation is dependant upon the exclusion of dirt and lint from the unit. Therefore, it is imperative that only lint free cloth (eg nylon) is used for wiping the dipstick and that the area around the dipstick is thoroughly clean prior to level checking or adding fluid.
Fluid Capacity The total fluid capacity of the transaxle unit is 7.8 litres.
SG120A1-E
BRAKE SYSTEM CHECKING
CAUTION: Correct operation of the braking system is essential to the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, any maintenance operations other than those listed below should be entrusted to a Hyundai dealer.
SG120C2-E
Brake Fluid Recommendations Only brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications or higher may be used in the braking system. Care should be taken to observe the instructions and precautions printed upon the container.
SG120D1-E
Brake Fluid Level The fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir should be checked periodically. The level should be between the "MIN" and "MAX" marks on the side of the reservoir. If the level is at or below the "MIN" mark, fluid should be added having carefully cleaned the area surrounding the reservoir cap to ensure that dirt is not allowed to enter the system. It should be borne in mind that the brake fluid level will decrease slightly as the friction linings of the pads and shoes become worn and that this is a normal condition.
6-12
HGK215
WARNING: Brake fluid is hygroscopic and should never be stored in an unsealed container. The presence of water in the braking system will cause vapour locks and increase the possibility of brake fade along with promoting corrosion within the braking system. The brake fluid must be changed at the specified time or mileage interval to ensure continued safe operation of the system. Brake fluid will cause rapid and serious damage to paintwork. If accidental spillage occurs, the affected area must be rinsed with water immediately. Do not allow brake fluid to come into contact with the eyes or to be ingested and ensure that fluid is safely stored away form the reach of children.
OWNER MAINTENANCE
SG130A1-C
CHECKING THE CLUTCH FLUID (Not all models) To Check the Clutch Fluid
HGK216-D
The clutch fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked when performing other under bonnet checks. The system should be checked for leakage at the same time. Ensure that the clutch fluid level is always between the "MAX" and "MIN" level markings on the fluid reservoir. Fill as required. Fluid loss indicates a leak in the clutch system which should be inspected and repaired immediately.
SG130B2-E
Adding Fluid Recommended brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 should be used. The reservoir cap must be fully tightened to avoid contamination from foreign matter or moisture.
CAUTION: Brake fluid is hygroscopic and should never be stored in an unsealed container. Do not allow petroleum base fluid to contaminate the brake fluid since damage to the rubber seals of the system may result.
WARNING: Brake fluid will cause rapid and serious damage to paintwork. If accidental spillage occurs, the affected area must be rinsed with water immediately. Do not allow brake fluid to come into contact with the eyes or to be ingested and ensure that fluid is safely stored away form the reach of children.
SG140A1-E
AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Condenser Ensure that the condenser is periodically inspected and that accumulations of dirt, dead insects and leaves etc, are removed to ensure that the efficiency of the system is not impaired. Care must be exercised to ensure that the condenser fins are not damaged during cleaning.
6-13
SG140C2-E
Checking the Refrigerant 1. Start the engine and run at idle for several
minutes with the refrigeration system running at the coldest setting. 2. If the air coming out of the in-dash vents is not cold, have the air conditioning system inspected by your Hyundai dealer.
CAUTION: Running the air conditioning system for extended periods of time with a low refrigerant level may damage the compressor.
SG140D1-E
Off Season Maintenance The air conditioning must be run for ten minutes or so weekly during periods when the system would not normally be used to ensure that the compressor and seals are lubricated. If this precaution is not observed the compressor seals may become stuck to the compressor shaft and damaged when the system is next used resulting in a loss of refrigerant and damage to the compressor.
OWNER MAINTENANCE
SG140B1-E
Compressor Drive Belt
DOHC
V6
Auto tensioner A/C
0.315 in.
(8mm)
TENSION PULLEY
CRANK PULLEY
Eng.pulley
COMP
G140D01GK
The air conditioning compressor drive belt should be checked to ensure freedom from damage or excessive wear and correct tension. The belt tension is correct when the belt deflects by about 0.3 inches (8 mm) when a force of 98 N is applied to the belt halfway between the compressor and crankshaft pulleys. Adjustment of the belt should be entrusted to a Hyundai dealer.
B760B01GK-GAT
Replacement of air conditioner filter:
HGK250-D
1. Remove the mounting screws on the downside of the glove box.
HGK251-D
2. Open the glove box and remove the mounting screws on the upside of the glove box.
6-14
OWNER MAINTENANCE
CAUTION: Be sure to install the air filter in the direction of the arrow sign. Otherwise, it may cause noise or deterioration.
SG160A1-E
CLUTCH PEDAL FREEPLAY
SG150A1-E
STEERING WHEEL FREEPLAY
0.24 ~ 0.51 in. (6 ~ 13 mm)
3. Remove the filter cover.
HGK253-D
1.18in. (30 mm)
HGK218
Steering wheel freeplay should be checked to ensure that the specified value is not exceeded.
SSA6160A
The clutch pedal freeplay should be checked against the specified value. If the freeplay is not correct, the clutch should be adjusted by a Hyundai dealer.
HGK254-D
4. Replace the air filter with a new one. 5. Installation is the reverse order of disassem-
bly.
6-15
SG170A1-E
BRAKE PEDAL FREEPLAY
0.12 ~ 0.31 in. (3 ~ 8 mm)
OWNER MAINTENANCE
SG190A1-E
DRIVE BELTS DOHC
Water Pump Pulley
0.2 ~ 0.24 in. (5.1~6 mm)
V6
Power steering
Auto tensioner
SG200A1-E
FUSIBLE LINKS
Melted Good
SSA6170A
The brake pedal freeplay should be checked with the engine turned off. The pedal to floor clearance should be checked with the engine running and a load of 490 N applied to the pedal. If either value is incorrect, the necessary adjustment should be performed by a Hyundai dealer. Pedal to floor clearance: 1.97 in. (50 mm)
Generator Pulley Crankshaft Pulley
Generator
COMP
Eng.pulley
G190A01GK
The various engine drive belts must be checked
for condition, tension and freedom from damage
and excessive wear. The tension of a new belt
must be checked after thirty minutes running
following fitment of the new belt to allow for the
initial belt stretch.
AS60310A
The fusible link prevents damage to the wiring harness in the event of an electrical system malfunction. Failure of a fusiblelink is indicative of a serious overload condition having occurred and therefore the electrical system should be checked by a Hyundai dealer before a replacement link is fitted.
WARNING: Under no circumstances should a fusible link be replaced with anything other than a new link of the same rating. The use of higher rated links or other means of connecting the circuit will create a potential fire hazard.
6-16
SG200B2-E
INDIVIDUAL CIRCUIT FUSES
HGK185-D
The fuse box containing the individual circuit fuses is located on the lower portion of the dashboard adjacent to the bonnet release. The fuse box cover is removed by pushing lightly and then releasing the lid. A fuse rating grid will be found on the reverse side of the cover. In the event of fuse failure, the fuse should be replaced with one of equivalent rating. A fuse removal tool is provided within the fuse box to facilitate replacement. In the event of a replacement fuse failing shortly after installation a malfunction within the circuit protected by that fuse is indicated. The circuit should be checked by a Hyundai dealer at the first available opportunity.
OWNER MAINTENANCE
AXA6201B
WARNING: The use of replacement fuses having a higher rating than specified or other means of connecting the circuit will create a potential fire hazard. NOTE: See page 6-22 for the fuse panel descriptions.
SG210A1-E
BATTERY MAINTENANCE WARNING: Motor vehicle batteries contain sulphuric acid which is corrosive and poisonous. Hydrogen gas is emitted from the battery which is explosive when combined with oxygen. The following precautions must be strictly observed to avoid personal injury or damage to the vehicle.
o If battery electrolyte is spilled onto skin or into eyes, the effected area must be flushed with copious amounts of water and medical assistance sought.
o If battery electrolyte is ingested, copious amounts of water or milk followed by an antacid (raw egg or milk of magnesia) must be drunk. Vomiting should not be induced and medical assistance must be sought.
o Batteries must only be charged in well ventilated areas from which naked lights or sources of sparks are excluded.
o Ensure that children, pets or other unauthorized persons are kept away from batteries.
o Do not allow anything to bridge the positive (+) and negative (-) terminals of the battery.
o Never invert the battery.
The battery fitted during production is of the "Maintenance Free" type.
SG220A1-E
ELECTRIC COOLING FANS WARNING: The cooling fan is controlled by engine coolant temperature and may sometimes operate even when the engine is not running. Use extreme caution when working near the blades of the cooling fan so that you are not injured by a rotating fan blade. As the engine coolant temperature decreases, the fan will automatically shut off. This is a normal condition.
6-17
The engine cooling fan should operate before the temperature gauge reaches the upper portion of the scale and the condenser fan should operate whenever the air conditioning is in use.
SG230A1-E
POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL
HGK214
The power steering fluid level should be checked daily. To check the power steering fluid level, be sure the ignition is "OFF", then check to make certain that the power steering fluid level is between the "MAX" and "MIN" level markings on the fluid reservoir.
OWNER MAINTENANCE
NOTE: Grinding noise from power steering pump may be heard immediately after the engine is started in extremely cold condition (below -20°C). In this case, if the noise stops during warm up, there is no abnormal function in the system. This is due to a power steering fluid characteristic in extremely cold conditions.
FLUID RECOMMENDATION Only automatic transaxle fluid meeting the specification of PSF-3 or Dexron 2 oil should be used in the power steering system.
SG230B1-E
POWER STEERING HOSES Power steering hoses should be checked for damage, deterioration and leakage at each service.
SG250A2-E
REPLACING HEADLIGHT BULBS In the event of bulb failure being experienced, ensure that the relative lighting circuit is turned off prior to attempting to replace the bulb. The illustrations on the following pharagraph will assist in locating and removing the headlight bulbs. Ensure that the replacement bulb has the same cap configuration and wattage as the original.
G270A02A-GAT
HEADLIGHT BULB Replacement instructions:
Turn signal Light
Low Beam
High Beam
HGK225
1. Allow the bulb to cool. Wear eye protection. 2. Always grasp the bulb by its plastic base,
avoid touching the glass. 3. Disconnect the power cord from the bulb
base in the back of the headlight. 4. Remove the dust cover. 5. Push the bulb spring for removing the head-
light bulb. 6. Remove the protective cap from the replace-
ment bulb and install the new bulb by matching the plastic base with the headlight hole. Install the dust cover after retightening the bulb spring and reconnect the power cord. 7. Use the protective cap and carton to dispose of the old bulb. 8. Check for proper headlight aim.
6-18
WARNING: The halogen bulb contains gas under pressure and if impacted could shatter, resulting in flying fragments. Always wear eye protection when servicing the bulb. Protect the bulb against abrasions or scratches and against liquids when lighted. Turn on the bulb only when installed in a headlight. Replace the headlight if damaged or cracked. Keep the bulb out of the reach of children and dispose of the used bulb with care.
G290A01GK-EAT
HEADLIGHT AIMING ADJUSTMENT
Low Beam
Vertical aiming
Horizontal aiming
G290A01GK
OWNER MAINTENANCE
High Beam
Vertical aiming
Horizontal aiming
G290A02GK
Before performing aiming adjustment, make sure of the following.
1. Keep all tyres inflated to the correct pressure. 2. Place the vehicle on level ground and press
the front bumper & rear bumper down several times. Place vehicle at a distance of 118.1 in. (3m) from the test wall. 3. See that the vehicle is unloaded (except for full levels of coolant, engine oil and fuel, and spare tyres, jack, and tools). 4. Clean the head lights lens and turn on the headlight. 5. Open the bonnet. 6. Draw the vertical line (through the centre of each headlight beam pattern) and the horizontal line (through the centre of each headlight beam pattern) on the aiming screen. And then, draw a parallel line at 1.18 in. (30 mm) under the horizontal line.
7. Adjust each cut-off line of the low beam to the parallel line with a phillips screwdriver - VERTICAL AIMING.
8. Adjust each cut-off line of the low beam to the each vertical line with a phillips screwdriver HORIZONTAL AIMING.
G290B01GK-EAT
Adjustment After Headlight Assembly Replacement
1.18 in.(30 mm)
Horizontal line
W
Vertical line
"P"
Cut-off line
H
Ground line
L H
G290B02Y
If the vehicle has had front body repair and the headlight assembly has been replaced, the headlight aiming should be checked using an aiming screen as shown in the illustration. Turn on the headlight switch. 1. Adjust headlights so that main axis of light is
parallel to centre line of the body and is aligned with point "P" shown in the illustration. 2. Dotted lines in the illustration show centre of headlights.
6-19
SPECIFICATION: "H" Horizontal centre line of headlights from ground: Low Beam: 26.7 in. (679mm) High Beam: 26.5 in. (672mm)
"W" Distance between each headlight centre : Low Beam: 47.3 in. (1,202mm) High Beam: 38.0 in. (966mm)
"L" Distance between the headlights and the wall that the lights are tested against : 118.11 in. (3,000 mm)
OWNER MAINTENANCE
6-20
G280A02GK-EAT
OWNER MAINTENANCE
11 2
(High) (Low)
7
8
3 45
6
9 10 11 12 13
No.
Part Name
1 Head Light (High/Low)
2 Map Light
3 Front Position Light
4 Front Fog Light (Not all models)
5 Front Turn Signal Light
6 Front Door Edge Warning Light
7 Luggage Compartment Light
Wattage 55/55 10 5 51 21 5 5
No.
Part Name
8
High Mounted Without spoiler
Stop LIght
With spoiler
9
Rear
Turn Signal Light
10 Combination Stop/Tail Light
11
Back-up Light
12 License Plate Light
13 Rear Fog Light (Not all models)
HGK035A
Wattage 2.4 (LED) 3.5 (LED)
21 21/5 21
5 21
6-21
OWNER MAINTENANCE
G200C01GK-GAT
FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION Engine Compartment
Not all models
HGK205-E
DESCRIPTION BATT BATT COND RAD ECU IGN ABS 1 ABS 2
BLOWER INJ
SNSR DRL F/FOG ECU HORN,A/CON H/LP (H1) H/LP (LO)
FUSE RATING PROTECTED COMPONENTS
120A
Generator
50A
Generator
30A
Condenser Fan
30A
Radiator Fan
30A
Engine Control, ECM. ATM Control
30A
Ignition, Start Relay
30A
ABS
30A
ABS
30A
Blower
15A
Injector
10A
O2 Sensor, ECM
15A
DRL
15A
Front fog Light
10A
TCM, ECM
15A
Horn. A/conditioner
15A
Head Light (High)
15A
Head Light (LOW)
NOTE: Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.
6-22
G200D01GK-GAT
Inner Panel
OWNER MAINTENANCE
HGK204-E
DESCRIPTION FUSERATING PROTECTED COMPONENTS
IG COIL
20A
Ignition Coil, ECM
AMP
20A
AMP. Multi Gauge Unit
B/UP LAMP
10A
B/Up Lamp
A/BAG IND
10A
Air Bag Indicator
A/BAG
15A
Air Bag
HTD MIR
10A
Outside Mirror Defroster
HAZARD R/WIPER TAIL-RH F/WIPER A/C SW RR DEFOG
STOP
10A
Hazard Warning Light
15A
Rear Window Wiper
10A
Taillight
20A
Front Window Wiper
10A
A/Conditioner
30A
Rear Window Defroster
15A
Stop Light
TAIL-LH A/CON
10A
Tail light
10A
A/Conditioner
ECU CLUSTER ROOM LP P/WINDOW
T/GATE IGN
RR FOG C/LIGHT S/ROOF S/HTR
ABS AUDIO
10A
ECM, Multi Gauge Unit, TCM
10A
Cluster
10A
Map Light, Clock, Audio
30A
Power Window
15A
Hatchback door Open
10A
A/Con, A.Q.S Sensor
10A
Rear Fog
15A
C/Lighter, Outside Mirror
15A
Sunroof
20A
Seat Warmer
10A
ABS. TCS
10A
Audio, Clock
6-23
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
SH000A1-E
7. EMISSION
CONTROL SYSTEM
by introducing fresh air to the crankcase through the air cleaner where this mixes with blow-by gases and then passes through the PCV valve into the intake manifold from where it subsequently enters the combustion chamber and is burned.
SH010D1-E
3. EXHAUST EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The exhaust emission control system is a highly effective system which controls exhaust emission while maintaining good vehicle performance.
SH010A1-E
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS (Not all models) Depending upon the market for which the vehicle is destined, the emission control system will comprise one or more of the following emission control devices.
(1) Crankcase emission control system (2) Evaporative emission control system (3) Exhaust emission control system
In order that the proper functioning of the emission control systems may be ensured, it is recommended that the vehicle is inspected and maintained by an authorized Hyundai dealer in accordance with the maintenance schedule in this manual.
SH010B1-E
1. CRANKCASE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The positive crankcase ventilation system is employed to prevent air pollution caused by blow-by gases being emitted from the crankcase
SH010C1-E
2. EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
CONTROL SYSTEM
The Evaporative Emission Control System is designed to prevent fuel vapours from escaping into the atmosphere through the fuel tank ventilation system. Whilst the engine is not running, fuel vapours generated inside the fuel tank are absorbed and stored in a charcoal canister. When the engine is started, the vapours stored in the canister are drawn into the induction system through the purge control solenoid valve and are subsequently burned. The purge control solenoid valve is controlled by the ECU; when the engine coolant temperature is low or the engine is idling, the purge control valve is closed and fuel vapours remain stored in the canister. Under normal running conditions when the engine is warm, the valve opens and the vapours are drawn into the inlet tract and subsequently burned in the combustion chamber.
SH020A1-E
CATALYTIC CONVERTOR OPERATING PRECAUTIONS
Catalytic Converter
SSA7020A
7
Hyundai Coupe models are fitted with catalytic convertors which require special operating considerations. The catalytic convertor serves to oxidize certain noxious elements of the exhaust gases leaving the engine to reduce the level of pollutants emitted from the vehicle and, provided that care is exercised to prevent damage, the catalyst will operate efficiently for the life of the vehicle. It is of the utmost importance that the following information is read and understood by the ve-
7-1
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
hicle operator in order to prevent operational problems arising from damage to the catalyst. Damage to the catalyst will result if contamination occurs through the use of leaded fuel. Whilst the vehicle is fitted with a reduced diameter filler neck to prevent charging of the fuel tank with a leaded fuel pump nozzle, it is possible that the use of funnels or jerry cans will permit leaded fuel to be introduced into the fuel tank. The catalyst is intolerant of unburnt fuel and therefore if an engine misfire condition exists, damage to the catalyst will occur. It is imperative that if a misfire condition develops, the vehicle is immediately presented to a Hyundai dealer for rectification. Similarly, the practice of certain ignition system diagnosis procedures which involve inducing a misfire (cylinder power balance tests for example) may result in catalyst damage. For these reasons, it is advisable that the exhaust gas emission be tested at each routine service with a gas analyzer having a Hydrocarbon measuring facility to ensure continued reliability of the catalyst. Push or tow starting of the vehicle is to be avoided since unburnt fuel may be enter the catalyst and result in damage. (Note, it is impossible to push or tow start a Hyundai model equipped with fuel injection since the fuel pump safety interlock will prevent the pump from operating under these conditions). Operation of the catalyst involves extremely high temperatures being attained within the catalytic convertor, and although the convertor is fitted
7-2
with heat shields, it is important that the vehicle is not parked over combustible or volatile material which may result in fire. If the above precautions are not adhered to and the catalyst becomes inoperative, the resultant increase in core temperature will result in a "melt down" where the catalyst core will melt and subsequently may block the exhaust system. Due to the fragile nature of the catalyst element, it is important that damage does not occur when the vehicle is raised by means of a garage jack. Care must also be exercised to avoid driving over road hazards or debris which may cause damage to the catalyst element.
SI000A1-E
8. CONSUMER INFORMATION
SI010A1-E
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
HGK220
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is unique to each individual vehicle and is the number (sometimes referred to as chassis number) used upon the vehicle registration document to identify the vehicle. The VIN will be found stamped upon a plate attached to the engine bulkhead.
CONSUMER INFORMATION
SI010B1-E
Engine Number
DOHC
V6
I010B01GK
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown in the drawing.
I030A01GK-EAT
TYRE PRESSURES
HGK092-D
In modern high-speed motoring, correct tyre pressures are vitally important. Incorrect tyre
pressures can affect vehicle safety by causing reduced adhesion, steering response and tyre failure through overheating. The tyre pressure must only be checked when the tyres are cold. The correct tyre pressures are indicated on the label affixed to the drivers door pillar and below.
PRESSURE, kPa (PSI)
RIM SIZE
TIRE SIZE
UP TO 2 PERSONS
UP TO MAX. LOAD
FRONT REAR FRONT REAR
6.0Jx15 195/65R15 210(30) 210(30) 210(30) 210(30) 6.5Jx16 205/55R16 210(30) 210(30) 230(33) 230(33) 7.0Jx17 215/45R17 220(32) 210(30) 240(35) 230(33) 4Tx16 T125/70R16 420(60) 420(60) 420(60) 420(60)
Tyre pressures should be increased by 3 psi when the vehicle is driven fully laden or under conditions of sustained high speed motoring.
SI030A2-E
SNOW TYRES
If it is desired to fit snow tyres to the vehicle, it must be ascertained that the original size and
load carrying capacity are met by the replace- 8
ment tyres. When using snow tyres, the vehicle should not be driven at speeds in excess of 60 MPH.
8-1
I050A01GK-EAT
TYRE CHAINS
Tyre chains should be installed on the front wheels. Be sure that the chains are installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Refer to the following information.
Tyre size 205/55 R 16 215/45 R 17
Snow Chain Thickness Max. 10 mm Max. 10 mm
To minimize tyre and chain wear, do not continue to use tyre chains when they are no longer needed.
WARNING: o When driving on roads covered with snow
or ice, drive at less than 30 km/h (20 mph). o Use a tyre chains less than 10mm to 16",
17" tyre. o Avoid sudden stop and turn. o Tighten firmly not to hear contact sound, if
it still sounds, remove the chains for damage protection.
CONSUMER INFORMATION
I060A01GK-EAT
TYRE ROTATION
16" Tyre
17" Tyre
I060A01GK
The tyre wear characteristics will vary between each tyre dependant upon the conditions of use. It is normal for the front tyres to wear more rapidly than those fitted to the rear of the vehicle and therefore tyre rotation will provide a means of helping to ensure an even wear rate across the tyre set. For vehicles fitted with radial ply tyres, rotation should be confined to front to rear tyre alternation. It is not recommended that radial ply tyres be rotated from side to side.
NOTE: Aluminium wheels which are not supplied as Original Equipment should not be mixed on the same vehicle with the original steel wheels.
Sidewall
Tyre rotation direction
I060A02GK
WARNING: When rotating the 215/45 R17 tyres, ensure to follow the"ROTATION" direction marked on the sidewall of tyres. When rotating the tyres of the left and right, separate the wheel from the tyre and then reassemble them. However, it is acceptable that the steel spare wheel be used in conjunction with Original Equipment aluminium wheels since the offset of both wheels is compatible. Radial and cross ply tyres should not be mixed on the same vehicle.
8-2
SI060A1-E
TYRE BALANCING Incorrect tyre balance will cause steering vibration and uneven tyre wear. The vehicle tyres are balanced during production but may need further balancing throughout the life of the tyres. It is recommended that the tyres be balanced on the car for best results and that the tyres are balanced whenever they have been removed from the wheel for repair.
SI060B1-E
TYRE REPLACEMENT 0.06 in. (1.6 mm )
Wear indicator
HGK248
Tyres must be replaced when the wear indicators appear as a solid bar across the tyre tread. At this point, the remaining tread depth will be approximately 1.6 mm. In addition to this, the tyre must be replaced if any portion of the tread has become bald or if there are any lumps, bulges or deep cuts in the sidewalls or tread.
CONSUMER INFORMATION
Replacement tyres must be of the recommended size and rating and should be of the same manufacture and tread pattern on each axle.
SI060D1-E
WHEEL REPLACEMENT The original wheels may only be replaced with Hyundai Approved Wheels.
WARNING: Driving on worn or defective tyres is dangerous. Worn tyres may cause loss of steering control and a serious deterioration of braking efficiency. Defective tyres may cause vibration and loss of control through blow outs.
Tyres of different size, construction or tread pattern should not be intermixed on the same axle. Radial and cross ply tyres should not be used on the same vehicle. The use of tyres and wheels of non approved sizes can be dangerous.
8-3
VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
SJ000A1-F
9. VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
J030A01GK-DAT
TYRE
1.6 & 2.0 L
2.7 V6
J010A01GK-AAT
MEASUREMENT
in. (mm)
205 / 55 R16
215 / 45 R17
Overall length Overall width Overall height (unladen)
173(4395) 69.3(1760) 52.4(1330)
J035A01GK-DAT
SPARE TYRE
Standard
T125/70R 16 (Temporary)
Wheel base
99.6(2530)
Wheel tread
Front Rear
58.7(1490) 58.7(1490)
J040A02GK-GAT
ELECTRICAL
J020A01GK-AAT
POWER STEERING
Item Battery Alternator
1.6L MF 60AH
90A
2.0L MF 68AH
90A
2.7L MF 68AH
95A
Type
Rack and pinion
Wheel free play Rack stroke
0 ~ 1.18 in. (0 ~ 30 mm) 5.20 in. (132 mm)
J050A01GK-GAT
BRAKE
Oil pump type
Vane type
Type
Dual hydraulic with brake booster
Front brake type
Ventilated disc
SJ030A1-E
FUEL SYSTEM
Rear brake type
Solid Disk
Parking brake
Cable
9
Fuel tank
Litre
US.gal
Imp.gal
capacity
55
14.5
12
9-1
VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
J070A03GK-EAT
ENGINE
ITEMS
Engine Type
Bore x Stroke
Displacement (cc)
Firing order
In.
Valve clearance For adjusting Ex.
(Cold Engine In.
20 ± 5°C)
For checking Ex.
Spark plug Spark plug gap
NGK CHAMPION
Idle speed (RPM)
Ignition timing (Base)
1.6 L
76.5 x 87 1,599
1 - 3 - 4 - 2
AUTO LASH
BKR5ES-11 RC10YC4
700 ± 100 BTDC 5° ± 5°
SPECIFICATION 2.0 L
4-Cyl., In-line DOHC CVVT 82 x 93.5 1,975 1 - 3 - 4 - 2
0.0067 ~ 0.0091 in. (0.17 ~ 0.23 mm) 0.0098 ~ 0.0122 in. (0.25 ~ 0.31 mm) 0.0047 ~ 0.011 in. (0.12 ~ 0.28 mm)
0.0079 ~ 0.015 in. (0.2 ~ 0.38 mm)
0.039 ~ 0.043 in. (1.0 ~ 1.1 mm)
700 ± 100 BTDC 8° ± 5°
2.7 L 2.7 6 Cylinder V6 DOHC
86.7 x 75 2,656
1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6
AUTO LASH
PFR5N-11 RC10PYPB4
750 ± 100 BTDC 12° ± 10°
9-2
VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS
J080A03GK-EAT
LUBRICATION CHART
Item
Oil & Grease Standard
Engine Oil
1.6/2.7L API SG or
SAE 20W-40, 20W-50 (ABOVE -10°C)
ABOVE
SAE 15W-40, 15W-50 (ABOVE -15°C)
SAE 10W-30 (-25°C ~ 40°C)
SAE 10W-40, 10W-50 (ABOVE -25°C)
SAE 5W-20 *1, *2 (BELOW -10°C)
SAE 5W-30 *1 (BELOW 10°C)
SAE 5W-40 *1 (BELOW 20°C)
2.0L
API SH or
SAE 15W- 40 (ABOVE -10°C)
ABOVE,
SAE 10W-30 (-25°C ~ 40°C)
ILSAC GF-1 SAE 10W-40 (ABOVE -25°C)
or ABOVE SAE 5W-20 (BELOW -10°C) *1, *2
SAE 5W-30 (BELOW 10°C) *1
SAE 5W-40 (BELOW 20°C) *1
*1. Restricted to driving condition and vehicle destination
*2. Not recommended for sustained high speed vehicle operation
Engine Oil Consumption Normal driving condition
Severe driving condition
Transaxle Manual HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/90 (API GL-4)
Auto
DIAMOND ATF SP-III or SK ATF SP-III
Power Steering
Dexron 2
Brake Fluid
DOT 3 or DOT 4 equivalent
Coolant
Ethylene glycol base for aluminium radiator
Q'ty (Imp.qts.) (litre, us.qts.) Engine Oil: 1.6 L : 2.9(3.3, 3.5) 2.0L : 3.39 (3.85, 4.07) 2.7L : 4.0 (4.5, 4.76) Oil Pan: 1.6 L: 2.64(3.0, 3.17) (MAX)
1.76 (2.0, 2.11)(MIN) 2.0L: 3.12(3.55, 3.75) (MAX)
3.3 (2.6, 2.7)(MIN) 2.7L: 3.7 (4.2, 4.44) (MAX)
3 (3.4, 3.59) (MIN) Oil Filter : 0.26(0.3, 0.32)
MAX. 1L / 1500 Km MAX. 1L / 1000 Km 5 speed : 1.86 (2.15, 2.27), 6 speed : 1.94 (2.2, 2.32) 6.9 (7.8, 8.2) As required As required 1.6L/2.0L : 6.2 (7.0, 7.4) 2.7L : 7.0 (8.0, 8.5)
9-3
INDEX
JK000A2-EAT
10. INDEX
A AIR BAG ........................................................................................... 1-19 AIR CONDITIONING SWITCH ......................................................... 1-56 AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ............................ 6-13 AIR CLEANER ELEMENT REPLACEMENT ..................................... 6-9 AIR CONDITIONER FILTER ............................................................ 1-62 ANTENNA ......................................................................................... 1-67 ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM ........................................................... 2-8 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID ............................................. 6-11 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION .......................................................... 2-5
B BATTERY MAINTENANCE .............................................................. 6-17 BEFORE FOLDING THE REAR SEATS ......................................... 1-10 BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE .................................................. 2-2 BONNET RELEASE ......................................................................... 1-45 BRAKE PEDAL FREEPLAY ............................................................. 6-16 BRAKE SYSTEM CHECKING ......................................................... 6-12
C CARE OF CASSETTE TAPE ........................................................... 1-65 CARE OF DISC ................................................................................ 1-65 CARE OF SEAT BELTS .................................................................. 1-12 CATALYTIC CONVERTOR OPERATING PRECAUTIONS ....... 7-1~7-2 CENTRAL DOOR LOCK .................................................................... 1-4 CHANGING A FLAT TYPE ................................................................ 3-3 CHECKING THE CLUTCH FLUID ................................................... 6-13 CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM ......................................................... 1-14 CIGAR LIGHTER .............................................................................. 1-37 CLUTCH PEDAL FREEPLAY .......................................................... 6-15 COMBINATION IGNITION SWITCH AND STEERING LOCK .......... 2-2 CRUISE CONTROL ......................................................................... 1-49
D DAILY OPERATING CHECKS ........................................................... 6-4 DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING ........................................................... 1-55 DIGITAL CLOCK .............................................................................. 1-37 DOOR LOCKS .................................................................................... 1-2 DOOR WINDOWS .............................................................................. 1-6 DRINK HOLDER .............................................................................. 1-38 DRIVE BELTS .................................................................................. 6-16
DRIVING FOR ECONOMY .............................................................. 2-10 10
10-1
INDEX
E EFFECTIVE BRAKING ....................................................................... 2-8 ELECTRIC COOLING FANS ........................................................... 6-17 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS ..................................................... 7-1 ENGINE COMPARTMENT ................................................................. 6-1 ENGINE COOLANT CHECKING AND REPLACING ........................ 6-7 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GUAGE ............................... 1-30 ENGINE OIL AND FILTER REPLACEMENT .................................... 6-6 ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION ........................................................... 6-6 ENGINE OIL REPLENISHMENT ....................................................... 6-5 ENGINE OIL ....................................................................................... 6-4 EXTERIOR REAR VIEW MIRROR .................................................. 1-42
F FOLDING REAR SEAT .................................................................... 1-10 FRONT ASHTRAY ........................................................................... 1-38 FRONT DOOR EDGE WARNING LAMP ........................................ 1-45 FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH ......................................................... 1-44 FRONT SEAT ADJUSTMENT ........................................................... 1-7 FRONT SEAT BELT PIVOT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT .................... 1-12 FUEL ECONOMY ............................................................................... 2-3 FUEL GAUGE .................................................................................. 1-29 FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS ............................................................ 1-1 FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION ......................................................... 6-22 FUSIBLE LINKS ............................................................................... 6-16
10-2
G GLOVE BOX ..................................................................................... 1-41
H HATCHBACK DOOR ........................................................................ 1-46 HATCHBACK DOOR WIPER AND WASHER ................................ 1-36 HAZARD WARNING SYSTEM ........................................................ 1-36 HEADLIGHT BULB ........................................................................... 6-18 HEADLIGHT AIMING ADJUSTMENT .............................................. 6-18 HEADLIGHT LEVELING DEVICE SYSTEM .................................... 1-38 HEAD RESTRAINT ADJUSTMENT ................................................... 1-8 HEATED REAR WINDOW ............................................................... 1-36 HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL ............................................ 1-51
ROTARY TYPE ................................................................. 1-52 ~ 1-56 AUTOMATIC TYPE ........................................................... 1-57 ~ 1-62 HORN ............................................................................................... 1-48
I IF THE ENGINE CANNOT BE CRANKED ........................................ 3-1 IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS .......................................................... 3-2 IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START .................................................. 3-1 IF THE EVENT OF A PUNCTURE .................................................... 3-3 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM ..................................................................... 1-2 INDIVIDUAL CIRCUIT FUSES ......................................................... 6-17 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATORS ................................ 1-26
INDEX
INSTRUMENT PANEL ILLUMINATION CONTROL ........................ 1-37 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS .................................................. 1-25 INTERIOR REAR VIEW MIRROR ................................................... 1-43
O ODOMETER ..................................................................................... 1-31 OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR HEATER ...................................... 1-42
J JUMP STARTING ............................................................................... 3-1
K KEY POSITIONS ................................................................................ 2-2 KEYS .................................................................................................. 1-2
P
PARKING BRAKE ............................................................................ 1-43 POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL ................................................. 6-18 POWER STEERING HOSES ........................................................... 6-18 PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT ............................................ 1-18 ~ 1-19 PROTECTING YOUR HYUNDAI FROM CORROSION .................... 4-1
L LIGHTING SWITCH .......................................................................... 1-34 LUGGAGE NET ................................................................................ 1-48 LUMBAR SUPPORT ADJUSTMENT ................................................. 1-8
M MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING REQUIREMENTS ..................... 5-1 MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS .............. 5-4 MANUAL TRANSMISSION LUBRICANT ......................................... 6-10 MANUAL TRANSMISSION ................................................................ 2-4 MAP LIGHT ...................................................................................... 1-40 MULTI FUNCTION SWITCH ............................................................ 1-33 MULTI GAUGE ................................................................................. 1-33
R REAR FOG LIGHT SWITCH ............................................................ 1-44 REAR PARCEL SHELF ................................................................... 1-11 REAR SEAT ENTRY .......................................................................... 1-9 REAR SEAT POSITIONS .................................................................. 1-9 RECOMMENDED SHIFT POINTS ..................................................... 2-5 REMOTE FUEL FILLER LID RELEASE .......................................... 1-46 REPLACING LIGHT BULBS ............................................................ 6-18 RUNNING IN ...................................................................................... 1-1
S SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE .......................................................... 5-2 SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS ........................................................... 1-11 SEAT BELTS (3-Point Type) ............................................................ 1-13
10-3
INDEX
SEAT CUSHION HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 1-8 SEAT WARMER ................................................................................. 1-9 SERVICE HISTORY ........................................................................... 5-1 SMOOTH CORNERING ................................................................... 2-11 SNOW TYRES ................................................................................... 8-1 SPARE TYRE ..................................................................................... 3-3 SPARKING PLUG REPLACEMENT .................................................. 6-8 SPECTACLE CASE ......................................................................... 1-41 SPEEDOMETER .............................................................................. 1-30 STARTING THE ENGINE .................................................................. 2-3 STEERING WHEEL FREEPLAY ..................................................... 6-15 STEERING WHEEL TILT LEVER .................................................... 1-48 STEREO SOUND SYSTEM ............................................................. 1-63 SUN VISOR ...................................................................................... 1-47 SUNROOF ........................................................................................ 1-39 SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT (AIRBAG) SYSTEM ...................... 1-19
T TACHOMETER ................................................................................. 1-30 THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM ................................................................... 1-4 TOWING ATTACHMENTS ............................................................... 2-12 TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM ....................................................... 2-9 TRAILER AND CARAVAN TOWING ............................................... 2-12 TRIP COMPUTER ............................................................................ 1-31 TRIP ODOMETER ............................................................................ 1-31
10-4
TYRE PRESSURES ........................................................................... 8-1 TYRE BALANCING ............................................................................ 8-3 TYRE CHAINS ................................................................................... 8-2 TYRE REPLACEMENT ...................................................................... 8-3 TYRE ROTATION .............................................................................. 8-2
V VARIABLE INTERMITTENT WIPE FACILITY ................................. 1-35 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER .............................................. 8-1 VEHICLE TOWING OR RECOVERY ................................................ 3-7
W WHEEL REPLACEMENT ................................................................... 8-3 WINDSCREEN WASHER RESERVOIR REPLENISHMENT .......... 6-10 WINDSCREEN WIPER BLADES ..................................................... 6-10 WINDSCREEN WASHER OPERATION .......................................... 1-35 WINDSCREEN WIPER/WASHER SWITCH .................................... 1-35 WINTER MOTORING ....................................................................... 2-11